Som

Ope

rato

r’s

Man

ualS

prin

ter

9 0 6 5 8 4 4 8 7 1

Order no. 6462 7471 13 Part no. 906 584 48 71 Edition B MY 2011 MB

mmer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG

Bild in der Größe

153x145 mm einfügen

SprinterOperator’s Manual

Symbols

$ Warning% Environmental note! Possible vehicle damage+ Helpful hints or further informationX InstructionsYY Continuation symbol(Y page) page referenceDisplay Messages in the display

Trademarks®

ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler.

Vehicle Distributor

In the USA: In Canada:

Mercedes-Benz USA LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350www.mbusa.comCustomer Assistance Center:1-877-762-8267

Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, ON M4G 4C9www.mercedes-benz.caCustomer Relations Department:1-800-387-0100

Mercedes-Benz USA LLC and Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. are Daimler companies.Canada only:Authorized Sprinter Dealer is defined as an authorized Mercedes-Benz Sprinter Dealer.

Thank you for choosing the new Sprinter.Before your first journey, please familiarizeyourself with your vehicle and how itoperates, as well as its driving, control andconvenience functions.Before you drive off, read this Operator’sManual. This will help you to obtain themaximum pleasure from your vehicle and toavoid endangering yourself and others.The equipment or product name for yourvehicle may vary, depending on:RmodelRorderRcountry specificationRavailabilityYour vehicle's equipment may differ fromsome descriptions and illustrations. Items ofoptional equipment are also described in thismanual, should you require a description ofthe way they work.The manufacturer continuously updates itsvehicles and equipment. We thereforereserve the right to make changes with regardto:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresYour nearest authorized Sprinter Dealer willbe happy to assist you further if you have anyother questions.The Operator’s Manual, Brief Instructions,Service and Warranty Information Booklet,Maintenance Booklet and equipment-relatedsupplementary operator’s manuals areintegral parts of the vehicle.Always keep these manuals in the vehicle.Pass them on to the new owner if you sell thevehicle.We extend our best wishes for many miles ofsafe, pleasurable driving.

9065844871 É90658448718ËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 16

At a glance ........................................... 21

Safety ................................................... 31

Controls ............................................... 51

Operation ........................................... 137

Practical advice ................................ 181

Wheels and tires ............................... 251

Technical data ................................... 275

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...12 V socket ........................................ 133

AABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Display message ............................ 201ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Function/notes ................................ 47Accessories and conversions

see Add-on equipment Active Service System (ASSYST) ..... 167Add-on equipment ............................. 276ADR

Working speed governor (ADR) ...... 117Air bags

Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 39Important safety notes .................... 38Safety guidelines ............................. 37Side impact air bag .......................... 40Window curtain air bag .................... 41

Air conditioning in the rearcompartment

see Climate control .......................... 97Air-conditioning system

Air vents in the roof duct ............... 102Refrigerant ..................................... 161see Climate control .......................... 97

Air distributionSetting ........................................... 102

Air filterIndicator lamp ................................ 195

AirflowSetting ........................................... 102

Air pressuresee Tire pressure

Air-recirculation mode ...................... 104Air vents

Setting ........................................... 101Alarm system

see ATA Antifreeze additives

see Coolant ................................... 160Anti-lock Braking System

see ABS

Anti-Theft Alarm systemsee ATA

Anti-theft systemATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 61

Armrests .............................................. 68Ashtray ............................................... 128ASR (Acceleration Skid Control) ........ 48

Activating/deactivating ................... 49ASSYST

see Active Service System(ASSYST) ........................................ 167

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm)ATA troubleshooting ...................... 212

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 62Function ........................................... 61Switching off the alarm .................... 62

Audible warning signal ..................... 212Automatic car wash .......................... 164Automatic headlamp mode ................ 90Automatic locking ............................... 55Automatic transmission ................... 113

Driving tips .................................... 115Malfunction .................................... 214Releasing the parking lockmanually ........................................ 246Shift ranges ................................... 114Touchshift ...................................... 114Transmission oil change ................ 158

Auxiliary heatersee Auxiliary heating ...................... 104

Auxiliary heating ............................... 104Heater booster function ................. 107malfunction .................................... 216Switch ............................................ 105Switch-on time ............................... 106

BBackup lamp

Changing bulbs ...................... 236, 237BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 48Battery ............................................... 175

Charge indicator lamp ................... 191Charging ........................................ 178Disconnecting ................................ 176Display message ............................ 205Isolating switch ................................ 87

4 Index

Notes on care ................................ 179Reconnecting ................................. 178Removing/installing ...................... 177

Beltsee Seat belts

Bio-diesel ........................................... 153Bi-Xenon headlamps

Driving abroad ............................... 138Brake fluid .......................................... 159

Display message ............................ 205Fluid change .................................. 159Fluid level ...................................... 170Warning lamp ................................. 188

Brake lampChanging bulbs ...................... 236, 237

Brake liningIndicator lamp ................................ 191

Brake liningsDisplay message ............................ 205

BrakesABS .................................................. 47BAS .................................................. 48

Brake systemFluid level ...................................... 170Malfunction .................................... 205Warning lamp ........................ 187, 188

Breakdownsee Flat tire

Breaking-in ......................................... 138Bulb failure indicator .......................... 89

CCamera

see Rear view camera .................... 122Capacities .......................................... 287Care of the vehicle ............................ 162Cargo tie-down ring

Permissible tensile load ................. 283Cargo tie-down rings ......................... 146

Installing ........................................ 148CD player/CD changer ........................ 78Center console ..................................... 26Central locking .................................... 54

Automatic locking ............................ 55Malfunction .................................... 217

Central locking systemsee Key ............................................ 52Troubleshooting ............................. 217

Changing bulbs .................................. 233Display message ............................ 209Doorway lamp ................................ 238Exterior lighting ............................. 234Headlamps ..................................... 234Indicator and warning lamps .......... 197Interior light ........................... 238, 239Perimeter lamp .............................. 238Tail lamp ................................ 236, 237

Chassis numbersee Vehicle identification number .. 277

Child-proof locksRear doors ....................................... 45

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 41Restraint systems ............................ 42

Child seatLATCH-type (ISOFIX ) child seatanchors ............................................ 43Special seat belt retractor ............... 43Top Tether ....................................... 44

Chock ................................................. 183Cigarette lighter ................................ 129Cleaning

After driving off-road or onconstruction sites .......................... 165Alloy wheels ................................... 165Automatic car wash ....................... 164Cleaning the engine ....................... 165High-pressure cleaning .................. 164Vehicle exterior .............................. 162Vehicle interior .............................. 162

Cleaning and care .............................. 162Climate control .................................... 97

Adjusting the air vents ................... 101Air conditioning in the rearcompartment ................................. 100Air-conditioning system ................... 99Air-recirculation mode ................... 104Control panels ................................. 97Cooling with air dehumidification . . 100Defrosting the windows ................. 103Fogged up windows ....................... 103General notes .................................. 98Heating ............................................ 98

Index 5

Heating in the rear compartment ..... 99Rear-compartment airconditioning ................................... 100Rear-compartment heating .............. 99Reheat function (airdehumidification) ........................... 103Setting the air distribution ............. 102Setting the airflow ......................... 102Setting the temperature ................ 100Switching air-recirculation modein the rear compartment on/off .... 104Switching on/off ........................... 100

Cockpit ................................................. 22Combination switch ............................ 90Consumption statistics (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons) ............. 85Control panel

Above the windshield ....................... 27Conversions and accessories

see Add-on equipment Coolant ............................................... 160

Changing ....................................... 160Display message ............................ 206Expansion tank .............................. 169Level .............................................. 169Temperature gauge (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 77Topping up ..................................... 169Warning lamp ................................. 193

Cornering lamps .................................. 91Changing bulbs .............................. 235

Cruise control .................................... 118Display message ............................ 203Malfunction .................................... 216

Cup holder ......................................... 132

DDaytime running lamp

see Daytime running lamp mode Daytime running lamp mode .............. 89

Setting (vehicles without steering-wheel buttons) ................................. 74Setting (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ................................. 82

DEFSee Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ...... 155

Delayed switch-off .............................. 83

DieselConsumption ................................. 140Fuels .............................................. 153Low outside temperatures ............. 154Reserve fuel warning lamp ....... 72, 193Tank capacity ................................. 287

Diesel enginePreglow indicator lamp .................. 194Winter driving ................................ 154

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............... 155Capacities ...................................... 287Consumption ................................. 140Display message ........... 199, 202, 204Exhaust gas aftertreatment ........... 116Indicator lamp ................................ 190Level indicator ............................... 116Ranges ........................................... 116Refilling .......................................... 143Storage .......................................... 156Tool for the tank filler cap .............. 182

Digital speedometerSetting the unit (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 80

DisplayDisplay messages .......................... 197Outside temperature (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons) ............ 77Outside temperature display(vehicles without steering wheelbuttons) ........................................... 73see Indicator and warninglamps ....................................... 24, 187Standard display (vehicleswithout steering wheel buttons) ...... 73Standard display (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 77

Distance recorder ................................ 73see Odometer .................................. 73

DoorControl panel ................................... 28

Door locksee Central locking .......................... 54

DoorsDisplay message ............................ 208Indicator lamp ................................ 197Opening (from the inside) ................ 56see Central locking .......................... 54Unlocking/locking with key ............. 52

6 Index

Doorway lampChanging bulbs .............................. 238

Driver's door and co-driver's door ..... 56Driving abroad ................................... 138Driving off-road ................................. 138Driving on rough terrain

see Driving off-road ....................... 138Driving safety system

ASR (Acceleration Skid Control) ...... 48EBD (Electronic Brake forceDistribution) ..................................... 48ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram) .......................................... 50Important safety information ........... 47

Driving safety systemsABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 47BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 48Overview .......................................... 47

Driving system .................................. 117Malfunctions .................................. 215Rear view camera .......................... 122

Driving systemsCruise control ................................ 118PARKTRONIC ................................. 119

Driving tips ........................................ 138Driving abroad ............................... 138Pulling away ................................... 110Stopping the vehicle andswitching off the engine ................. 111Towing a trailer .............................. 150

EEBD (Electronic Brake forceDistribution)

Function/notes ................................ 48Indicator lamps .............................. 187

Electrical/electronic devicesCommunications equipment .......... 133

Electrical/electronic equipmentRetrofitting .................................... 277

Electrical closing assist ...................... 57Electrical heater booster system ....... 98Electrical system ................................. 88Electronic Brake force

see EBD Electronic Stability Program

see ESP®

e mark ................................................ 277Emergency equipment ...................... 182Emergency exit window ..................... 45Emergency tensioning device

Function ........................................... 35Safety guidelines ............................. 37

EngineCheck engine indicator lamp ......... 194Electronics ..................................... 276Maximum speeds ........................... 280Wash .............................................. 165

Engine oil ........................................... 156Adding ........................................... 173Checking the oil level (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 171Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 172Consumption ................................. 141Display message ............................ 207Mixing ............................................ 157Oil change ...................................... 156SAE classification .......................... 157Warning lamp ................................. 192

Engine oil filler neck ......................... 169Error memory

see Message memory (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons) ............ 78

ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram) .............................................. 50Exhaust gas aftertreatment ............. 116

DEF capacities ............................... 287DEF level indicator ......................... 116DEF reducing agent ............... 116, 155Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 155Display message ........... 199, 202, 204Indicator lamp ................................ 190Malfunction ........... 195, 199, 202, 204Refilling DEF .................................. 143

Exterior lightingBulb failure indicator ........................ 89Changing bulbs .............................. 233Daytime running lamp mode(vehicles without steering wheelbuttons) ........................................... 74Daytime running lamp mode(vehicles with steering wheelbuttons) ........................................... 82

Index 7

Delayed switch-off (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 83Light switch ..................................... 89Locator lighting (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 83Surround lighting (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 83

Exterior mirrors ................................... 70Eyeglasses compartment ................. 131

FFatty acid methyl ester FAME .......... 153Fire extinguisher ............................... 184First-aid kit ......................................... 184flat tire

Notes ............................................. 222Wheel change ................................ 229

Folding seat ......................................... 67Folding table ...................................... 132Front fog lamps ................................... 90

Changing bulbs .............................. 235Front windshield

see Windshield ............................... 163Fuel ..................................................... 153

Additives ........................................ 154Consumption ................................. 140Display message ............................ 208

Fuel filter with water separator ....... 221Indicator lamp ................................ 196

Fuel gauge ............................................ 72Fuel tank content

Reserve, display message .............. 208Fuses .................................................. 239

Driver's seat fuse box .................... 243Fuse allocation ...................... 241, 244Main fuse box ................................ 240

GGeneral driving tips ........................... 110Genuine parts .................................... 276Glove box ........................................... 131

HHandbrake

see Parking brake .......................... 112Hazard warning lamps ........................ 91

HeadlampCleaning system ...................... 95, 171

HeadlampsChanging bulbs .............................. 234Cleaning ......................................... 164Fogged up ...................................... 219

Headlamps, automatic ........................ 90Head restraints .................................... 67Heater booster function ................... 107Heating

see Climate control .......................... 97High beam flasher ............................... 90High-beam headlamps ........................ 90

Changing bulbs .............................. 235High-pressure cleaning ..................... 164Hood

Opening/closing ............................ 168

IIgnition lock ......................................... 56Immobilizer .......................................... 61Indicator and warning lamps ........... 187

ABS ................................................ 189Air filter .......................................... 195ASR ....................................... 187, 189BAS ....................................... 187, 189Battery charge ............................... 191Brakes ........................................... 188Brake wear .................................... 191Bulbs .............................................. 197Check engine ................................. 194Coolant .......................................... 193Doors ............................................. 197Engine oil level ............................... 192ESP® ...................................... 187, 190Poly-V-belt ..................................... 191Preglow .......................................... 194Reserve fuel ................................... 193SRS ................................................ 191Tire pressure monitor .................... 195Water separator ............................. 196Windshield washer fluid ................. 196

Indicator lampssee Warning and indicatorlamps ....................................... 24, 187

Instrument cluster .............................. 70Lighting ............................................ 72

8 Index

Speedometer ................................... 71Tachometer ...................................... 71

Instrument cluster illuminationsee Instrument lighting .................... 72

Instrument lighting ............................. 72Interior light

Changing bulbs ...................... 238, 239Interior lighting

Changing bulbs .............................. 233Front ................................................ 92Rear ................................................. 92

Interior motion sensor ........................ 62ISOFIX (LATCH-type child seatsecuring system) ................................. 43

JJack ..................................................... 182

Jacking points ................................ 230Preparation .................................... 230

Jump-starting ..................................... 247Jump-starting connection point inthe engine compartment .................. 247

KKey

Checking the batteries ..................... 53Malfunction .................................... 217

Kickdown ........................................... 115

LLamp

Failure indicator ............................... 89Language

Display (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ................................. 81

Lashing points and materials ........... 146Lashing points and tie downs

Permissible tensile load ................. 283License plate lamp

Changing bulbs ...................... 236, 237Lighting

Bulb failure indicator ........................ 89Changing bulbs ...................... 233, 234Instrument ....................................... 72Light switch ..................................... 89

LightsAutomatic headlamp mode .............. 90Combination switch ......................... 90Cornering light function ................... 91Daytime running lampmode ................................... 74, 82, 89Interior lighting ................................ 92Light switch ..................................... 89

Load distribution ....................... 146, 152Loading guidelines ............................ 144Loads

Securing ........................................ 146Transporting .................. 144, 146, 152

Locator lightingSetting (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ................................. 83

LockingAutomatic ........................................ 55With button ...................................... 55With key ........................................... 52

Locking systemsee Central locking .......................... 54

Low-beam headlamps ......................... 89Automatic headlamps ...................... 90Changing bulbs .............................. 235Daytime running lamp mode(vehicles without steering wheelbuttons) ........................................... 74Daytime running lamp mode(vehicles with steering wheelbuttons) ..................................... 74, 82Driving abroad ............................... 138

MM+S tires ............................................ 254Maintenance points under thehood .................................................... 169Malfunctions ...................................... 187

Message memory (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 78

Maximum speed ................................ 141Menu (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons)

Audio ............................................... 77Message memory ............................ 78Operation ......................................... 76Settings ........................................... 78

Index 9

Telephone ........................................ 86Trip computer .................................. 85

Message memory (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ..................... 78Messages

Vehicles without steering wheelbuttons .......................................... 199Vehicles with steering wheelbuttons .......................................... 201

MirrorsExterior mirrors ................................ 70Rear-view mirror .............................. 69

Mobile phone ..................................... 134Display message ............................ 207Installation ..................................... 277

Monitorsee Rear view camera .................... 122

OOccupant safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 41System overview .............................. 32

OdometerSetting the unit (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 80

On-board computerVehicles without steering wheelbuttons ............................................ 72Vehicles with steering wheelbuttons ............................................ 74

Opening/closing the windows ........... 60Outside temperature display

Vehicles without steering wheelbuttons ............................................ 73Vehicles with steering wheelbuttons ............................................ 77

Overhead control panelOverview .......................................... 27

Overrevving range ............................... 71Overview

Menus (Vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ................................. 76

PPaint code number ............................ 277Paper holder ...................................... 131

Parkingsee Stopping the vehicle andswitching off the engine ................. 111

Parking aidsee PARKTRONIC

Parking brake .................................... 112Display message ............................ 206

Parking lampChanging bulbs .............................. 235

Parking lamps ...................................... 89PARKTRONIC ...................................... 119

Activating/deactivating ................. 122Cleaning the sensors ..................... 163Indicator lamp ................................ 215Malfunction .................................... 215Range of the sensors ..................... 120Roll-back warning .......................... 122Trailer towing ................................. 122Warning display ..................... 121, 215

Partition sliding door .......................... 59Perimeter lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 237Perimeter lamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 238Poly-V-belt

Malfunction .................................... 191Power supply

Battery isolating switch .................... 87Power supply (trailer) ....................... 153Power windows ................................... 60Practical advice

Auxiliary heating ............................ 216Central locking system .................. 217Engine ............................................ 212Fuel and fuel tank .......................... 220Headlamps and turn signals .......... 219Windshield wipers .......................... 219

Preparing for a journey ..................... 108Checks in the vehicle ..................... 108Visual check of the vehicleexterior .......................................... 108

10 Index

RRadio

Changing stations (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 77Cleaning the display ...................... 162Setting station selection (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons) ............ 84

Rain/light sensorSetting the sensitivity (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons) ............ 84Windshield wipers ............................ 94

Range (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ..................................... 86Reading lamp ....................................... 92Rear bench seat ................................... 66Rear-compartment airconditioning

Changing the air filter .................... 173see Climate control .......................... 97

Rear-compartment heatingsee Climate control .......................... 97

Rear doors ............................................ 57Rear fog lamp ...................................... 90

Changing bulbs ...................... 236, 237Rear lamp

Changing bulbs ...................... 236, 237Rear view camera .............................. 122

Malfunction .................................... 216Monitor menu ................................ 124Switching off the monitor whiledriving ............................................ 128Switching on .................................. 123Switching the monitor on/off ........ 123

Rear-view cameraCleaning ......................................... 163Cleaning the monitor ..................... 162

Rear-view mirror .................................. 69Rear window defroster ....................... 95Rear window heating

Malfunction .................................... 211Rear window wiper ............................. 94Refilling

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 143Tool for DEF tank filler cap ............ 182

Refrigerant ......................................... 161Refueling ............................................ 142

Remote controlsee Key ............................................ 52

Replacing bulbssee Changing bulbs ............... 233, 234

Reserve fuelTank ......................................... 72, 193

Restraint systemDisplay message ............................ 203Malfunction .................................... 191

Restraint systemssee SRS

Reverse gearEngaging (automatictransmission) ................................. 114

Reverse warning feature .................. 141Rims .................................................... 280Roll-back warning

see PARKTRONIC ........................... 122Roof carrier ................................ 149, 284Roof load (maximum) ........................ 284Roof rack

see Roof carrier ..................... 149, 284Roof ventilator in the cargocompartment ..................................... 108

SSAE classification (engine oils) ........ 157Safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 41Child restraint systems .................... 42Overview of occupant safetysystems ........................................... 32

Safety systemssee Driving safety systems

SeatCo-driver's seat ............................... 63Driver's seat .................................... 63Folding seat ..................................... 67Luxury seat ...................................... 63Rear bench seat ............................... 66Standard seat .................................. 63Suspension seat .............................. 63Swivel seat ....................................... 65Twin co-driver's seat ........................ 65

Index 11

Seat beltCleaning ......................................... 162Display message ............................ 206Warning lamp ................................. 196

Seat beltsAdjusting the height ......................... 35Belt force limiters ............................ 35Correct usage .................................. 33Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 35Fastening ......................................... 34Important safety guidelines ............. 32Releasing ......................................... 35Safety guidelines ............................. 37Special seat belt retractor ............... 43Warning lamp (function) ................... 35

Seat heating ......................................... 68Malfunction .................................... 211

Selector lever position ...................... 114Service indicator ............................... 167Service products

Bio-diesel ....................................... 153Brake fluid ..................................... 159Capacities ...................................... 287Coolant .......................................... 160Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 155Engine oil ....................................... 156Fuel ................................................ 153Fuel additive .................................. 154Fuel additives ................................ 154Power steering fluid ....................... 159Refrigerant ..................................... 161Transmission oil ............................. 158

SettingsResetting all (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 78Resetting submenus (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons) ............ 79

Setting the clockVehicles without steering wheelbuttons ............................................ 73

Setting the dateVehicles without steering wheelbuttons ............................................ 73Vehicles with steering wheelbuttons ............................................ 82

Setting the timeVehicles with steering wheelbuttons ............................................ 82

Shift rangesAutomatic transmission ................. 114

Side impact air bag ............................. 40Side windows

Resetting ......................................... 61Sliding door .......................................... 56

Cleaning ......................................... 164Closing assist ................................... 57

Snow chains ...................................... 255Socket ................................................ 133Spare wheel

Bracket .......................................... 185see Spare wheel ............................ 185Wheel change ................................ 229

SpeedSetting, see Cruise control ............ 119

Speed limiter ..................................... 141Speedometer ....................................... 71

Setting the unit (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 80

SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Indicator lamp .................................. 36Introduction ..................................... 36

Standing lampChanging bulbs .............. 235, 236, 237

Starting the engine ........................... 109Steering wheel ..................................... 69

Adjusting ......................................... 69Buttons (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ................................. 74With buttons .................................... 26

Stowage spaces and stowagecompartments ................................... 129

Eyeglasses compartment ............... 131Glove box ....................................... 131Paper holder .................................. 131Stowage compartment above thewindshield ..................................... 130Stowage compartment in thecenter console ............................... 130Stowage compartment in thedashboard ...................................... 129Stowage compartment in thedoor ............................................... 130

12 Index

Stowage space above theheadliner ........................................ 130Stowage space under the twin co-driver's seat ................................... 130

Submenu (on-board computer)Clock/Date ...................................... 82Convenience .................................... 85Instrument cluster ........................... 80Lighting ............................................ 82Selecting .......................................... 79Settings overview ............................ 79Vehicle ............................................. 84

Summer tires ..................................... 254Supplemental Restraint System

see SRS Surround lighting

Setting (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ................................. 83

Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 62Switch unit

Additional ........................................ 28Center console ................................ 27Driver's door .................................... 28

Swivel seat ........................................... 65

TTachometer .......................................... 71Tank content

Reserve fuel warning lamp ............. 193Tank contents ...................................... 72

Range (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ................................. 86

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 287Speed ............................................ 280Tire pressure .................................. 281Tires/wheels ................................. 280Vehicle dimensions ........................ 280vehicle weights .............................. 280

Telephone .......................................... 134Operation (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ................................. 86

TemperatureSetting (heating/air conditioning) . 100Setting the unit (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 80

Theft deterrent locking systemImmobilizer ...................................... 61

Tightening torqueWheel nuts/wheel bolts ................ 232

TimeSetting the time (vehicles withoutsteering wheel buttons) ................... 73Setting the time (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 82

tireWheel change ................................ 229

TireLabels ............................................ 279

Tire and Loading Information label .. 279Tire Inflation Pressure label ............. 279tire pressure

Calling up (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 260

Tire pressureCalling up (on-board computer) ..... 258Checking manually ........................ 258Display message ........... 199, 203, 208Maximum ....................................... 257Recommended ...................... 255, 281Setting the unit (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 81Tables ............................................ 281Tire and Loading Informationlabel ............................................... 279Tire Inflation Pressure label ........... 279Tire label ................................ 256, 279Warning lamp ................................. 195

Tire pressure monitoring systemFunction/notes ............................. 258

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 270Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 269Bar (definition) ............................... 268Characteristics .............................. 268Checking ........................................ 253Definition of terms ......................... 268Direction of rotation ...................... 272Distribution of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 271DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 268

Index 13

DOT (Department ofTransportation) (definition) ............ 269Flat tire .......................................... 221GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 269GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)(definition) ..................................... 269GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) (definition) ......................... 269Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 269Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 270Labeling (overview) ........................ 266Load bearing index (definition) ...... 271Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 270Maximum load on a tire(definition) ..................................... 270Maximum permissible tirepressure (definition) ....................... 270Maximum tire load ......................... 265Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 270Optional equipment weight(definition) ..................................... 270PSI (pounds per square inch)(definition) ..................................... 270Replacing ....................................... 271Service life ..................................... 254Sidewall (definition) ....................... 270Speed index (definition) ................. 269Storing ........................................... 273Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 268TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 271Tire bead (definition) ...................... 270Tire pressure (definition) ................ 270Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 269Tire size (data) ............................... 280Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed index .................... 266Tire tread ....................................... 253Tire tread (definition) ..................... 270Total load limit (definition) ............. 271Traction (definition) ....................... 271Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 269Unladen weight (definition) ............ 270

valve, Snap-In ................................ 252Wear indicator (definition) ............. 271Wheel rim (definition) .................... 269

Tires and wheels (important safetyinformation) ....................................... 252tire sealant

Storage location ............................ 184Using ............................................. 222

Toolssee Vehicle tool kit ........................ 182

Top speedTechnical data ............................... 280

Top Tether ............................................ 44Touchshift .......................................... 114Tow-away protection .......................... 62Towing ................................................ 248Towing a trailer

Driving tips .................................... 150Towing eye ......................................... 249Tow-starting ....................................... 248Trailer

Brake force booster malfunction . . . 188Coupling up ................................... 150Decoupling ..................................... 152Power supply ................................. 153Towing ........................................... 151Towing with PARKTRONIC ............. 122Trailer tow hitch ............................. 284

Trailer couplingPermitted weights and loads ......... 285

Trailer hitch ....................................... 284Trailer loads and drawbarnoseweights ...................................... 152Transmission oil ................................ 158Transport by rail ................................ 140Transporting

Load distribution ................... 146, 152Loading .......................................... 144Securing a load .............................. 146

Trip computer (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ..................... 85Trip meter ............................................ 73

see Trip odometer Trip odometer

Resetting ......................................... 72

14 Index

TroubleshootingAutomatic transmission ................. 214Driving systems ............................. 215

Turn signals ......................................... 90Changing bulbs .............. 235, 236, 237

Two-way radioInstallation ..................................... 277

UUnlocking

With button ...................................... 55With key ........................................... 52

VVehicle

Assemblies .................................... 174Cleaning ......................................... 162Dimensions .................................... 280Electronics ..................................... 276Individual settings (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................... 78Loading .......................................... 261Towing ........................................... 248Tow-starting ................................... 248Transporting .................................. 250Weights .......................................... 280

Vehicle identification number .......... 277Vehicle identification plates ............ 277Vehicle key

Malfunction .................................... 217Vehicle tool kit .................................. 182Voltage supply

Fuses ............................................. 239

WWarning and indicator lamp

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 190Warning and indicator lamps ............. 24

PARKTRONIC ................................. 215Seat belt ........................................ 196

Warning lamp .................................... 183Warning tones ................................... 212Warning triangle ................................ 183Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 208Indicator lamp ................................ 196

Topping up ..................................... 171Wiping with ...................................... 95

WheelChanging ....................................... 229Rim size ......................................... 280Spare wheel ................................... 185

Wheel chock ...................................... 229Wheel nuts/wheel bolts

Retightening .................................. 233Tightening torque ........................... 232

WheelsChanging/replacing ....................... 271Checking ........................................ 253Storing ........................................... 273Wheel size/tire size ....................... 280

Window curtain air bag ....................... 41Windows

Cleaning ......................................... 162Cleaning the windshield ................. 163Washing system ....................... 95, 171

WindshieldCleaning ......................................... 163

Windshield heater ............................... 95windshield heating

Malfunction .................................... 211Windshield washer fluid

Indicator lamp ................................ 196Windshield wipers ............................... 94

Malfunction .................................... 219Rain/light sensor ............................. 94Replacing the wiper blades ............ 174Setting the sensitivity (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons andrain/light sensor) ............................. 84

Winter diesel ..................................... 154Winter operation ....................... 153, 254Winter tires

M+S tires ....................................... 254Working speed governor (ADR) ........ 117

XXenon headlamps

see Bi-Xenon headlamps

Index 15

Vehicle equipment

i Diese Betriebsanleitung beschreibt alleModelle, Serien- und SonderausstattungenIhres Fahrzeugs, die zum Zeitpunkt desRedaktionsschlusses dieserBetriebsanleitung erhältlich waren.Länderspezifische Abweichungen sindmöglich. Beachten Sie, dass Ihr Fahrzeugnicht mit allen beschriebenen Funktionenausgestattet sein könnte. Dies betrifft auchsicherheitsrelevante Systeme undFunktionen.

Environmental protection

% Environmental noteOur declared policy is one of comprehensiveenvironmental protection.Our objective is to use natural resources,which are the basis of our existence on thisplanet, sparingly and in a manner that takesthe requirements of both nature andhumanity into account.You too can contribute to environmentalprotection by operating your vehicle in anenvironmentally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and engine, transmission,brake and tire wear depend on these twofactors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors.Observe the following notes: Operatingconditions:Ravoid driving short distances as this

increases fuel consumption.Rmake sure that the tire pressures are

always correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in/on

the vehicle.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel

consumption.

Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute

to environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the specified serviceintervals.Ralways have maintenance work carried out

at an authorized Sprinter Dealer.Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when

starting the engine.Rdo not warm up the engine when the

vehicle is stationary.Radopt an anticipatory style of driving and

keep a sufficient distance from othervehicles.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.

Environmental concerns andrecommendations

In this manual, whenever you see instructionsto discard materials, you should first attemptto reclaim and recycle them. To preserve ourenvironment, follow appropriateenvironmental rules and regulations whendisposing of materials.

Operating Safety

Safety notes

G WarningEngine exhaust, some of its constituents, andcertain vehicle components contain or emitchemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm.In addition, certain fluids contained invehicles, and certain products of componentwear contain chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defectsor other reproductive harm.

16 Introduction

Emergency tensioning retractors, airbags andremote control batteries contain perchlorate,which may require special handling andregard for the environment. Check with yourlocal government's disposal guidelines.California residents: seehttp: / / www.dtsc.ca.gov /HazardousWaste / Perchlorate / index.cfm.

G WarningIf work on electronic equipment and itssoftware is carried out incorrectly, thisequipment could stop working. The electronicsystems are networked via interfaces.Tampering with these electronic systemscould cause malfunctions in systems whichhave not been modified. Malfunctions such asthese can seriously jeopardize the vehicle'soperating safety and therefore your ownsafety.You should therefore have all work andmodifications to electronic componentscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WarningA heavy impact to the underbody, tires orwheels, for example when bottoming out onrough terrain or driving over an obstacle athigh speed, could damage your vehicle. Thisalso applies to vehicles equipped withunderbody protection.In this case, have your vehicle checked at anauthorized Sprinter Dealer. In particular, workrelevant to safety or on safety-relatedsystems must be carried out at an authorizedSprinter Dealer.

G WarningAlways have maintenance work carried out atan authorized Sprinter Dealer which has thenecessary specialist knowledge and tools tocarry out the work required. In particular,work relevant to safety or on safety-relatedsystems must be carried out at an authorizedSprinter Dealer.

Service and warranty informationThe Service and Warranty InformationBooklet contains detailed information aboutthe warranties covering your Sprinter,includingRNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyRDiesel Engine Limited WarrantyRCorrosion WarrantyRRestraint System Limited Warranty

(vehicles sold and registered in the State ofKansas only)REmission Warranties required by law.

Registering your vehicleWe may instruct our authorized SprinterDealer to carry out technical inspections oncertain vehicles to improve their quality orsafety.If you did not purchase your vehicle from anauthorized dealership and your vehicle hasnot yet been inspected at an authorizedSprinter Dealer, there is a possibility that yourvehicle has not been registered in your name.We will only be able to inform you aboutvehicle inspections if we are in possession ofyour registration data.It is advisable to have your vehicle registeredat an authorized Sprinter Dealer.Inform us as soon as possible if your addresshas changed or if there has been a change ofvehicle owner.

Digital speedometer and totaldistance recorder

Do not allow the electronically stored totaldistance covered by your vehicle to bemodified as a result of tampering with theelectronics system.This type of modification or failing to informthe buyer when selling the vehicle couldconstitute an offense punishable by law.

Introduction 17

Z

Modifying the engine power outputHaving the engine power output of yourvehicle increased by tampering with theelectronic engine management system willinvalidate the vehicle's general operatingpermit and insurance coverage, as well asyour New Vehicle Limited Warranty andwarranty entitlement.Modifications to the output of the enginemust be reported to the insurance providerand require the vehicle to be recertified. Thetires, chassis, brake and cooling systemsmust be adapted to the increased enginepower output.Tampering with the electronic enginemanagement system modifies emissionvalues and it will not be possible to guaranteethe operating safety of the engine in everycase. Increases in performance may lead tomalfunctions and consequential damage toother assemblies.If you sell the vehicle, failing to inform thebuyer of the modified engine power outputcould constitute an offense punishable bylaw, depending on the country concerned.

Diesel particle filter! If the vehicle is predominantly used for

short-distance driving, this could lead to amalfunction in the automatic cleaningfunction for the diesel particle filter. As aresult, fuel may accumulate in the engineoil and cause engine failure.Therefore, if you mainly drive shortdistances, you should drive on a highway oron rural roads for 20 minutes every310 miles (500 km). This ensures sufficientregeneration of the diesel particle filter.

Vehicle alterationsWe recommend the use of genuine Sprinterparts and conversion parts as well as

accessories that have been expresslyapproved for your vehicle model.These parts have been subjected to specialtests in order to determine their safety,reliability and suitability.

! For safety reasons, have add-onequipment prepared and installedaccording to the Sprinter body/equipmentmounting directives in force. These body/equipment mounting directives guaranteethat the chassis and add-on equipmentform a cohesive whole and that the highestpossible level of operating and drivingsafety is reached.We recommend for safety reasons that:Ryou carry out no other modifications to

the vehicle.Ryou obtain the agreement of the

distributor named on the inside of thefront cover for any deviations from theapproved body/equipment mountingdirectives.

Approval by official testing centers orpermission given by authorities do noteliminate safety risks.

! The wooden or plastic cargo area floorfitted at the factory is an integralcomponent of the vehicle structure. Thevehicle body could be damaged if you havethe load area floor removed. This thenaffects the securing of loads and themaximum loading capacity of the lashingpoints is no longer guaranteed.Therefore, do not have the load area floorremoved.

Even seemingly small changes to the vehicle,such as attaching a radiator cover for winterdriving or as protection against insects, arenot allowed. These could cause the enginediagnostics to register incorrect data. Therecording of engine diagnostic data is a legalrequirement, and must always be verifiableand accurate.

18 Introduction

Sprinter body builder guidelineIf you intend on making any alterations to thevehicle, we strongly recommend that youcontact the distributor named on the insideof the front cover in order to obtain allnecessary information (there may be acharge).Body builders and dealers who make anymodifications which may affect the finalcertification of the engine, vehicle orequipment assume the sole responsibility forthe vehicle, including labeling anddocumentation, affected by theirmodifications.It is their responsibility to certify that thealtered vehicle conforms to all applicablestandards and regulations affected by thevehicle alteration or continues to comply withthe motor vehicle safety standards andemissions regulations.They are responsible for ensuring thatmodifications or equipment installation donot affect the safety of the vehicle.

G WarningAny modifications or alterations of theSprinter not in compliance with the SprinterBody Builder Guideline and the SprinterOperator's Manual may seriously inhibit itsroadworthiness and safety and may lead to anaccident resulting in serious injury or death.Consult the Sprinter Body Builder Guidelineand the Sprinter Operator's Manual prior toinitiating any alterations or modifications.

We are not responsible for any finalcertification or claims regarding productliability, or warranty claims, which result fromany component, assembly, or system beingaltered, or which cause non-compliance withany of the emission control standards ormotor vehicle safety standards, or whichwould otherwise cause the vehicle to be or tobecome defective or unsafe.We do not assume responsibility as the final-stage manufacturer or the consequentialproduct liability.

Correct useObserve the following information when usingyour vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe "Technical data" section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRmotor vehicle laws and safety standards

Substances constituting a healthhazardDo not store or transport in the cab anysubstances that constitute a health hazard orreact aggressively.These include:RsolventsRfuelsRoils and greasesRcleaning agentsRacids

G WarningDo not store or transport in the cab anysubstances that constitute a health hazard orreact aggressively. Gases and liquids mayescape from containers that are completelysealed.The driver's ability to concentrate while thevehicle is in motion and the driver's healthcould be affected. In addition, electricalcomponents (e. g. control units andconnectors) could be damaged. This canresult in malfunctions, system failures, orshort circuits which can start a fire.You could cause an accident, therebyendangering yourself and others.

Stickers and warning labels

G Warning!Various warning labels are attached to yourvehicle. These warning labels are intended tomake you and others aware of various risks.Do not remove any of these warning labels

Introduction 19

Z

unless explicitly instructed to do so byinformation on the label itself.Removing warning labels may cause you andothers to be unaware of certain risks whichmay result in an accident and/or personalinjury.

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you toimmediately contact an authorized SprinterDealer to have the problem diagnosed andcorrected if required.If the matter is not handled to yoursatisfaction, please discuss the problem withthe Sprinter Dealer management, or ifnecessary contact the distributor named onthe inside of the front cover.

Reporting safety defectsIn the USA:In all 50 states and Washington, D.C.:If you believe that your vehicle has a defect,which could cause a crash or cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying the distributor.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealerand the vehicle distributor.To contact NHTSA, you may either call theAuto Safety Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),or go to http: / / www.safercar.govor write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.

In Canada:If you believe that your vehicle has a safetydefect, you should contact immediately theCustomer Service Department of thedistributor named on the inside of the frontcover.

Information regarding electronicrecording devices

(Including notice pursuant to California Code§ 9951)Please note that your vehicle is equipped withdevices that can record vehicle system data.This information helps, for example, todiagnose vehicle systems after a collision andto continuously improve vehicle safety. Wemay access the information and share it withothers:Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis

purposesRwith the consent of the vehicle owner or

lesseeRin response to an official request by a law

enforcement or other government agencyRfor use in dispute resolution involving

Daimler, its affiliates or sales / serviceorganization and / orRas otherwise required or permitted by law

20 Introduction

Cockpit ................................................. 22Instrument cluster variants ............... 24Steering wheel with buttons .............. 26Center console .................................... 26Switch units ......................................... 27

21

At a

gla

nce

Cockpit

Cockpit

i This Operator's Manual describes all thestandard and optional equipment availablefor your vehicle at the time of purchase.Country specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle might not beequipped with all the functions describedhere. This also includes safety relevantsystems and functions.

Function Page: Door control panel 28

; Light switch 89

= Combination switch:• turn signals 90• high-beam headlamps 90• windshield wipers 94• rear window wiper 94

? Cruise control lever 118

A Horn

B Steering wheel without/with buttons 26

Function PageC Instrument cluster 24

D Stowage compartment

E • Stowage compartmentwith interior light 92• Overhead control panel 27

F Rear-view mirror 69

G Rear-view camera monitor 122

H PARKTRONIC warningdisplay 119

I Opens/closes the right-hand side window 60

J Jack and vehicle tool kit 182

K Glove box 131

L Center console 26

M Ignition lock 56

N Additional switch unit 28

22 CockpitAt

a g

lanc

e

Function PageO Steering wheel adjustment 69

P Selector lever (automatictransmission) 109

Q Parking brake 112

Function PageR Opens the hood 168

S Additional switch unit 28

Cockpit 23

At a

gla

nce

Instrument cluster variants

Function Page: Instrument cluster on

vehicles without steering-wheel buttons 70

; Indicator and warninglamps

= f, g Brightens/dims theinstrument cluster lighting 72

? Tachometer with indicatorand warning lamps 71

A Display 73

B Fuel gauge with fuel fillerflap location indicator 72

C Speedometer withindicator and warninglamps 71

D Reset button 9 70

E 4 Menu button:• changes standard display 73• selects menus 73

Function PageF Instrument cluster on

vehicles with steering-wheel buttons 70

G Indicator and warninglamps

H Display 74

I Tachometer with indicatorand warning lamps 71

J Fuel gauge with fuel fillerflap location indicator 72

K f, g Brightens/dims theinstrument cluster lighting 72

L Speedometer withindicator and warninglamps 71

M Reset button 9 70

N Ë Service buttonChecks the engine oil level 171

Indicator and warning lamps

24 Instrument cluster variantsAt

a g

lanc

e

Function Page

d ESP® warning lamp 50,187

ASR warning lamp 48,187

% Coolant level too low 193

? Coolant temperature toohigh 193

+ Restraint systemsmalfunction 191

b Brake fluid level too low 188EBD malfunction 187Trailer brake force boostermalfunction 188

4 Engine oil level warning 192

; Engine diagnosticsindicator lamp 194Exhaust gas aftertreatmentmalfunction 195

% Preglow system 194

G Left-hand turn signal 90

h Tire pressure loss or the tirepressure monitor ismalfunctioning (USA only) 195Tire pressure loss (Canadaonly) 195

¦ Fluid level too low inwindshield washer/headlamp cleaning system 196

1 Door open 197

# Brake pads/linings worn 191

J Right-hand turn signal 90

! ABS malfunction 189

: ASR malfunction 189BAS malfunction 189

h ESP® malfunction 187

Function Page

å DEF supply low orcontaminated/thinned 199Exhaust gas aftertreatmentmalfunction 200

È Dirt accumulation in airfilter 195

6 Reserve fuel 193Fuel filler cap open 194

: Water in the fuel 196

# Battery chargingmalfunction 191

b Bulb defective 197

c Parking brake applied 112

L Low-beam headlamps on 89

K Working speed governor(ADR) on 117

K High-beam headlamps on 90

| Reserve fuel 193Fuel filler cap open 194

7 Fasten seat belt 196

i Vehicles with steering-wheel buttons:Corresponding messages may also beshown in display H(Y page 24).

Instrument cluster variants 25

At a

gla

nce

Steering wheel with buttons

Function Page: Display 74

Controls the on-board computer

; Selects a submenu oradjusts the volume 74W Up/increases thevolumeX Down/reduces thevolume

= Using the telephone 866 Accepts a call/startsdialing~ Ends a call/rejects anincoming call

? Scrolling from one menu toanother 74V ForwardsU Back

A Scrolling from onesubmenu to another 74& Forwards* Back

Center console

Function Page: Stowage compartment 130

; Radio; see the separateoperating instructions

= Air-conditioning controlpanel 97

? Center console switch unit 27

A • Stowage compartment or• CD changer; see theseparate operatinginstructions

B Cup holder with 132• ashtray 128• cigarette lighter 129

C 12 V socket 133

26 Center consoleAt

a g

lanc

e

Switch units

Center console

Function Page

c Switches the left/right-hand seat heating on/off 68

z Switches the windshieldheating on/off 95

| Switches the rear windowdefroster on/off 95

f Activates/deactivatesPARKTRONIC 122

£ Switches the hazardwarning lamps on/off 91

à Activates/deactivates ASR 48

ÃÄ

Central locking, interior/rear compartment 54

Roof

Function Page: Microphone for the

telephone 134

; Switches the right-handreading lamp on/off 92

= Switches the automaticinterior lighting on/off 92

? • Eyeglasses compartmentor 131• Anti-theft alarm system(ATA) 61

A Switches the interiorlighting on/off 92

B Switches the left-handreading lamp on/off 92

Switch units 27

At a

gla

nce

Driver's door

Function Page: Adjusts the exterior mirrors 70

; Selects an exterior mirror 70

= Opens/closes the left-handside window 61

? Opens/closes the right-hand side window 61

Additional switch units

Switch unit between the light switch and thesteering wheel

Function Page

y Switches the auxiliaryheating on/off 104

± Switches the heaterbooster function on/off 104

EF

Sets the working speed117

E Switches the workingspeed governor (ADR) on/off 117

´·

Ventilates the cargocompartment 108

28 Switch unitsAt

a g

lanc

e

Switch unit between the steering wheel andignition lock

Function Page

lk

Switches the rear-compartment conveniencelighting on/off 92

Switch units 29

At a

gla

nce

30

Vehicle equipment .............................. 32Occupant safety .................................. 32Emergency exit ................................... 45Driving safety systems ....................... 47

31

Safe

ty

Vehicle equipment

i Diese Betriebsanleitung beschreibt alleModelle, Serien- und SonderausstattungenIhres Fahrzeugs, die zum Zeitpunkt desRedaktionsschlusses dieserBetriebsanleitung erhältlich waren.Länderspezifische Abweichungen sindmöglich. Beachten Sie, dass Ihr Fahrzeugnicht mit allen beschriebenen Funktionenausgestattet sein könnte. Dies betrifft auchsicherheitsrelevante Systeme undFunktionen.

Occupant safety

Restraint systemsIn this section you will learn the mostimportant facts about the restraint systemcomponents of the vehicle.The restraint systems are:RSeat beltsRChild restraint systemsRLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing

systemAdditional protection potential is provided bySRS (Supplemental Restraint System) andthe air bag system.The protective functions of the systems workin conjunction with each other. The systemsare, however, autonomous.

G WarningModifications to or work improperlyconducted on restraint system componentsor their wiring, as well as tampering withinterconnected electronic systems, can leadto the restraint systems no longer functioningas intended.Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs), for example, could deployinadvertently or fail to deploy in accidentsalthough the deceleration threshold for airbag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,never modify the restraint systems. Do not

tamper with electronic components or theirsoftware.

i More information on the subject ofchildren in the vehicle and child restraintsystems can be found in the "Children inthe vehicle" section (Y page 41).

Seat belts

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and infant or childrestraints is required by law in all 50 states,the District of Columbia, the U.S. territoriesand all Canadian provinces.Even if this is not the case, all vehicleoccupants should have their seat beltsfastened when the vehicle is in motion.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 41) for further information oninfants and children traveling in the vehicleas well as on child restraint systems.

G Warning!Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.Always make sure all of your passengers areproperly restrained. You and your passengersshould always wear seat belts.Failure to wear and properly fasten andposition your seat belt greatly increases yourrisk of injuries and their likely severity in anaccident.If you are ever in an accident, your injuries canbe considerably more severe without yourseat belt properly buckled. Without your seatbelt buckled, you are much more likely to hitthe interior of the vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can be seriously injured or killed.In the same crash, the possibility of injury ordeath is lessened if you are properly wearingyour seat belt. The air bags can only protectas intended if the occupants are properlywearing their seat belts.

32 Occupant safetySa

fety

G WarningNever ride in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position asthis can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide underit, the seat belt would apply force at theabdomen or neck. That could cause seriousor even fatal injuries. The seat backrest andseat belt provide the best restraint when thewearer is in a position that is as upright aspossible and the seat belt is properlypositioned on the body.

G WarningNever let more people ride in the vehicle thanthere are seat belts available. Make sureeveryone riding in the vehicle is correctlyrestrained with a separate seat belt. Neveruse a seat belt for more than one person at atime.

G WarningDamaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accident mustbe replaced and their anchoring points mustalso be checked.Only use seat belts which have been approvedby the distributor named on the inside of thefront cover.Do not make any modifications to the seatbelts. This can lead to unintended activationof the ETDs or to their failure to activate whennecessary.Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.Have all work carried out only by qualifiedtechnicians. Contact an authorized SprinterDealer.

Proper use of the seat belts

G WarningUSE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only protect when used

properly. Never wear seat belts in any otherway than as described in this section, asthat could result in serious injuries in caseof an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat belt

at all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, including rollovers.The integrated restraint system includesSRS (driver's front air bag, front-passengerfront air bag, side impact air bags, windowcurtain air bags for door windows),Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat beltforce limiters, and front seat knee bolsters.The system is designed to enhance theprotection offered to properly beltedoccupants in certain frontal (front air bagsand ETDs) and side (side impact air bags,window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impactswhich exceed preset deploymentthresholds and in certain rollovers (windowcurtain air bags and ETDs).RNever wear the shoulder belt under your

arm, across your neck or not routed acrossyour shoulder. In a frontal crash, your bodywould move too far forward. That wouldincrease the chance of head and neckinjuries. The seat belt would also apply toomuch force to the ribs or abdomen, whichcould severely injure internal organs suchas your liver or spleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder. It should nottouch the neck. Never pass the shoulderportion of the seat belt under your arm. Forthis purpose, you can adjust the height ofthe seat belt outlet.RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips and not across the abdomen. Ifthe lap belt is positioned across your

Occupant safety 33

Safe

ty

Z

abdomen, it could cause serious injuries ina crash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid or

breakable objects in or on your clothing,such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., asthese might cause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always routed

snugly. Take special care of this whenwearing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than one

person at a time. Do not fasten a seat beltaround a person and another person orother objects at the same time.RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a

crash, you would not have the full width ofthe seat belt to distribute impact forces.The twisted seat belt against your bodycould cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use a

lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possible onthe hips to avoid any possible pressure onthe abdomen.RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is

as upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to make

sure it is properly positioned.RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant

restraints, toddler restraints, or children inbooster seats, always follow the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.

G WarningDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. Theycould tear.Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in thedoor or in the seat adjustment mechanism.This could damage the seat belt.Never attempt to make modifications to seatbelts. This could impair the effectiveness ofthe seat belts.

Fastening seat belts

G WarningAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriately sizedchild restraint system or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

X Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position (Y page 63).

X Pull the seat belt smoothly through beltsash guide :.

34 Occupant safetySa

fety

X Without twisting it, place the shouldersection of the seat belt over the center ofthe shoulder and the lap section across thehips.

X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle ?.X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the

appropriate height (Y page 35).X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder

section of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

All seat belts in the vehicle, except thedriver's seat belt, are equipped with a specialseat belt retractor to secure child restraintsystems properly. For further information on"Special seat belt retractors", see(Y page 43).For more information about releasing the seatbelt with release button ?, see "Releasingseat belts" (Y page 35).

Adjusting the seat belt heightYou can adjust the seat belt height on thedriver's seat and the outer co-driver's seat.Adjust the belt to a height that allows theupper part of the seat belt to be routed acrossthe center of your shoulder.

X To raise: slide belt sash guide : upwards.The belt sash guide engages in variouspositions.

X To lower: press and hold belt sash guiderelease A.

X Slide belt sash guide : downwards.X Release belt sash guide release A and

make sure that belt sash guide : hasengaged.

Releasing seat beltsX Press release button = and guide belt

tongue ; back towards belt sashguide :.

! Make sure that the seat belt retracts fully.The seat belt or belt buckle may otherwisebecome trapped in the door or the seatadjustment mechanism. This coulddamage the door, door trim panels and theseat belt. Damaged seat belts can nolonger provide the intended degree ofprotection and must be replaced. Contactan authorized Sprinter Dealer.

Belt warning for drivers and co-driversRegardless of whether the driver's and co-driver's seat belts have already beenfastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamplights up for six seconds each time the engineis started. It then goes out once the driver andthe front passenger have fastened their seatbelts.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened afterthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. The warning tone goes outafter approximately six seconds or once thedriver's seat belt is fastened.

Emergency Tensioning Devices, seatbelt force limitersIf the vehicle is equipped with a driver's frontair bag, the seat belts on the driver's and co-driver's seats have ETDs.

! If the front-passenger seat is notoccupied, do not engage the seat belttongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency

Occupant safety 35

Safe

ty

Z

Tensioning Device could be triggered in theevent of an accident.

ETDs help remove slack in the seat belts in anaccident, pulling the seat belt close againstthe occupant's body.ETDs do not correct incorrect seat positionsor incorrectly fastened seat belts.ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.If the seat belt is also equipped with a seatbelt force limiter and this is triggered, theforce exerted by the seat belt on the vehicleoccupant is reduced.The seat belt force limiters are synchronizedwith the front air bags, which take on a partof the deceleration force in an accident. Thus,the force exerted on the occupant isdistributed over a greater area.The ETDs can only be triggered if the ignitionis switched on and the restraint systems areoperational, see "SRS warning lamp" .The ETDs are triggered depending on the typeand severity of an accident:Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end

collision, if the vehicle decelerates oraccelerates rapidly in a longitudinaldirection during the initial stages of theimpactRin the event of a side impact if the vehicle

decelerates or accelerates rapidly in alateral direction and the vehicle is equippedwith side impact air bags and/or windowcurtain air bagsRin certain situations, if the system detects

that the vehicle will overturnIf the ETDs are triggered, you will hear a bangand powder may also be released. In rarecases the bang may temporarily affect yourhearing. The power emitted is generally nothazardous to health. The + SRS indicatorlamp lights up.

G WarningPyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must bereplaced.

For your safety, when disposing of thepyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safetyinstructions. These are available at anyauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

IntroductionSRS reduces the risk of occupants hitting thevehicle interior in the event of an accident. Inaddition, it can reduce the forces theoccupants are subjected to during anaccident.SRS consists of:Rthe + SRS indicator lampRair bagsRair bag control unit (with crash sensors)RETDs for the driver's and co-driver's seatRseat belt force limiters, for the driver's and

co-driver's seat

+ indicator lampThe SRS system conducts a self-test whenthe ignition is switched on and in regularintervals while the engine is running. Thisfacilitates detection of system malfunctions.The + SRS indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster comes on when theignition is switched on.It goes out no later than a few seconds afterthe engine has been started.The SRS components are in operationalreadiness when the + SRS indicator lampis not lit while the engine is running.

G WarningThe SRS self-check has detected amalfunction if the + SRS indicator lamp:Rdoes not come on at allRfails to go out approximately 4 seconds

after the engine was startedRcomes on after the engine was started or

while driving

36 Occupant safetySa

fety

For your safety, we strongly recommendhaving the system checked by an authorizedSprinter Dealer immediately. Otherwise SRSmay not be activated when it is needed in anaccident, which could result in serious or fatalinjury. SRS might also deploy unexpectedlyand unnecessarily which could also result ininjury.In addition, improper work on SRS creates arisk of rendering SRS inoperative or causingunintended air bag deployment. Work on SRSmust therefore be performed by qualifiedtechnicians. Contact an authorized SprinterDealer.If it is necessary to modify an air bag systemto accommodate a person with disabilities,contact an authorized Sprinter Dealer fordetails.USA only: for detailed information, pleaseconsult our Customer Assistance Center at1-877-762-8267.

Safety guidelines for the seat belts, theEmergency Tensioning Devices and theair bags

G WarningRDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have

been subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced and their anchoringpoints must also be checked. Only use seatbelts which have been installed or suppliedby an authorized Sprinter Dealer.RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency

Tensioning Devices (ETDs) containperchlorate material, which may requirespecial handling and regard for theenvironment. Check with your localgovernment’s disposal guidelines.California residents, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function

on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced.

RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.They could tear.RDo not make any modification that could

change the effectiveness of the seat belts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may

severely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.RNo modifications of any kind may be made

to any components or wiring of the SRS.RDo not change or remove any component

or part of the SRS.RDo not install additional paneling, seat

covers, badges etc. over the steering wheelhub, co-driver's front air bag cover,outboard sides of the seat backrests, doortrim panels, or door frame trims.RDo not install additional electrical/

electronic equipment on or near SRScomponents and wiring.RKeep the area between air bags and

occupants free of objects (e.g. packages,purses, umbrellas etc.).RDo not hang items such as coat hangers

from the coat hooks or handles over thedoor. These items may be thrown around inthe vehicle and cause head and otherinjuries when the window curtain air bag isdeployed.RAir bag system components will be hot after

an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel or on the seat. Always keep both feeton the floor in front of the seat.RImproper repair work creates a risk of

rendering the SRS inoperative or causingunintended air bag deployment. Work onthe SRS must therefore only be performedby qualified technicians. Contact anauthorized Sprinter Dealer.RFor your protection and the protection of

others, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must be

Occupant safety 37

Safe

ty

Z

followed. These instructions are availablefrom any authorized Sprinter Dealer.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,

required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentially more seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, we stronglyrecommend that you inform the subsequentowner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS.Also refer them to the applicable section inthe Operator's Manual.

Air bags

Important safety notes

G WarningAir bags are designed to reduce the incidenceof injuries and fatalities in certain situations:Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-

passenger front air bags)Rside impacts (side impact air bags and

window curtain air bags)Rrollover (window curtain air bags)However, no system available today cancompletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.When the air bags are deployed, a smallamount of powder is released. The powdergenerally does not constitute a health hazardand does not indicate that there is a fire in thevehicle. In order to prevent potentialbreathing difficulties, you should leave thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If youhave any breathing difficulty but cannot getout of the vehicle after the airbag inflates,then get fresh air by opening a window ordoor.

G WarningTo reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags inflate, it is very important for the driverand co-driver to always be in a properly seated

position and to wear their respective seatbelt.For maximum protection in the event of acollision always be in normal seated positionwith your back against the seat backrest.Fasten your seat belt and make sure it isproperly positioned on your body.Since the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag as itinflates with great force instantaneously:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a

position that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RMove the driver’s seat as far back as

possible, still permitting proper operationof vehicle controls. The distance from thecenter of the driver’s chest to the center ofthe air bag cover on the steering wheelmust be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.You should be able to accomplish this byadjusting the seat and steering wheel. Ifyou have any difficulties, please contact anauthorized Sprinter Dealer.RDo not lean your head or chest close to the

steering wheel or instrument panel.RKeep hands on the outside of the steering

wheel rim. Placing hands and arms insidethe rim can increase the risk and potentialseverity of hand/arm injury when the driverfront air bag inflates.RMove the co-driver's seat as far as possible

away from the instrument panel when theseat is occupied.ROccupants, especially children, should

never place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door where the sideimpact air bag inflates. This could result inserious injuries or death should the sideimpact air bag be deployed. Always sit asupright as possible, wear the seat belt

38 Occupant safetySa

fety

properly and use an appropriately sizedinfant restraint, toddler restraint, orbooster seat recommended for the size andweight of the child.RChildren twelve years old and under must

never travel on the co-driver's seat. Theywill otherwise be struck by the co-driver'sfront air bag when it inflates in a crash. Thiscould result in serious or fatal injury.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safetyinformation. Be sure to give the buyer thisOperator’s Manual.

G WarningAccident research shows that the safest placefor children in an automobile is in a rear seat.A side impact air bag related injury may occurif occupants, especially children, are notproperly seated or restrained when next to aside impact air bag which needs to deployrapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.To help avoid the possibility of injury, pleasefollow these guidelines:

(1) Occupants, especially children,should never place their bodies orlean their heads in the area of thedoor where the side impact air baginflates. This could result inserious injuries or death shouldthe side impact air bag bedeployed.

(2) Always sit as upright as possibleand use the seat belts properly.Make sure that children 12 yearsold and under use an appropriatelysized child restraint, infantrestraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size andweight of the child.

(3) Always wear seat belts properly.

The air bags are only deployed if the air bagcontrol unit detects the need for deployment.

Only in the event of such a situation will theyprovide their supplemental protection.The driver and passenger should always weartheir seat belts. Otherwise, it is not possiblefor the air bags to provide their supplementalprotection.In the event of other types of impacts andimpacts below air bag deploymentthresholds, air bags will not deploy. The driverand passengers will then be protected to theextent possible by a properly fastened seatbelt. A properly fastened seat belt is alsoneeded to provide the best possibleprotection in a rollover.Air bags provide supplemental protection, butare not a substitute for the seat belts. Allvehicle occupants must fasten their seatbelts regardless of whether your vehicle isequipped with air bags or not.It is important for your safety and that of yourpassengers to have deployed air bagsreplaced and to have any malfunctioning airbags repaired. This will help to make sure theair bags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

Front air bags

G WarningObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 38).

The front air bags increase the degree ofprotection afforded to the driver and co-driveragainst head and chest injuries.

Occupant safety 39

Safe

ty

Z

Driver's front air bag : deploys in front ofthe steering wheel; co-driver's front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glovebox. They are deployed:Rin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the system determines that air bag

deployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRif the respective seat belt is fastenedRindependently of other air bags in the

vehicleIf the event of a rollover, the front air bags aregenerally not deployed unless the systemdetects high vehicle deceleration in alongitudinal direction.The air bags will not deploy in impacts whichdo not exceed the system's presetdeployment thresholds. You will then beprotected by the seat belt, provided that it isfastened.

Side impact air bags

G WarningObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 38).

G WarningIf you wish to use seat covers, we recommendfor safety reasons that you use only thoseapproved for Sprinter vehicles.The seat covers must feature a special tearseam for the side impact air bags. The sideimpact air bag may otherwise not deploycorrectly and may fail to provide the intendeddegree of protection in the event of a collision.Suitable seat covers can be obtained from anyauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

G WarningThe pressure sensors for side impact air bagcontrol are located in the doors. Do notmodify any components of the doors or doortrim panels including, for example, theaddition of door speakers.

Improper repair work on the doors or themodification or addition of components to thedoors creates a risk of rendering the sideimpact air bags inoperative or causingunintended air bag deployment. Work on thedoors must therefore only be performed byqualified technicians. Contact an authorizedSprinter Dealer.

G WarningOnly use seat covers which have been testedand approved for your vehicle type by thedistributor named on the inside of the frontcover. Using other seat covers may interferewith or prevent the deployment of the frontside impact air bags. Contact an authorizedSprinter Dealer for availability.

When deployed, the side impact air bags offeradditional protection for the thorax of thevehicle occupants on the side of the vehicleon which the impact occurs. However, theydo not protect the:RheadRneckRarms

Side impact air bags : deploy next to theouter seat cushions.Side impact air bags : are deployed:Ron the side on which the impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rate

of lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRwhether or not the seat belt is fastened

40 Occupant safetySa

fety

Rindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the Emergency

Tensioning DevicesThe side impact air bags are generally notdeployed in the event of a rollover, unless thesystem detects high vehicle deceleration oracceleration in a lateral direction anddetermines that they can offer additionalprotection to that provided by the seat belt.The side impact air bags are not deployed inside impacts which do not exceed thesystem's deployment threshold.

Window curtain air bags

G WarningObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 38).

The window curtain air bags enhanceprotection for the head (but not the chest orarms) of the vehicle occupants on the side ofthe vehicle on which the impact occurs.The window curtain air bags are installed inthe side of the roof frame above the frontdoors.

Window curtain air bags : are deployed:Ron the side on which the impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rate

of lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRregardless of whether the co-driver's seat

is occupiedRwhether or not the seat belt is fastened

Rin the event of a rollover where the systemdetermines that air bag deployment canoffer additional protection to that providedby the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the Emergency

Tensioning DevicesThe window curtain air bags will not deploy inimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset thresholds. You will then be protectedby the seat belt, provided that it is fastened.

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesIf an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:X Secure the child using an infant or child

restraint system appropriate to the age andweight of the child.

X Make sure that the infant or child isproperly secured at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

G WarningWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove thekey from the ignition lock. Always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Do not leavechildren unattended in the vehicle, even ifthey are secured in a child restraint system,or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Achild's unsupervised access to a vehicle couldresult in an accident and/or serious personalinjury.Children could injure themselves on parts ofthe vehicle or could suffer severe or fatalinjury due to extreme heat or cold.If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. This could cause, for example,metal parts of the child restraint system tobecome very hot. Touching these parts couldcause burns.

Occupant safety 41

Safe

ty

Z

G WarningDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment unless they arefirmly secured in place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventof:Rstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

Child restraint systems

Important safety notesG WarningObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 41).

We recommend all infants and children beproperly restrained using the child restraintsystems at all times while the vehicle is inmotion.The use of infant or child restraints is requiredby law in all 50 states, the District ofColumbia, the U.S. territories and allCanadian provinces.Infants and small children should always beseated in an infant or child seat restraintsystem appropriate for the size and weight ofthe child. They must be properly secured inaccordance with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions for the infant or childseat restraint system. All infant and child seatrestraint systems must comply with the USFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards 213 and 210.2.A statement by the child restraintmanufacturer of compliance with thesestandards can be found on the instructionlabel on the child restraint system. You willalso find the statement in the instructionmanual provided with the child restraintsystem.

When using any infant restraint, childrestraint or booster seat, make sure tocarefully read and follow all manufacturer'sinstructions for installation and use.Please read the warning labels affixed to theinterior of the vehicle or to the infant restraintsystem or child restraint system.

G WarningAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer thanchildren secured in the co-driver's seat. Forthis reason, we strongly advise that youalways secure children in the rear seats.Regardless of the seat position, childrenunder 12 years must be secured correctly ina suitable infant or child restraint system orbooster seat suitable for the size and weightof the child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seatbelt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchorsand Top Tether strap, fully in accordance withthe child seat manufacturer’s instructions.Occupants, in particular children, must sit asupright as possible, fasten the seat beltcorrectly and use a suitable infant restraintsystem, child restraint system or booster seatsuitable for the size and weight of the child.Children can be seriously or even fatallyinjured by an air bag deploying. Observe thefollowing important information if it isabsolutely necessary to carry a child on theco-driver's seat:RThe co-driver's front air bag is not

deactivated.RNever secure your child in a rearward-

facing child restraint system on the co-driver's seat. Only install a rearward-facingchild restraint system on a suitable rearseat.RWhere permitted by law, if you secure your

child in a forward-facing child restraintsystem on the co-driver's seat, move theco-driver's seat as far back to the rear aspossible.

42 Occupant safetySa

fety

RNever place anything between the seatcushion and child seat (e.g. pillow). Thebottom of the child seat must make fullcontact with the vehicle seat cushion. Anincorrectly mounted child seat could causeinjuries to the child in the event of anaccident, instead of protecting the child.RObserve the manufacturer's instructions

when installing special child restraintsystems.

G WarningInfants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. During anaccident, they could be crushed between theoccupant and seat belt.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.Children too big for a toddler restraint mustride in seats using regular seat belts. Positionthe shoulder belt across the chest andshoulder, not face or neck. A booster seatmay be necessary to achieve proper seat beltpositioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) untilthey reach a height where a lap/shoulder beltfits properly without a booster.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint frombecoming a projectile in the event of anaccident.

Special seat belt retractorG WarningObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 41).

All seat belts in the vehicle, except thedriver's seat belt, are equipped with a specialseat belt retractor. When activated, thespecial seat belt retractor ensures that theseat belt cannot slacken once the child seatis secured.

Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation instructions.X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia

reel.X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt

buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia

reel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor function is enabled.

X Push down on the child restraint system totake up any slack.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation instructions.X Press the seat belt release button and

guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor function isdeactivated.

G WarningNever release the seat belt buckle while thevehicle is in motion, since the special seat beltretractor will be deactivated.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securingsystem in the rear compartmentG WarningObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 41).

G WarningChildren too big for a toddler restraint mustride in seats using regular seat belts. Positionthe shoulder belt across the chest andshoulder, not face or neck.In order to attain the correct seating positionfor children weighing over 41 lb (18 kg), it maybe necessary to use a booster seat until theyreach a height where a normal lap/shoulder

Occupant safety 43

Safe

ty

Z

seat belt lies properly across their bodieswithout the need for a booster seat.Install the child restraint system according tothe manufacturer's instructions.The child restraint system must be installedfirmly on both brackets.An incorrectly installed child restraint systemcan come loose in the event of an accident,causing the child to be severely or fatallyinjured.Child restraint systems/child restraintretaining brackets that are damaged or havesuffered damage due to an impact must bereplaced.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardizedsecuring system for special child restraintsystems on the rear seats.The securing rings for two LATCH-type(ISOFIX) child restraint systems are locatedbetween the seat cushions and the backrest:Ron the left and right outer sides on a narrow

rear bench seat with three seatsRon the outer left side on a rear bench seat

with two seatsInstall child restraint systems without theLATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing system usingthe vehicle's seat belts. Follow themanufacturer's instructions for installation ofchild restraint systems.

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the centerseat does not get trapped. Otherwise, theseat belt could be damaged.

: Securing ringsX Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint system. Comply with themanufacturer's instructions wheninstalling the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system.

Top TetherG WarningObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 41).

Top Tether provides an additional attachmentpoint between the "LATCH" type child seatmount (ISOFIX) child restraint system and therear seat. It helps reduce even further the riskof injury.The Top Tether anchorages are located on thefeet at the rear of the rear bench seats.

44 Occupant safetySa

fety

X Move head restraint : upwards.X Install the "LATCH" child seat mount with

Top Tether. Comply with themanufacturer's installation instructionswhen doing so.

X Route Top Tether belt ? under headrestraint : between both head restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tetherbelt ? into Top Tether anchorage ;.Make sure that:RTop Tether hook = is hooked into Top

Tether anchorage ;, as illustrated.RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted.

X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Comply withthe manufacturer's installationinstructions when doing so.

X If necessary, push the head restraint backdown slightly. Make sure that the routing ofTop Tether belt ? is not impaired.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

G WarningObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 41).

G WarningChildren could open a rear door from insidethe vehicle. This could result in seriousinjuries or an accident. Therefore, whenchildren ride in the rear always secure the reardoors with the child-proof locks.

You can use the child-proof locks in the doorsto secure the sliding door and the rear doorindividually.A door with an activated child-proof lockcannot be opened from the inside. It can onlybe opened from the outside if the vehicle isunlocked.

Child-proof lock for the sliding door

Child-proof lock for the rear door: Latch; To activate= To deactivateX To activate/deactivate: push latch : in

the corresponding direction.X Then, make sure that the child-proof locks

are working properly.

Emergency exit

Emergency exit windowThe vehicle may feature an emergency exitwindow. The emergency exit window isintended for use in an emergency only and

Emergency exit 45

Safe

ty

Z

must not be opened unless the vehicle isstationary.In an emergency, or after an accident, thevehicle occupants can exit the vehiclethrough the emergency exit window.The emergency exit window is the firstwindow behind the driver's seat on thedriver's side. It is marked by the "EmergencyExit" label.

G WarningObserve the following notes to make sure thatthe emergency exit window can be usedsafely in the event of an emergency:RBefore beginning a journey, inform the

vehicle occupants of the emergency exitwindow and explain how to use it. Makesure to explicitly point out the risksdescribed here.ROnly vehicle occupants who know how to

use the emergency exit window arepermitted to sit next to it.RAccess to the emergency exit window must

remain unobstructed. Do not place anylarge or heavy objects on or in front of theseats next to the emergency exit window.RThe window handles must not be used as

hooks, e.g. to hang up light objects, bagsor items of clothing.

G WarningTo reduce the risk of accident or injury whenexiting the vehicle through the emergencyexit window, observe the following notes:ROnly open the emergency exit window

when the vehicle is stationary.RMake sure that nobody becomes trapped,

both when closing and when opening theemergency exit window. The emergencyexit window must be held open by oneperson.RPay attention to the traffic conditions and

make sure that there is sufficient spacewhen exiting through the emergency exitwindow.RPay attention to the traffic conditions when

exiting the vehicle. Also pay attention to thevehicle height and the local surroundings.

Be especially careful if there are children inthe vicinity.

G WarningAn open or unlocked emergency exit windowcan be torn from its anchorages when thevehicle is in motion and can thereby cause anaccident.For this reason, always check the lock and thelocking pins of the emergency exit windowbefore driving off.Never open the emergency exit window whilethe vehicle is in motion.

! Make sure there is sufficient clearancewhen opening the emergency exit window.Hold the open window in position. Youcould otherwise damage the emergencyexit window.

X To open: turn both handles : to a verticalposition. Locking pins ; will break in theprocess.The window is unlocked.

X Swing the window outwards by the handlesand hold it in this position. Make sure thereis sufficient clearance when doing so.

X To close: close the window.

46 Emergency exitSa

fety

X Turn both handles : to a horizontalposition. Make sure that locks = are infront of the window frame on the inside.The window is locked.

X Replace locking pins ; before beginning anew journey at the latest.You may obtain information about this fromany authorized Sprinter Dealer.

Driving safety systems

Important safety notes

G WarningThe following factors increase the risk ofaccidents:RExcessive speed, especially in turnsRWet and slippery road surfacesRFollowing another vehicle too closelyThe driving safety systems described in thissection cannot reduce these risks or preventthe natural laws of physics from acting on thevehicle. They cannot increase braking orsteering efficiency beyond that afforded bythe condition of the vehicle brakes and tiresor the traction afforded.Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver canprevent accidents.The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with thedriving safety systems described in thissection must never be exploited in a recklessor dangerous manner which could jeopardizethe user's safety or the safety of others.Always adjust your driving style to theprevailing road and weather conditions andkeep a safe distance to other road users andobjects on the street.If a driving system malfunctions, other drivingsafety systems may also switch off. Observeindicator and warning lamps that may comeon as well as messages in the multifunctiondisplay that may appear.

i In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,

snow chains. Only in this way will thedriving safety systems described in thissection work as effectively as possible.

OverviewIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)RBAS (Brake Assist System)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)RASR (Acceleration Skid Control)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Important safety notes

G WarningObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 47).

G Warning!Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steadybrake pedal pressure instead. Pumping thebrake pedal reduces the braking effect.

ABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock during braking.This allows you to maintain the ability to steeryour vehicle.ABS works from a speed of about 3 mph(5 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surfaceconditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,even when you only brake gently.The ! warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.

BrakingIf ABS intervenes when braking, you will feela pulsating in the brake pedal.If the d warning lamp flashes, this mayindicate dangerous road conditions and

Driving safety systems 47

Safe

ty

Z

serves as a reminder to take extra care whiledriving.X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the

brake pedal with force until the brakingsituation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

G WarningIf the ABS malfunctions, other driving systemssuch as the BAS or the ESP® are also switchedoff. Observe indicator and warning lamps thatmay come on as well as messages in themultifunction display that may appear.If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lockduring hard braking, reducing the steeringcapability and extending the braking distance.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

G WarningObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 47).

BAS operates in emergency brakingsituations. If you depress the brake pedalquickly, BAS automatically boosts the brakingforce, potentially reducing the stoppingdistance.X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until

the emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

G WarningIf the BAS malfunctions, the brake system stillfunctions, but without the additional brakeboost available that the BAS would normallyprovide in an emergency braking maneuver.Therefore, the braking distance may increase.

EBD (Electronic Brake forceDistribution)

G WarningObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 47).

EBD monitors and controls the brakepressure on the rear wheels to improvedriving stability while braking.

G WarningIf the h, :, ! and b indicatorlamps light up while the vehicle is in motion,EBD may be defective.If EBD malfunctions, the brake system will stillfunction with full brake boost. However, therear wheels could lock up during emergencybraking situations, for example. You couldlose control of the vehicle and cause anaccident.Adapt your driving style to the changeddriving characteristics.

ASR (acceleration skid control)

Important safety notes

G WarningObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 47).

ASR can significantly improve traction, i.e.the transmission of power from the tires tothe road surface, and thus may increase thevehicle's driving stability. ASR assists inpulling away and accelerating, particularly onsmooth and slippery surfaces.ASR can brake individual wheels and limitsthe engine torque to help prevent the drivewheels from spinning.If ASR intervenes, the d warning lampflashes in the instrument cluster.

48 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

G WarningNever switch off ASR when you see thed warning lamp flashing in the instrumentcluster. In this case proceed as follows:Rwhen driving off, apply as little throttle as

possible.Rwhile driving, ease off the accelerator

pedal.Radapt your speed and driving style to the

prevailing road conditions.Failure to observe these guidelines couldcause the vehicle to skid. ESP® cannotprevent accidents resulting from excessivespeed.

If, taking tires, cargo load and gradient intoconsideration, the surface driven on stillprovides insufficient traction, you mayexperience difficulties in pulling away despiteASR.Vehicles without steering-wheel buttons:the : indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when you switch on theignition. It goes out when the engine isrunning.

Activating/deactivating ASR

G WarningASR should not be switched off during normaldriving other than in the circumstancesdescribed below. Deactivating the system willreduce vehicle stability in driving maneuvers.Do not switch off ASR when a spare wheel ismounted.

ASR is activated automatically when theengine is running.It may be best to deactivate ASR briefly in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

If you deactivate ASR:Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and

the drive wheels can spin. The spinning ofthe wheels results in a cutting action, whichprovides better grip.Rbrake intervention will continue to improve

traction where a drive wheel begins to spin,e.g. if only the side of the road is slippery.The wheel will be braked to increasetraction under such circumstances.Ractive brake intervention by ESP® to

increase driving stability remains active.

G WarningEven with ASR deactivated, ESP® remainsactive and continues to perform brakeinterventions where this is necessary toimprove driving stability. The d warninglamp flashes.With ASR deactivated, there is an increasedrisk of your vehicle's brake systemoverheating and suffering damage due toprolonged application. A hot brake system willalso result in increased stopping distance.Therefore, only deactivate ASR whenabsolutely necessary.

X Press button :.When ASR is deactivated, the d warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

Driving safety systems 49

Safe

ty

Z

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

G WarningObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 47).

If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to help stabilizethe vehicle. If necessary, the engine output isalso modified to help keep the vehicle on thedesired course within physical limits. ESP®

assists the driver when pulling away on wetor slippery roads. ESP® can also help stabilizethe vehicle during braking.If ESP® intervenes, the d warning lampflashes in the instrument cluster.

G WarningIf the h indicator lamp remains lit, ESP® isnot available due to a malfunction. Vehiclestability in standard driving maneuvers isreduced.Adapt your speed and driving style to theprevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of ESP®.

If ESP® is malfunctioning, the engine outputmay be reduced.

! Only operate the vehicle for a maximumof ten seconds on a brake testdynamometer. Switch off the ignition.Application of the brakes by ESP® mayotherwise destroy the brake system.

! Do not operate the vehicle on adynamometer (e.g. for a performance test).If you would like to operate the vehicle ona dynamometer, consult an authorizedSprinter Dealer beforehand. The drive trainor brake system could otherwise bedamaged.

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

50 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

Vehicle equipment .............................. 52Opening and closing ........................... 52Anti-theft systems .............................. 61Seats .................................................... 63Steering wheel .................................... 69Mirrors ................................................. 69Instrument cluster .............................. 70On-board computer without steer-ing wheel buttons ............................... 72On-board computer with steeringwheel buttons ..................................... 74Power supply ....................................... 87Lighting ................................................ 88Good visibility ...................................... 94Climate control .................................... 97Driving and parking .......................... 108Brakes ................................................ 112Automatic transmission ................... 113Driving the vehicle ............................ 116Driving systems ................................ 117Features ............................................. 128Communications ............................... 133

51

Cont

rols

Vehicle equipment

i Diese Betriebsanleitung beschreibt alleModelle, Serien- und SonderausstattungenIhres Fahrzeugs, die zum Zeitpunkt desRedaktionsschlusses dieserBetriebsanleitung erhältlich waren.Länderspezifische Abweichungen sindmöglich. Beachten Sie, dass Ihr Fahrzeugnicht mit allen beschriebenen Funktionenausgestattet sein könnte. Dies betrifft auchsicherheitsrelevante Systeme undFunktionen.

Opening and closing

Vehicle keyThe vehicle comes equipped with 2 or 4remote controls with an integrated foldingkey, or 4 keys.You must have any keys that are not deliveredwith the vehicle programmed before use.Further information can be obtained at anyauthorized Sprinter Dealer.Always take the key with you when leaving thevehicle, even if you are only leaving it for ashort time.Information on unlocking and locking thevehicle with a key can be found in the"Locking/unlocking the vehicle using theremote control with integrated key"(Y page 54)

G WarningDo not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system. Children could otherwiseinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle.They could be severely or even fatally injuredby prolonged exposure to intense heat orcold.

If children open a door, they could:Rinjure other peopleRget out of the vehicle and thereby injure

themselves or be injured by a passingvehicleRseverely injure themselves by falling down,

in particular due to the vehicle heightAlways take the key with you when leaving thevehicle, even if you are only leaving for a shorttime.

Key with remote controlThe vehicle comes equipped with two or fourremote controls with an integrated foldingkey, which are referred to simply as key in thismanual. You must have any keys that are notdelivered with the vehicle programmedbefore use. Further information can beobtained at any authorized Sprinter Dealer.The key's remote control conforms to theFCC regulations (part 15) and the CanadianIndustrial Standard RSS-210 and has a rangeof up to 32 ft (10 m).The key's remote control locks/unlocks thedriver's door and/or the vehicle centrally, ifset at the factory:Rthe driver's and the co-driver's doorRthe sliding doorsRthe rear doors

i If the driver's or co-driver's door is notclosed, the corresponding door is notlocked. If a sliding door or a rear door is notclosed properly, none of the rear doors arelocked.

If there is a key is in the ignition lock, theremote control is inoperative. Always observethe turn signal flashing sequence and checkthe door locking knobs when locking/unlocking the vehicle.

G WarningDo not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a child

52 Opening and closingCo

ntro

ls

restraint system. Children could otherwiseinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle.They could be severely or even fatally injuredby prolonged exposure to intense heat orcold.If children open a door, they could:Rinjure other peopleRget out of the vehicle and thereby injure

themselves or be injured by a passingvehicleRseverely injure themselves by falling down,

in particular due to the vehicle heightAlways take the key with you when leaving thevehicle, even if you are only leaving for a shorttime.

Remote control with an integrated folding key: 5 To unlock the sliding doors and the

rear door; % To unlock the driver's door only or

the vehicle centrally= & To lock the vehicle centrally? Key release buttonA Battery check lamp

! Do not expose the key to high levels ofelectromagnetic radiation since this couldinterfere with the operation of the key.Protect the key from moisture to preventmalfunctions.

i To prevent vehicle theft, you should onlyuse the remote control in the immediatevicinity of the vehicle.

You can also unlock the driver's door andthe rear door using the folding key(Y page 54).

Checking the batteriesX Press the %& button for longer than

two seconds.If the battery indicator lamp A lights upbriefly, the batteries in the remote controlstill have sufficient charge. Otherwise,change the batteries immediately(Y page 246).

i When you are testing the batteries andyour vehicle is within the range of theremote control, the vehicle is unlocked/locked each time you operate therespective button.

Unlocking/locking the vehicle usingthe remote controlX To unlock the driver's door: press the% button.The turn signals flash once. The anti-theftalarm system (ATA) is deactivated.

X To unlock the sliding doors and rear door: press the 5 button.The turn signals flash once.

X To unlock centrally: unlock the driver'sdoor.

X Press the % unlocking button againwithin two seconds.The turn signals flash once.

i Cargo vans and crew vans only: if youunlock the vehicle using the remote controland do not open a door within 40 seconds,the vehicle is automatically relocked.

X To lock centrally: press the & lockingbutton.The turn signals flash three times when thedrive authorization system or the Anti-TheftAlarm system (ATA) is activated and all thedoors are closed.

i Make sure that the locking knobs havedropped down.

Opening and closing 53

Cont

rols

Z

Locking the vehicle using the foldingkeyYou can also unlock/lock the driver's doorand the rear door using the folding key.

Driver's door

Rear door1 To lock2 To unlockX To unlock the driver's or rear door: press

the key release button on the remotecontrol.The key folds out.

X Slide the key into the door lock as far as itwill go and turn to position 2.The door is unlocked.

i The Anti-Theft Alarm system (ATA) istriggered when you open the vehicle usingthe folding key.

The alarm can be disabled in the followingways:X Press % or & on the remote control.orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.

X To lock the vehicle: lock all doors exceptthe driver's door and, if necessary the reardoor, from inside. To do this, press downthe door locking buttons.

X Press the key release button on the remotecontrol.The key folds out.

X Insert the key into the door lock of the reardoor as far as it will go and turn to position1.The rear doors are locked.

X Insert the key into the door lock of thedriver's door as far as it will go and turn toposition 1.The driver's door is locked.

Central locking

Safety notesYou can open a locked door from the insideat any time.

G WarningDo not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system. Children could otherwiseinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle.They could be severely or even fatally injuredby prolonged exposure to intense heat orcold.If children open a door, they could:Rinjure other peopleRget out of the vehicle and thereby injure

themselves or be injured by a passingvehicleRseverely injure themselves by falling down,

in particular due to the vehicle heightAlways take the key with you when leaving thevehicle, even if you are only leaving for a shorttime.

54 Opening and closingCo

ntro

ls

Locking and unlocking manuallyUsing the central locking button, you cancentrally lock/unlock either the entire vehicleor just the sliding doors and rear doors fromthe inside.

X To lock/unlock the entire vehicle: pressupper section : of the central lockingbutton when the doors are closed.When the entire vehicle is locked, theindicator lamp in the central locking buttonlights up.

i If the key is in position 0 or no longer inthe ignition lock, the indicator lamp in thecentral locking button remains lit for fiveseconds.

X To lock/unlock the sliding doors and rear doors: press lower section ; of thecentral locking button when the doors areclosed.When the sliding doors and rear doors arelocked, the indicator lamp in the centrallocking button lights up.

Automatic locking

General notesThe vehicle locks automatically as standardonce a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) has beenreached. Depending on the vehicle'sequipment, the doors may be lockedautomatically once the ignition is switchedon. You can find out more about theautomatic locking mechanism of your vehicleat any authorized Sprinter Dealer.

i When the automatic locking when drivingfunction is activated, there is a risk of beinglocked out if the vehicle is being pushed ortowed.For this reason, deactivate the automaticlocking when driving function:Rbefore pushing the vehicleRbefore towing the vehicleRif you are only leaving the vehicle for a

brief periodIf activated, automatic locking is deactivatedwhen the vehicle is unlocked or locked usingthe central locking button.Automatic locking is reactivated after theignition is switched off or a door is openedwith the vehicle stationary.

Activating automatic locking whendrivingX Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition

lock when the doors are closed.X For the entire vehicle: press the upper

section : of central locking button untilthe indicator lamp in the button flashestwice.

X For the sliding doors and rear doors only: press lower section ; of the centrallocking button until the indicator lamp inthe button flashes four times.

Opening and closing 55

Cont

rols

Z

Deactivating automatic locking whendrivingX Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition

lock when the doors are closed.X For the entire vehicle: press upper

section : of central locking button untilthe indicator lamp in the button flashestwice.

X For the sliding doors and rear doors only: press lower section ; of the centrallocking button until the indicator lamp inthe button flashes twice.

Ignition lock

g To insert/remove the key, to lock thesteering wheel

1 To unlock the steering wheel, powersupply for some consumers (e.g. theradio)

2 To switch on the ignition, power supply forall consumers preglow and drive position

3 To start the engine

i To unlock the steering wheel, move thesteering wheel slightly while turning the keyto position 1.On vehicles with a battery isolating switch,you must first switch on the electricalsystem (Y page 87).

Driver's door and co-driver's door

G WarningMake sure that nobody can become trappedas you close and open the doors. Exerciseparticular care, especially if children are nearthe vehicle.Only open the doors when road and trafficconditions permit. Make sure that there issufficient clearance when opening the doors.You could otherwise cause injury to yourselfand others.

You can open the driver's or co-driver's doorfrom the inside at any time, even if it is locked.

X Pull door handle :.Locking knob ; pops up.The door opens.

Sliding door

General notes

G WarningMake sure that nobody can become trappedas you close and open the doors. Exerciseparticular care, especially if children are nearthe vehicle.Only open the doors when road and trafficconditions permit. Make sure that there issufficient clearance when opening the doors.You could otherwise cause injury to yourselfand others.

56 Opening and closingCo

ntro

ls

G WarningIf the vehicle is parked on an incline, thesliding door may move of its own accord if itis open but not engaged. You and others couldthen become trapped.Make sure that the sliding door is engaged inthe active retainer.

The sliding door is equipped with an activeretainer, which engages the door at the endstop when opened.

i You can also lock the sliding door in placearound halfway when opening/closing. Ifyou do this, the door does not have to beopened fully when getting into or out of thevehicle. The intermediate detent does notfully engage the sliding door.

Opening/closing the sliding door fromthe outsideX To open: pull door handle : to open the

sliding door.X Slide the sliding door by handle : back to

the stop.X Check the sliding door detent.

The sliding door must be engaged.X To close: pull door handle : in the "close

door" direction, to release the sliding doorfrom the detent.

X Holding door handle :, slide the doorfirmly towards the front until it engages.

Opening/closing the sliding door fromthe insideX To unlock: pull locking knob ? upwards.

Only this sliding door unlocks. All otherdoors that were previously locked remainlocked.

X To open: press button ; to open theunlocked sliding door.

X Slide the sliding door by handle = back tothe stop.

X Check the sliding door detent.The sliding door must be engaged.

X To close: slide the sliding door firmlyforwards by handle = until it engages.

X To lock: press locking knob ? down.Only the sliding door is locked. All otherdoors that were previously unlockedremain unlocked.

Electrical closing assistIf your vehicle is fitted with electrical closingassist, you will require less force to close thesliding door.

G WarningMake sure that nobody can become trappedas you close the sliding door.If there is a risk of entrapment, pull theoutside door handle or press the button on theinside door handle and open the door.

Rear doorsYou can lock the rear doors at an angle of 90°,180° and 270°. Always make sure that theopen rear door is correctly engaged in thedetent.

! Make sure that there is sufficientclearance when opening the rear doors.You could otherwise damage the vehicleand objects in close range of the rear doors.

Opening and closing 57

Cont

rols

Z

G WarningAlways make sure that there is sufficient roomfor approaching traffic when opening the reardoors and that nobody can become trapped.You could otherwise injure yourself or othersby opening the rear doors.

G WarningIf you open the rear doors to 90° (detentposition), the rear lamps are no longer visible.The vehicle is no longer sufficiently visiblefrom the rear and will only be recognized asan obstacle at a late stage by other roadusers. This could lead to an accident.Therefore, in such a situation, ensure that thevehicle is visible from the rear according tothe respective national regulations, e.g. witha warning triangle.

Opening the rear doors from the outside

Opening the right-hand rear door

X Pull handle :.X Swing the rear door to the side until it

engages.

Opening the left-hand rear door

X Make sure that the right-hand rear door isopen and engaged.

X Pull release handle : in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Swing the rear door to the side until itengages.

Opening the rear doors to an angle of180° or 270°

i Vehicles with 270° pivoting rear doors:If you prefer to keep door retainer : outof the loading area when loading thevehicle, you can swivel it 180° against thespring force and onto the door and engageit. The door retainer remains in this positionand will not swivel back to its originalposition.Before closing the door, release doorretainer : from the detent and return it toits original position.

58 Opening and closingCo

ntro

ls

X Open the rear door to about 45°.X Pull and hold door retainer : in the

direction of the arrow.X Open the rear door more than 90°, so that

the door retainer cannot engage.X Release the door retainer and open the

door to an angle of 180° or 270°.

X With the rear door opened to an angle of270°, push it against magnetic doorretainer ; on the side wall.When the magnet on the rear door is incontact with magnetic door retainer ;, therear door is held in this position.

Closing the rear doors from the outside

G WarningMake sure that nobody can become trappedas you close the rear doors.

X Pull the rear door away from magnetic doorretainer ;.

X Close the left-hand rear door firmly fromthe outside.

X Close the left-hand rear door firmly fromthe outside.

i Door retainer : is automaticallyreleased from its detent.

Opening/closing the rear doors fromthe insideThe handle is on the inside of the right-handrear door. If a white marking is visible, thisindicates that the rear door is unlocked.

Rear doorX To unlock: slide latch ; to the left.

You will see a white marking.Only the rear door unlocks. All other doorsthat were previously locked remain locked.

X To open: pull opening lever : and openthe unlocked rear door.

G WarningMake sure that nobody can become trappedas you close the rear doors.

X To close: make sure that the left-hand reardoor is closed.

X Pull the rear door firmly by the door handleto close it.

X To lock: slide latch ; to the right.The white section is no longer visible.Only the rear door is locked. All other doorsthat were previously unlocked remainunlocked.

Partition sliding doorThe partition sliding door is in the partitionbetween the cab and the load compartment.

G WarningIf the partition sliding door is open and notengaged, it could move automatically whilethe vehicle is in motion. You or others couldbecome trapped or could be distracted fromthe traffic conditions, thus causing anaccident.

Opening and closing 59

Cont

rols

Z

Before driving off, make sure that the partitionsliding door is closed and that the lock isengaged.

G WarningMake sure that nobody can become trappedas you close the partition sliding door.

Opening/closing the partition slidingdoor from the cab

X To open: turn the key anti-clockwise =.The sliding door is unlocked.

X Slide the sliding door to the stop in thedirection of arrow ;.

X To close: slide the sliding door in thedirection of arrow : until it engages.The sliding door can be locked using thekey.

Opening/closing the partition slidingdoor from the load compartment

X To unlock: press the catch in the directionof arrow =.The sliding door is unlocked.

X Slide the sliding door to the stop in thedirection of arrow :.

X To close: slide the sliding door in thedirection of arrow ; until it engages.

Opening/closing the windows

Side windowsYou can open and close the side windowselectrically.Reset the side windows if there has been amalfunction or an interruption in the voltagesupply (Y page 61).

G WarningMake sure that nobody can become trappedbetween the side window and the door framewhen a side window is opened. Do not touchor lean against the side window during theopening procedure. You could becometrapped between the side window and thedoor frame as the side window moves down.If there is a risk of becoming trapped, releasethe switch or pull the switch upwards to closethe side window again.

G WarningMake sure that nobody can become trappedas you close the side windows. If there is arisk of somebody becoming trapped, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopenthe side window.

60 Opening and closingCo

ntro

ls

Control panel (example, driver's door): Power window, left; Power window, rightX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.X To open/close: pull or press switch :

or ; until the window has reached thedesired position.

If you press the switch beyond the pressurepoint and then release it, the window opensautomatically. To stop the movement, pressor pull the switch again.

G WarningDo not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system. Children could otherwiseinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle.They could be severely or even fatally injuredby prolonged exposure to intense heat orcold.If children open a door, they could:Rinjure other peopleRget out of the vehicle and thereby injure

themselves or be injured by a passingvehicleRseverely injure themselves by falling down,

in particular due to the vehicle heightAlways take the key with you when leaving thevehicle, even if you are only leaving for a shorttime.

Resetting the side windowsReset the side windows if there has been amalfunction or an interruption in the voltagesupply.X Pull the two power window switches and

hold for approximately one second afterclosing the side window.

Anti-theft systems

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents the vehicle frombeing started without the correct key.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. The engine canbe started by anyone if the key is left insidethe vehicle.X To activate: remove the key from the

ignition lock.X To deactivate: insert the key into the

ignition lock and turn to position 2.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot bestarted when the starter battery is fullycharged, the immobilizer may be defective.Contact an authorized Sprinter Dealer orcall 1-877-762-8267 (USA) or1-800-387-0100 (Canada).

Anti-theft alarm system (ATA)If the alarm system is armed, a visual andaudible alarm is triggered when the followingare opened:Ra doorRthe hoodThe alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.

Anti-theft systems 61

Cont

rols

Z

X To arm: close all doors.X Lock the vehicle using the & button on

the key.The indicator lamp in the upper centrallocking button (Y page 55) flashes.

X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle using the% button on the remote control.The indicator lamp in the upper centrallocking button (Y page 55) goes out.

i Cargo van and passenger van only:Unless you open a door within 40 secondsafter unlocking the vehicle:Rthe vehicle will be locked again.Rthe anti-theft alarm system will be re-

armed.

i The alarm system will be triggered if thevehicle was previously locked with the keyand is then unlocked from the inside.

X To stop the alarm: insert the key into theignition lock.

orX Press the % button on the remote

control.The alarm is switched off.

Tow-away alarmA visual and audible alarm is triggered if theinclination of the vehicle changes when tow-away protection is armed.

i The alarm signal is triggered, for exampleif the vehicle is being jacked up on one side,shortly before the wheel leaves the ground.

Tow-away protection is automatically armedapproximately 20 seconds after you lock thevehicle.Tow-away protection is automaticallydeactivated when you unlock the vehicle.Deactivate tow-away protection if the vehicleis being transported or loaded onto anothervehicle. This will prevent a false alarm.

X To deactivate when transporting the vehicle: turn the key to position 0 or 1 inthe ignition lock or remove the key.

X Press button :.Indicator lamp ; lights up forapproximately five seconds after thebutton is released.

X Lock the vehicle with the key.Tow-away protection remains deactivateduntil you lock the vehicle again.

Interior motion sensorIf the anti-theft alarm system is armed and thevehicle is locked, a visual and audible alarmis triggered if one of the side windows or therear window on your vehicle is smashed andsomeone reaches into the interior, forexample.

i If the interior motion sensor is armed andthe auxiliary heating system (Y page 104)switches on, a false alarm may occur as aresult of interior temperature monitoring.In this case, switch off either the interiormotion sensor or the auxiliary heating.

Arming the interior motion sensorX Close the side windows.

This will prevent false alarms.X Lock the vehicle.

The interior motion sensor is armed afterapproximately 40 seconds.

i Do not leave anything (e.g. mascots orcoat hangers) hanging on the rear-view

62 Anti-theft systemsCo

ntro

ls

mirror or on the grab handles on theheadliner. This will prevent a false alarm.

Deactivating the interior motion sensorDeactivate the interior motion sensor ifpeople or animals remain in the vehicle or youare having the vehicle transported, e.g. byferry. This will prevent a false alarm.

X Turn the key to position 0 or 1 in the ignitionlock or remove the key.

X Press button :.Indicator lamp ; lights up forapproximately five seconds after thebutton is released.

X Lock the vehicle with the key.The interior motion sensor remainsdeactivated until you lock the vehicle again.

Seats

Driver's and co-driver's seat

Standard/luxury/suspension seat

G WarningIf you adjust the driver's seat while the vehicleis in motion, your attention will be distractedfrom the traffic conditions. You could losecontrol of the vehicle as a result of suddenseat movements and, thereby, cause anaccident.Therefore, only adjust the driver's seat whenthe vehicle is stationary and the parking brakeis applied.

G WarningMake sure that nobody can become trappedas you adjust the seat. Never place yourhands under the seat or in the vicinity ofmoving parts.Your seat must be adjusted in such a way thatyou can wear the seat belt correctly.Observe the following points:RPosition the backrest in an almost vertical

position so that you are sitting virtuallyupright.RAvoid seat positions that prevent the seat

belt from being routed correctly. Theshoulder section of the belt must be routedover the middle of your shoulder and bepulled tight against your upper body. Thelap belt must always pass across your lapas low down as possible, i.e. over your hipjoints. Do not drive or ride with the backrestreclined too far back.RYour arms should be slightly bent when you

are holding the steering wheel.RThe distance from the pedals should be

such that you can depress them fully.RAdjust your head restraint so that its upper

edge is at the same level as the top of yourhead.RMake sure that you hear the seat engage.

Otherwise, the seat is not correctly lockedin place.

Failing to observe these instructions may leadto injury.

Seats 63

Cont

rols

Z

: Seat fore-and-aft adjustment; Lumbar support adjustment= Seat backrest adjustment? Seat height adjustmentA Seat cushion angle adjustmentB Seat suspension adjustmentC Seat suspension lock

i Depending on the seat model, someadjustments may not be available.

X To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: pull lever : up.

X Slide the seat forwards or back until youcan depress the pedals.

X Release lever :.X Slide the seat forwards or back until you

hear it engage.X To adjust the seat backrest: turn

handwheel = forwards.The seat backrest moves to a verticalposition.

X Turn handwheel = towards the rear.The seat backrest tilts towards the rear.

X To adjust the seat height: press or pulllever ? repeatedly until you have reachedthe desired seat height.

X To adjust the seat cushion angle: turnhandwheel A forwards.The front of the seat cushion is lowered.

X Turn handwheel A towards the rear.The front of the seat cushion is raised.

i The lumbar support allows you to use thebackrest to increase the support providedto the lumbar spine.When the lumbar support is correctlyadjusted, it reduces strain on your backwhile driving.

X To adjust the lumbar support: turnhandwheel ; upwards.This increases the support provided to thelumbar region.

X Turn handwheel ; down.This reduces the support provided to thelumbar region.

The seat suspension must be adapted to yourbody weight. Adjust the seat suspension onlywhile the seat is unoccupied.X To adjust the seat suspension: take your

weight off the seat.X Use handwheel B to select the body

weight (between 40 and 120 kg) for optimalseat suspension.The seat suspension will become more rigidthe higher you set the weight. It will thennot move as far.

If the seat moves up and down frequently andto a great extent, you can lock the seat in thelower movement range..X To engage the seat suspension lock:

turn handle C downwards.When it next moves, the seat will lock inposition.

i The seat suspension lock will only engageif your body weight equals or exceeds theweight selected for the seat suspension.

X To release the seat suspension lock:turn lever C upwards.The seat can now move up and down again.

64 SeatsCo

ntro

ls

Swiveling front seats

G WarningDo not start the engine unless the driver's andco-driver's seats are facing in the direction oftravel and are locked in position. Only adjustthe seats when the vehicle is stationary andthe parking brake is applied. You couldotherwise lose control of the vehicle as aresult of sudden seat movements and therebycause an accident.The safety systems only work when thedriver's and co-driver's seats are facing in thedirection of travel.

The driver's seat and co-driver's seat can berotated through 180°.The seats engage when facing in the directionof travel as well as when facing in the oppositedirection and also engage at an angle of 50°to the door.

! When rotating the seats, make sure thatthere is sufficient space to do so.Move the seat forward or back first. Thiswill help to avoid contact with other partsof the interior.Push the handbrake lever down to the stop.The parking brake or handbrake lever couldotherwise be damaged.

i Always slide the co-driver's seat forwardsbefore rotating it (Y page 64).

X Make sure that the parking brake has beenengaged and that the handbrake lever hasbeen pushed down to the stop(Y page 112).

X Adjust the steering wheel to provide thenecessary space to rotate and adjust thedriver's seat (Y page 69).

G WarningWhen releasing and rotating the seats, makesure that you do not trap yourself or others.Never place your hands under the seat or inthe vicinity of moving parts.

Seat release (example co-driver's seat)X To rotate the seat: push lever : on the

rear of the seat towards the center of thevehicle and slightly rotate the seat inwards.The swiveling mechanism is now released.

X Release lever :.X Rotate the seat inwards to the desired

position.

G WarningWhen the seat is facing in the oppositedirection to the direction of travel and hasbeen moved to the rearmost position, youcould knock against the exposed frame andbe injured.Therefore, always move the seat to a centralposition above the seat base when leaving itunoccupied. Inform others traveling with youof this risk.

Twin co-driver's seat

Seats 65

Cont

rols

Z

X To fold the seat cushions forwards: liftthe seat cushion out of frontanchorage :.

X Pull the seat cushion forwards slightly andout of rear anchorage ;.

X Fold the rear edge of the seat cushion up.

i You can stow various articles in the spaceunder the twin co-driver's seat.

X To fold the seat cushion back: fold downthe seat cushion by the rear edge.

X Slide the seat cushion under the seatbackrest into rear anchorage ;.

X Push down on the seat cushion at the frontuntil it engages in front anchorage :.

Rear bench seat

G Warning!The unlocking levers at the foot of the rearbench seat must lie parallel to the vehiclefloor. You may only install a rear bench seatwith two seats on the driver's side.Information about this can be found at anyauthorized Sprinter dealer.The integral seat belts can only protect you asintended if you correctly install the prescribedrear bench seats. For this reason, have a rearbench seat with four seats installed only at aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Sprinter dealer.Keep the mounting shells of the bench seatson the floor free from dirt and other objects.The secure engaging of the locks isguaranteed only in this way.For safety reasons, have bench seat mountingshells retrofitted only at an authorizedSprinter dealer.

i Do not exceed the maximum permissiblenumber of seats for models registered aspassenger vehicles.

! For safety reasons, the rear bench seatwith four seats must be installed orremoved only at a qualified specialist

workshop, e.g. an authorized Sprinterdealer.

Removing two-seat or three-seat rearbenchesThe locking lever is located on the feetunderneath the bench seat.

: LeverX Turn all levers : for the bench seat fully

upwards.The rear bench seat moves back into theseat mounting recesses on the vehiclefloor.

X Lift the rear bench seat upwards out of theseat mounting recesses.

66 SeatsCo

ntro

ls

Installing two-seat or three-seat rearbenchesX Observe the prescribed installation

position of the bench seat.Install the two-seat rear bench only on thedriver's side.

: Lever; Seat mounting recessesX Examine seat mounting recesses ; on the

vehicle floor.Seat mounting recesses ; must be keptfree from dirt and foreign objects.

X Position the rear bench seat in the directionof travel in seat mounting recesses ;.

X Slide the rear bench seat forwards until youhear the locking mechanisms engage.

X Check levers : on the feet of the benchseat.All levers : must be flush to the vehiclefloor.

Folding seat

Folding seat (example with partition sliding door)

G WarningWhen folding down the seat cushion, makesure that nobody can become trapped.If the key is inserted in the lock of the partitionsliding door the risk of injury to the co-driverin the case of steering movements and in theevent of an accident is increased.Remove the key of the partition sliding doorbefore using the folding seat.

X Remove key : from the partition slidingdoor.

X Fold seat cushion ; down or up.The seat cushion is held in thecorresponding position.

Head restraints

G WarningOnly drive with the head restraints installedand adjusted correctly. You could otherwisesuffer serious or fatal injuries in the area ofthe upper spinal column.Adjust your head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of yourhead. The back of your head should be asclose as possible to the head restraint whenrelaxed, so that your head can be properlysupported in the event of an accident.The head restraint must be engaged in adetent.

Seats 67

Cont

rols

Z

Adjusting the head restraints

: Release button; Height adjustment= Angle adjustment (luxury head restraints

only)X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the

desired position.X To lower: press release button : and slide

the head restraint down to the desiredposition.

X To adjust the angle: hold the headrestraint by the lower edge and tilt it to thedesired position.

Removing the head restraintsX Pull the head restraint up to the stop.X Press release button : and pull out the

head restraint.

Installing the head restraints! Install the head restraints with the front

side facing forwards (luxury headrestraints).

X Insert the head restraint so that the rodwith the detents is on the left.

X Push the head restraint down until itengages.

Armrests

X To set the armrest angle: fold the armrestupwards ; to an angle of more than 45°.The armrest is released.

X Fold the armrest forwards = to the stop.X Slowly fold the armrest upwards to the

desired position.X To fold the armrest up: fold the armrest

upwards : to an angle of more than 90°.

Seat heating

G Warning!Repeatedly setting the seat heating to level3 may result in excessive seat temperatures.The health of passengers that have limitedtemperature sensitivity or a limited ability toreact to excessively high temperatures maybe affected or they may even suffer burn-likeinjuries. Therefore, do not use seat heatinglevel 3 repeatedly.

68 SeatsCo

ntro

ls

The three red indicator lamps in button :show the activated heating level 1 to 3.The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximately fiveminutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.

! When you leave your seat, do not placeanything on the seat and switch off the seatheating. Do not switch the seat heating onwhen the seat is not occupied, e.g. whendriving without a co-driver. The seatheating may otherwise overheat, causingdamage to the seat.

At level 1, the seat heating remains incontinuous operation.X To switch on: make sure that the key is in

position 1 in the ignition lock.X Press button : repeatedly until the

desired heating level is set.X To switch off: press button : repeatedly

until all indicator lamps go out.

Steering wheel

G WarningOnly adjust the steering wheel when thevehicle is stationary. Only drive with thesteering wheel locked in position.An incorrectly secured steering wheel couldmake it more difficult to steer the vehiclesafely since the steering wheel could moveunexpectedly when turned. This could resultin you losing control of the vehicle andcausing an accident, thereby endangeringyourself and others.

G WarningNever leave children unsupervised in thevehicle. They could become trapped if they tryto adjust the steering column.

: Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment; Steering column height= LeverX Push lever = down to the stop.

The steering wheel is unlocked.X Move the steering wheel to the desired

position.X Pull lever = up to the stop.

The steering wheel is locked again.

Mirrors

Rear-view mirrorX Before starting off, adjust the rear-view

mirror by hand in such a way that you canget a good overview of road and trafficconditions.

Mirrors 69

Cont

rols

Z

X Anti-glare mode: push anti-glare lever :in the direction of the arrow.

Exterior mirrors

Important safety notes

G WarningThe additional mirrors in the exterior mirrorsreduce the size of the image. The objects areactually closer than they appear. You couldcause an accident if you only observe thetraffic through the additional mirrors.Therefore, pay particular attention to trafficbehind you when maneuvering or passingusing the main mirror in the exterior mirrorsalso and, if necessary, the rear-view mirror.

Adjusting manuallyX Before starting off, manually adjust the

exterior mirrors in such a way that you canget a good overview of road and trafficconditions.

Adjusting electricallyi The exterior mirrors are automatically

heated at low outside temperatures.

Button and switch for mirror adjustment

X Before pulling away, turn the key to position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the switch to position : for the left-hand exterior mirror or to position ; forthe right-hand exterior mirror.

X Press button = at the top, bottom, right orleft.Adjust the exterior mirrors in such a waythat you can get a good overview of roadand traffic conditions.

Instrument cluster

OverviewYou will find a full overview of the instrumentcluster in the "At a glance" section(Y page 24).

: Instrument cluster on vehicles withoutsteering wheel buttons

; Instrument cluster on vehicles withsteering-wheel buttons

= Adjustment buttons f/g, menu button4, reset button 9, service button Ë(engine oil level check)

You will find information on the engine oillevel check in the "Maintenance" section(Y page 171).

70 Instrument clusterCo

ntro

ls

The display in the instrument cluster isactivated when you:Ropen the driver's doorRturn the key to position 2 in the ignition lockRpress the 9 reset buttonRswitch on the lightsThe display switches off automatically afterapproximately 30 seconds if:Rthe vehicle lighting is not switched on.Rthe key is in position 0 in the ignition lock.

G WarningNo messages can be displayed if theinstrument cluster and/or the display fails.You will then not be able to see informationabout the vehicle status, such as speed andoutside temperature, warning/indicatorlamps and display messages or the failure ofsystems. Handling characteristics may beaffected. Adapt your speed and driving styleaccordingly.Immediately consult a qualified specialistworkshop. The qualified specialist workshopmust have the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired. We recommend an authorizedSprinter Dealer for this purpose. In particular,all work relevant to safety or on safety-relatedsystems must be carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WarningOnly use the adjustment buttons on theinstrument cluster when the traffic conditionspermit. You would otherwise be too distractedand could cause an accident.Do not reach through the steering wheel tooperate the adjustment buttons. Themovement of the steering wheel would besignificantly impeded. Your attention wouldalso be diverted from road and trafficconditions. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle, and lead to an accident.

Do not rest your head or chest on the steeringwheel or dashboard when operating theadjustment buttons.You will find page references for furtherinformation in the index under "Air bag".

Speedometeri In some countries, a warning sounds

when the vehicle reaches the maximumspeed limit, e.g. at 75 mph (120 km/h).

The speed can also be shown in the display.You can find information on the digitalspeedometer for vehicles without steeringwheel buttons under (Y page 73) and forvehicles with steering wheel buttons under(Y page 77).

TachometerThe red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.To protect the engine, the fuel supply isinterrupted when the red band is reached.

! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

%Environmental informationAvoid driving at high engine revs. This drivingstyle causes an unnecessary increase invehicle fuel consumption and, therefore,damage to the environment due to increasedemission of pollution.

Instrument cluster 71

Cont

rols

Z

Fuel gauge

: Fuel gauge on vehicles without steeringwheel buttons

; Fuel gauge on vehicles with steeringwheel buttons

= Fuel filler flap location indicator t: thefuel filler cap is on the left-hand side Fuelfiller flap location indicator u: the fuelfiller cap is on the right-hand side

? Reserve fuel warning lamp (Y page 193)

Information on the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)gauge can be found in the "Driving" section(Y page 116).

Trip odometer

ResettingX On vehicles with steering wheel buttons:

make sure that the display is showing thetrip odometer (Y page 77).

X Press and hold the 9 reset button until thetrip odometer is reset to 0.0.

Instrument lightingWith the lights switched on, you can adjustthe brightness of the instrument lightingusing the f and g buttons.X Brighter: press the f button.X Dimmer: press the g button.

i Vehicles with automatic headlamp mode:the instrument lighting also adapts toautomatic headlamp mode.

On-board computer without steeringwheel buttons

Layout and controlsThe on-board computer is activated as soonas you turn the key to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

G WarningOnly use the adjustment buttons on theinstrument cluster when the traffic conditionspermit. You would otherwise be too distractedand could cause an accident.Do not reach through the steering wheel tooperate the adjustment buttons. Themovement of the steering wheel would besignificantly impeded. Your attention wouldalso be diverted from road and trafficconditions. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle, and lead to an accident.Do not rest your head or chest on the steeringwheel or dashboard when operating theadjustment buttons.You will find page references for furtherinformation in the index under "Air bag".

The on-board computer shows vehicleinformation and settings in the display.You can control the display and the settingsin the on-board computer using theadjustment buttons on the instrumentcluster.

72 On-board computer without steering wheel buttonsCo

ntro

ls

Standard display

: Odometer; Trip meter= Clock? Outside temperature or digital

speedometerA Fuel gauge (Y page 72)B Selector lever position or current shift

range with automatic transmission

Changing the standard displayX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.X Press the 4 menu button for longer than

one second.The information shown in the displaychanges from the outside temperature tothe digital speedometer.

Outside temperature displayG WarningWhen the temperature displayed is just abovefreezing point, the road surface may be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Thevehicle could skid if you fail to adapt yourdriving style. Always adapt your driving styleand drive at a speed to suit the prevailingweather conditions.

Changes in outside temperature aredisplayed with a slight delay.

MenusUsing the f, g, 4 or 9 adjustmentbuttons, you can select the followingfunctions:

Rcalls up the service due date(Y page 167)Rchecking the engine oil level

(Y page 171)Rpreselecting/setting the auxiliary heating

switch-on time (Y page 104)Rtire pressure monitorRsetting the time (Y page 73)Rsetting the date (Y page 73)Rsetting daytime running lamp mode

(Y page 74)X To return to the standard display: press

the 4 menu button for longer than onesecond.

orX Do not press any button for 10 seconds.

The display accepts the changed settings.

Setting the timeX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.X Press the 4 menu button repeatedly until

the hours figure flashes.X Press f or g to set the hours.X Press reset button 9.

The minute display flashes.X Press f or g to set the minutes.

i If you keep the f or g button pressed,the value will change continuously.

Setting the dateX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.X Press the 4 menu button repeatedly until

the day flashes.X Press f or g to set the day.X Press reset button 9.

The month display flashes.X Press f or g to set the month.

On-board computer without steering wheel buttons 73

Cont

rols

Z

X Press reset button 9.The year display flashes.

X Press f or g to set the year.

i If you keep the f or g button pressed,the value will change continuously.

Setting daytime running lamp modeIf you have switched daytime running lampmode on and the light switch is in the $position, the following light up automaticallywhen the engine is running: the parkinglamps, the low-beam headlamps, the taillamps and the license plate lamps.For safety reasons, it is only possible tochange this setting when the vehicle isstationary. The factory setting is ON incountries in which daytime running lampmode is mandatory.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.X Press the 4 menu button repeatedly until

the L indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster flashes and the message ON orOFF appears in the display.

X Press f or g to activate or deactivatedaytime running lamp mode.

i USA only:If you turn the light switch to T orL, the corresponding light is switchedon. Daytime running lamp mode remainsactivated if the light switch is turned toÃ.Canada only:If you turn the light switch to L, the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Daytimerunning lamp mode remains activated if thelight switch is turned to T or Ã.

On-board computer with steeringwheel buttons

Layout and controlsThe on-board computer is activated as soonas you turn the key to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

G WarningOnly use the on-board computer when roadand traffic conditions permit. You wouldotherwise be distracted and unable toconcentrate properly on driving, and couldcause an accident.

The on-board computer shows vehicleinformation and settings in the display.

Steering wheel with buttons

You can control the display and the settingsin the on-board computer with the buttons onthe steering wheel.

: Display

On-board computer operation; W and XRSelects submenusRChanges valuesRAdjusts the volume

74 On-board computer with steering wheel buttonsCo

ntro

ls

= Using the telephone6 Accepts a call~ Ends a call

? Scrolls from one menu to anotherV ForwardsU Back

A Scrolls within a menu& Forwards* Back

Several functions are combined thematicallyin the menus.The display changes when you press one ofthe buttons on the steering wheel.For example, the Audio menu has functionsfor controlling the radio or CD player. You canuse a function to call up information or tochange the settings for the vehicle.

i Operation of the audio equipment usingthe steering wheel buttons and makingsettings using the AUDIO menu onlyfunction as described if Sprinter audioequipment is installed. If you are usingaudio equipment from anothermanufacturer, the described functions maybe restricted or not available at all.

You can think of the order of the menus andof the functions within a menu as a circle:X Press the V or U button repeatedly

to call up the menus in succession.X Press the * or & button repeatedly

to call up the functions within a menu insuccession.

Unlike other menus, you will find submenuswithin the Settings menu. For informationon how to use these submenus, see the"Settings menu" section .The number of menus depends on theoptional equipment installed in your vehicle.

On-board computer with steering wheel buttons 75

Cont

rols

Z

Menu overview

Diagrams

Generic termsThis is what the displays look like when youscroll through the menus.

i The generic terms in the tabular overviewshould make orientation easier for you.However, they are not always shown on thedisplay.

On Sound 5/Audio 20, the on-boardcomputer always shows the AUDIO and TEL(telephone) menus in English. This is the caseeven if a different language is selected for thedisplay.

Operation: Operation menu (Y page 77)RStandard displayRCalls up the service due date

(Y page 167)RTire pressure monitorRChecks the engine oil level

(Y page 171)

; Audio menu (Y page 77)

Operation= Message memory menu

(Y page 78)

? Settings menu

A Trip computer menu

B Telephone menu

Operation menuPress & or * to select the followingfunctions in the Operation menu:Rtrip meter and total distance recorder

(standard display)Rdisplay the coolant temperature

(Y page 77)Rcalling up the service due

date (Y page 167)Rtire pressure monitorRchecking the engine oil level

(Y page 171)

76 On-board computer with steering wheel buttonsCo

ntro

ls

Standard displayIn the basic setting, the odometer and the tripmeter are shown in the upper part of thedisplay. This is referred to as the standarddisplay.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the standard display appears.

: Odometer; Trip meter= Outside temperature or digital

speedometer? ClockA Selector lever position or current shift

range

Displaying the coolant temperatureUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the standard display appears.X Press & or * to select the coolant

temperature.

The temperature displayed may climb to250 ‡ (120 †) when the vehicle is beingdriven in normal conditions, and if the coolantcontains the correct concentration of

corrosion inhibitor and antifreeze. At highoutside temperatures and when driving inmountainous terrain, the coolanttemperature may rise to the end of the scale.

Audio menuYou can use the functions in the AUDIO menuto control the audio equipment that you havejust switched on.Operation of the audio equipment using thesteering wheel buttons and making settingsusing the AUDIO menu only function asdescribed if Sprinter audio equipment isinstalled. If you are using audio equipmentfrom another manufacturer, the describedfunctions may be restricted or not availableat all.If no audio equipment (Sound 5 or Audio 20)is switched on, you will see the AUDIO offmessage.

Selecting a radio stationUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Switch on the radio (see the separate

operating instructions).X Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the display shows the currentlyselected station.The kind of search depends on the settingfor radio station selection . The neareststored station will be selected or thestation search starts (except on Audio 20).

: Reception frequency; Waveband or waveband with memory

preset number

On-board computer with steering wheel buttons 77

Cont

rols

Z

X Press & or * to select the desiredstation.

i It is only possible to store new stationsusing the audio system. See the separateoperating instructions.You can also operate the radio in the sameway as usual.

Operating the CD playerUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Switch on the radio (see the separate

operating instructions) and select the CDplayer.

X Press the V or U button repeatedlyuntil the settings for the current CD appearin the display.

: Current CD (with CD changer); Current trackX Press & or * to select a CD track.

Message memory menuThe on-board computer stores certain displaymessages. In the Message memory menu,you can call up stored display messages.

G WarningThe on-board computer only records anddisplays malfunctions and warnings fromcertain systems. For this reason, you shouldalways make sure that your vehicle is safe touse. You could otherwise cause an accidentby driving an unsafe vehicle.

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly,

until the number of stored display

messages, e.g. 2 messages, appears in thedisplay.If no malfunctions have occurred, the No messages message appears.

X Press & or * to scroll through thestored display messages.Potential display messages are describedin the "Practical advice" section(Y page 201).

X Press the V or U button to changeto a different display.

i The message memory is cleared whenyou switch off the ignition.

Settings menuYou will find two functions in the Settingsmenu: the To reset: Press the 0 button for 3 sec. function, with which youcan reset all settings to the factory defaults.You will also find submenus which you canuse to make individual settings on the vehicle.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

Settings menu

Resetting all settingsYou can reset the functions in all submenusto the factory settings.

78 On-board computer with steering wheel buttonsCo

ntro

ls

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press the 9 reset button for about threeseconds.You will see a message in the displayprompting you to press the 9 reset buttonagain to confirm.

X Press the 9 reset button again.The functions of all submenus are reset tothe factory settings.

i If you do not press the 9 reset button asecond time to confirm, the settings areretained. The Settings menu appearsagain after approximately five seconds.For safety reasons, it is not possible toreset all of the functions while the vehicleis in motion. For example, the Hdlmp mode function in the Lighting submenuremains unchanged.

Resetting the functions of a submenuYou can reset the functions of an individualsubmenu to the factory settings.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

X Press W or X to select a submenu.X Press the 9 reset button for about three

seconds.You will see a message in the displayprompting you to press the 9 reset buttonagain to confirm.

X Press the 9 reset button again.All functions of the submenu are reset tothe factory settings.

i If you do not press the 9 reset button asecond time to confirm, the settings are

retained. The Settings menu appearsagain after approximately five seconds.For safety reasons, it is not possible toreset all of the functions while the vehicleis in motion. For example, the Hdlmp mode function in the Lighting submenuremains unchanged.

Submenus in the Settings menuUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

You will see the collection of submenus.There are more submenus than can bedisplayed at the same time.

X Press W or X to select a submenu.The submenu currently selected ishighlighted.

X Press & to select the function within asubmenu.

X Change the setting by pressing W orX.The changed setting is saved.

You can select the following submenus:RInstrument cluster (Y page 80)

- Units and language settings- Status bar settingsRClock/Date (Y page 82)

On-board computer with steering wheel buttons 79

Cont

rols

Z

RLighting (Y page 82)- Activating/deactivating daytime running

lamp mode and surround lighting (locatorlighting)

- Setting the exterior lighting delayedswitch-off

RVehicle (Y page 84)- Setting the radio station selection- Setting the windshield wiper sensitivityRAuxiliary heating(Y page 104)RConvenience(Y page 85)

- Key-dependent settings

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the unit for temperatureUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

X Press W or X button to select theInst. cluster submenu.

X Press & to select the Temperat.function.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press W or X to select the unit for allmessages in the display: °C (degreesCelsius) or °F (degrees Fahrenheit).

Selecting the unit for the digitalspeedometerUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

X Press W or X button to select theInst. cluster submenu.

X Press & to select the Dig. speedo.function.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press W or X to select the unit forthe digital speedometer: km/h or mph.

Selecting the unit for the odometerUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

X Press W or X button to select theInst. cluster submenu.

X Press & to select the Trip function.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

80 On-board computer with steering wheel buttonsCo

ntro

ls

X Press W or X to select the unit for allmessages in the display: km (kilometers) ormiles.

Selecting the languageUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

X Press W or X button to select theInst. cluster submenu.

X Press & to select the Languagefunction.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Use W or X to set the language forall messages.

The languages available are:RGermanRBritish EnglishRUS EnglishRFrenchRItalianRSpanish

Selecting the display for the status barUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

X Press W or X button to select theInst. cluster submenu.

X Press & to select the Select disp.function.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press W or X to select whether todisplay the outside temperature or thespeed (digital speedometer).The selected display is then shownpermanently in the lower part of the display(Y page 77).

Selecting the unit for the tire pressureUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

X Press W or X button to select theInst. cluster submenu.

X Press & to select the Tire pres.function.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press W or X to select the unit forthe tire pressure in the display: bar orpsi.

On-board computer with steering wheel buttons 81

Cont

rols

Z

Clock/Date submenu

Setting the clockUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

X Press W or X to select the Clock/Date submenu.

X Press & to select the Set clock Hours or Minutes function.

X Press W or X to set the values.

Selecting the time formatUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

X Press W or X to select the Clock/Date submenu.

X Press & to select the 12/24 h function.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press W or X to select the 12 h or24 h clock format.

Setting the dateUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

X Press W or X to select the Clock/Date submenu.

X Press & to select the Date Day orMonth or Year function.

X Press W or X to set the values.

Lighting submenu

Setting daytime running lamp modeIf you have set daytime running lamp modeand the light switch is in the $ position,the following light up automatically when theengine is running: the parking lamps, the low-beam headlamps, the tail lamps and thelicense plate lamps.For safety reasons, it is only possible tochange this setting when the vehicle isstationary. The factory setting is Constant incountries in which daytime running lampmode is mandatory.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

82 On-board computer with steering wheel buttonsCo

ntro

ls

X Press W or X to select theLighting submenu.

X Press & to select the Hdlmp modefunction.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press W or X to select the Manualor Constant (daytime running lamp mode)setting.

i USA only:If you turn the light switch to T orL, the corresponding light is switchedon. Daytime running lamp mode remainsactivated if the light switch is turned toÃ.Canada only:If you turn the light switch to L, the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Daytimerunning lamp mode remains activated if thelight switch is turned to T or Ã.

i For safety reasons, it is not possible toreset the Hdlmp mode function to thefactory setting while the vehicle is inmotion. You will see the following messagein the display: Setting only possible at standstill

Switching surround lighting (locatorlighting) on/offIf you switch the surround lighting to On, thefollowing lamps light up in the dark after youhave unlocked the vehicle using the key:Rthe parking lampsRthe tail lampsRthe license plate lampsRthe fog lamp

The surround lighting automatically switchesoff after 40 seconds or when you:Ropen the driver's doorRinsert the key into the ignition lockRlock the vehicle using the keyUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

X Press W or X to select theLighting submenu.

X Press & to select the Loc. lightingfunction.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press W or X to switch the surroundlighting (locator lighting) to On or Off.

Setting the exterior lighting delayedswitch-offThe Headlamps (delayed headlamp shut-off)function enables you to set whether and forhow long the exterior lighting is to remain onin the dark after closing the doors.If you have set the delayed switch-off andswitch off the engine, the following remain lit:Rthe parking lampsRthe tail lampsRthe license plate lampsRthe fog lamp

i You can reactivate this function byopening a door within 10 minutes.The exterior lighting is switched off after60 seconds if you do not open a door or if

On-board computer with steering wheel buttons 83

Cont

rols

Z

you do not close an opened door after theengine has been switched off.

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

X Press W or X to select theLighting submenu.

X Press & to select the Headlampsfunction.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press W or X to select whether andfor how long you wish the exterior lightingto remain on.

Vehicle submenu

Setting the radio station selectionThe Search function enables you todetermine whether the radio should searchfor a new station or a previously storedstation each time the radio is operated usingthe steering wheel buttons (not withAudio 20).The Frequency setting starts the stationsearch. The Memory setting selects the nextstored station.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

X Press W or X to select the Vehiclesubmenu.

X Press & to select the Search function.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press W or X to select the stationsearch mode.

Setting the windshield wiper sensitivityYou can use the Wipe sensor function to setthe sensitivity of the rain/light sensor:RLevel 1: high sensitivity – wiping begins

even in light rainRLevel 2: moderate sensitivityRLevel 3: low sensitivity – wiping only

begins in heavy rainUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press & to switch to the submenuselection.

X Press W or X to select the Vehiclesubmenu.

X Press & to select the Wipe sensorfunction.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press W or X to set the sensitivity ofthe rain/light sensor.

84 On-board computer with steering wheel buttonsCo

ntro

ls

Convenience submenu

Key-dependent settingsThe Key function allows you to define whethersettings for the following submenus arestored with a key dependence:RInst. cluster (instrument cluster)RLightingRVehicle Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the Settings menu appears in thedisplay.

X Press W or X to select theConvenience submenu.

X Press the & button to select the Keyfunction.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press W or X to activate ordeactivate key dependency.

i For safety reasons, it is not possible to setthe Key function while the vehicle is inmotion. You will see the following messagein the display: Setting only possible at standstill

Trip computer menuYou can call up or reset statistical data for thevehicle in the Trip computer menu.

Consumption statistics after startUsing the steering wheel buttonsi When you call up the trip computer again,

it displays the last function called up.

The units of the statistical informationdisplayed are set permanently for eachspecific country, and are thereforeindependent of the units selected in theSettings menu.

X Press the V or U button repeatedlyuntil the display shows the After startmessage.

: Distance driven since start; Time elapsed since start= Average speed since start? Average fuel consumption since start

i If you turn the key to position 0 in theignition lock or remove it, all the values arereset after approximately four hours.The values will not be reset if you turn thekey back to position 1 or 2 during this time.

Consumption statistics after resetUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the display shows the After startmessage.

X Press & or * repeatedly until theAfter reset message appears.

: Distance driven since last reset; Time elapsed since last reset= Average speed since last reset? Average fuel consumption since last reset

On-board computer with steering wheel buttons 85

Cont

rols

Z

Calling up the rangeUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the display shows the After startmessage.

X Press the & or * button repeatedlyuntil the Range message appears.The approximate distance which can becovered with the tank's current contentsand your current style of driving is shown.

i If the fuel tank is almost empty, the7 Please refuel message is showninstead of the range.

Resetting the consumption statisticsUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the display shows the After startmessage.

X Press & or * to select the functionyou would like to reset.

X Press and hold the 9 reset button until thevalues are reset to "0".

i The consumption statistics After start are automatically reset after 999hours or 9,999 miles (kilometers).The consumption statistics After Resetare automatically reset after 9,999 hoursor 99,999 miles (kilometers).

Telephone menuYou can operate the mobile phone using thefunctions in the TEL menu, provided it isconnected to the Sprinter hands-free system.

G WarningA driver's attention to the road must alwaysbe his/her primary focus when driving. Foryour safety and the safety of others, werecommend that you pull over to a safelocation and stop before placing or taking atelephone call. If you choose to use the

telephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone whenweather, road and traffic conditions permit.Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h ), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

Switching the mobile phone onUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Switch on the mobile phone and the audio

system; see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Press the V or U button repeatedlyuntil the TEL menu appears in the display.The information in the display depends onthe status of the mobile phone:RMobile phone off: the display shows theTEL off (Audio 20) message.RPIN not entered: the display shows theTEL PIN (Audio 20) message.

X Enter the PIN code using the mobile phoneor audio system.The mobile phone searches for a network.The display remains blank during this time.You will see the operational readinessdisplay as soon as the mobile phone hasfound a network.Once the operational readiness symbol isshown, you can operate the mobile phoneusing the steering wheel buttons.

i If the operational readiness symbol goesout, your vehicle is outside thetransmission/reception range.

Accepting a callYou can accept a call at any time, providedthe mobile phone is ready to receive calls.You will see the following message in thedisplay:

86 On-board computer with steering wheel buttonsCo

ntro

ls

X Press 6.The display shows the call duration.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press ~.

The caller then hears the engaged tone.The display shows the operationalreadiness symbol again.

Dialing a number from the phone bookYou may select and dial a number from thephone book at any time, provided the mobilephone is ready to receive calls.

i It is only possible to create new phonenumber entries in the phone book using themobile phone itself. See the separateoperating instructions.

X Press the V or U button repeatedlyuntil the TEL menu appears in the display.The operational readiness display is shown.

X Press & or * to switch to the phonebook.The on-board computer reads the phonebook stored on the SIM card or in themobile phone. This may take more than aminute. The display shows theProcessing (Audio 20) message.Reading is complete when the messagedisappears.

X Press & or * to select the desiredname.The display shows the stored names inalphabetical order.

i The display scrolls through the namesrapidly if you press & or * for longerthan one second. Releasing the buttonstops the rapid scroll.If you do not wish to make a call, press the~ button.

X Press 6.The on-board computer dials thecorresponding phone number. The displayshows the dialing (Audio 20) message.

The on-board computer stores the phonenumbers in the redial memory.When a connection is made, the displayshows the name of the other person andthe call duration.

RedialingThe on-board computer stores the last phonenumbers dialed. This means that you do nothave to search through the entire phonebook.X Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the TEL menu appears in the display.The operational readiness display is shown.

X Press 6.The display shows the most recently dialednumbers or names in the redial memory.

X Press the & or * button repeatedlyuntil the number or name you are lookingfor is displayed.

X Press 6.The on-board computer dials thecorresponding phone number.If a connection is made, the display showsthe call duration and name of the personyou are calling, if stored in the phone book,or the number you are dialing continues tobe displayed.

Power supply

Battery isolating switchYou can use the battery isolating switch todisconnect the power supply to all yourvehicle's consumers. This will preventuncontrolled battery discharge caused by off-load current consumption.

G WarningIf the vehicle is equipped with an additionalbattery in the engine compartment, it isnecessary to disconnect both batteries whenworking on the vehicle electrical circuit. Only

Power supply 87

Cont

rols

Z

then is the electrical system fullydisconnected from the power supply.

i Only disconnect the vehicle electricalsystem from the power supply using thebattery isolating switch if the vehicle is tobe parked up for a long period or if it isabsolutely necessary. After the powersupply has been activated, you must resetthe side windows (Y page 61).

Battery isolating switch in the driver's footwell, onthe right-hand side next to the accelerator pedal

! Make sure that the key is in position 0 inthe ignition lock and wait at least20 seconds before disconnecting orconnecting the battery isolating switch.You could otherwise damage electricalsystem components.

Switching off the electrical systemX Remove the key from the ignition lock and

wait for about 20 seconds.X Press and hold button ; and unplug

connector : from the earth pin.X Clamp connector : under the accelerator

pedal so that it cannot make contact withthe earth pin.All starter battery consumers aredisconnected from the power supply.

! When you clamp the connector under theaccelerator pedal, make sure that theconnector does not become damaged ordirty. It may otherwise not be possible to

restore the electrical connection when theparts are reassembled.

Switching on the electrical system

X Insert the key into the ignition lock.X Press connector : onto earth pin ; until

you feel it engage and the lock inhibitor isreleased.The connector must be in full contact withearth pin ;.All consumers are reconnected to the DCpower supply.

Lighting

General notesLegal requirements may impose variations incertain countries.

i When driving in countries in which trafficdrives on the opposite side of the road tothe country where the vehicle is registered,the oncoming traffic may be dazzled. Onvehicles with halogen headlamps you musthave the headlamps partially masked. Onvehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps youmust have the headlamps switched overbeforehand.You will find further information in the"Operation" section (Y page 138).

88 LightingCo

ntro

ls

Lamp failure indicatorThe bulb failure indicator monitors all lampsof the exterior lighting with the exception ofthe front position lamps and the trailerlighting. If a bulb fails, either theb(Y page 197) indicator lamp lights up ora corresponding message is shown in thedisplay (Y page 209).

i Depending on the equipment, the bulbfailure indicator can be omitted for alllamps with the exception of the turn signallamps.

G WarningThe bulb failure indicator is only an aid. Youare responsible for the proper functioning ofthe vehicle lighting. Insufficient or non-functioning vehicle lighting puts the operatingsafety of the vehicle at risk. You could causean accident and injure yourself or others.Therefore, check the lighting equipment ofthe vehicle before each journey and, ifnecessary, check the operation and conditionof the trailer lighting equipment.

Light switch

ConfigurationYou can switch the vehicle lighting on or offusing the light switch.The light switch is located between thedriver's door and the steering wheel.

: Light switch

The symbols on the light switch have thefollowing meanings:Ã Automatic headlamp mode$ Lights off/daytime running lamp modeT Parking lamps, license plate lamp and

instrument lighting onL Low-beam/high-beam headlamps

(depending on the position of thecombination switch)

Low-beam headlampsX Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition

lock.X Turn the light switch to L.

The L indicator lamp in the instrumentpanel lights up.

Daytime running lamp modeYou can adjust daytime running lamp modein the on-board computer:Rvehicles with steering wheel buttons

(Y page 74)Rvehicles without steering wheel buttons

(Y page 74)This is not possible in countries wheredaytime running lamp mode is a legalrequirement.X Turn the light switch to $.

The low-beam headlamps, parking lampsand license plate lamp are switched onwhen the engine is running.The L indicator lamp in the instrumentpanel lights up.

i USA only:When you turn the light switch to T orL, the respective light comes on. Whenthe light switch is turned to Ã, daytimerunning lamp mode remains switched on.

i Canada only:When you turn the light switch to L, thelow-beam headlamps are switched on.When the light switch is turned to T or

Lighting 89

Cont

rols

Z

Ã, daytime running lamp mode remainsswitched on.

Automatic headlamp modeParking lamps, low-beam headlamps and thelicense plate lamp are switched onautomatically depending on the ambientlight.

G Warning!If the light switch is set to Ã, the low-beamheadlamps will not come on automatically ifit is foggy. This could endanger you andothers. Therefore, turn the light switch toL in fog.The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.

X Turn the light switch to Ã.The parking lamps are switched on/offautomatically when the key is in position1 in the ignition lock.Parking lamps, low-beam headlamps andthe license plate lamp are switched on/offautomatically, depending on ambient lightconditions, when the engine is running.

Front fog lamps/rear fog lampX Turn light switch : to L or T.i If your vehicle is only equipped with rear

fog lamps, you must turn the light switch toL.

X Front fog lamps: pull light switch : outto the first stop.The green O indicator lamp next to thelight switch lights up.

X Rear fog lamp: pull light switch : out tothe second stop.The yellow R indicator lamp next to thelight switch lights up.

Combination switch

: High-beam headlamps; High beam flasher

High-beam headlampsX To switch on: switch on the low-beam

headlamps (Y page 89).X Press combination switch : forwards.

The K indicator lamp on the instrumentpanel comes on.

High beam flasherX Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition

lock.X Pull the combination switch briefly in

direction ;.

Turn signals

: To indicate a right turn; To indicate a left turn

90 LightingCo

ntro

ls

X To indicate: press the combination switchin desired direction : or ;, until itengages.The combination switch automaticallyreturns to its original position after largesteering movements.

X To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly in desired direction :or ;.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

Cornering light function (vehicleswith Bi-Xenon headlamps)

When the low-beam headlamps are switchedon, the cornering light function improves theillumination of the road in the direction youare turning.The cornering light function switches on automatically, if: Ryou are traveling at a speed of less than

25 mph (40 km/h) and you switch on theindicator lamp or turn the steering wheel.Ryou are traveling at a speed of between

25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph(70 km/h) and you turn the steering wheel.

The cornering light may continue to be lit fora short time, but is deactivated automaticallyafter a maximum of three minutes.

Hazard warning lampsThe hazard warning lamps work even whenthe ignition is switched off. They are activatedautomatically when an air bag is deployed orafter heavy brake application from a speed ofmore than 43 mph (70 km/h) that brings thevehicle to a standstill.

X To switch on/off: press button :.

i If you have indicated a turn while thehazard warning lamps are switched on, onlythe turn signal lamps on the side of thevehicle selected will light up.If the hazard warning lamps have beenswitched on automatically, press thehazard warning lamp switch to switch themoff.

G WarningIf you open the rear doors 90° (detentposition) or fold down the platform tailgate onvehicles with a platform, the rear lights arecovered.The vehicle will then be unsafe as its rearlights will not be visible for approachingtraffic. Other road users may not realize untiltoo late that it is an obstruction. This couldlead to an accident.You should ensure that the vehicle is visiblefrom the rear in accordance with the relevantnational regulations, by using the warningtriangle for instance.

Lighting 91

Cont

rols

Z

Front interior lighting

Standard front interior lighting

: To switch on the interior lighting; Automatic control= To switch off the interior lighting

Front interior lighting with overheadcontrol panel

: To switch the left-hand reading lamp on/off

; To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off

= Right-hand reading lamp? Interior lightA To switch the automatic control system

on/offB To switch the interior lighting on/offC Left-hand reading lamp

If you switch on interior lights or the readinglamps manually, they switch off automaticallyafter about twenty minutes.

Automatic controlThe interior lighting comes on when you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the key from the ignition lockThe interior lighting switches offautomatically. If a door is left open, theinterior lighting switches off afterapproximately 20 minutes.

Rear interior lighting

Switching the standard interior lightingon/offIn cargo vans/passenger vans equipped withstandard interior lighting, the switch for theinterior lighting is located on the rear lights inthe cargo compartment/vehicle interior.

Interior light with switch: To switch on the interior lighting; To switch off the interior lighting= Automatic control

Switching convenience interior lightingon/offIn passenger vans equipped withconvenience interior lighting, the centralcontrol switch for the rear interior lighting islocated between the steering wheel and theignition lock.In addition, there is also a switch on eachinterior light, which can be used to switch the

92 LightingCo

ntro

ls

lights on/off separately, depending on theposition of the central control switch.

Central control switch for the rear interior lighting: To switch on the interior lighting; Automatic control= To switch off the interior lightingX To activate: press upper section : on the

switch.The interior lights are switched on if theswitches on the interior lights (Y page 92)have not been switched to off ;.

X To deactivate: press lower section = ofthe switch.The interior lights are all switched off,regardless of the position of the switch onthe interior light.

Automatic controlX To switch on: move the central control

switch for the rear interior lighting toposition ;.If the switches on the interior lights(Y page 92) are set to automatic control=, the interior lights come on as soon asyou open a door or unlock the vehicle.

i The interior lights switch off automaticallyafter twenty minutes.In order to switch the interior lights onagain, you must:Ropen a doorRswitch on the ignition again

Cargo compartment motion detectorThe interior lighting is also switched on by themotion detector in the cargo compartment oncargo vans equipped with this feature.

G WarningMotion detectors use the invisible infraredradiation emitted by LEDs (light emittingdiodes).Do not view invisible infrared radiation, laserclass 1M, directly using optical instruments,such as eyeglasses.Your eyes could be injured.

If the motion detector detects a movement inthe cargo compartment when the vehicle isstationary, the interior lighting switches onfor approximately two minutes.The interior lighting can be switched on by themotion detector within four seconds if:Rthe interior light switch (Y page 92) is set

to "Automatic control"Rthe vehicle is stationary, the parking brake

is applied and the brake pedal is not beingdepressedorRthe selector lever is in position P on

vehicles with automatic transmission andthe brake pedal is not being depressed andRthe vehicle has not been locked from the

outside using the keyThe motion detector switches offautomatically if no change is detected in thevehicle for several hours, e.g. door opened,ignition key turned, etc. This prevents thebattery from becoming discharged.

Lighting 93

Cont

rols

Z

Good visibility

Windshield wipers

: Single wipe/to wipe with washer fluid(Y page 95)

; To switch on the windshield wipers

Switching on the windshield wipersX Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.

! Vehicles with rain/light sensor:Switch the wipers off in dry weather.Otherwise, dirt or optical effects may causeundesired windshield wiper sweeps. Thiscould then damage the windshield wiperblades or scratch the windshield.

X Turn the combination switch in thedirection of arrow ; to the appropriatesetting depending on the intensity of therain.

The detent positions of the combinationswitch correspond to the following wiperspeeds:0 Windshield wipers offI Intermittent wipeII Normal wipeIII Rapid wipe

i Canada only:If the windshield wipers are switched onand you stop the vehicle, the windshieldwiper speed is reduced. For example, if youhave selected level II and stop the vehicle,

wiping continues with intermittent wipewhile the vehicle is stationary. Ifintermittent wipe is selected, the intervalsbecome longer.Vehicles with a rain/light sensor: youcan use level I as the universal setting. Therain/light sensor sets the appropriatewiping frequency automatically, accordingto the intensity of the rain. When you stopthe vehicle, levels III and II are switcheddown to level I automatically.The windshield wipers will return to theoriginal level when you drive faster than5 mph (8 km/h) again.Setting the sensitivity of the rain/lightsensor .

Rear window wiperThe rear window wiper switches onautomatically if you engage reverse gear andthe windshield wipers are on.

: Switch2 To wipe with washer fluid3 Intermittent wipe4 To switch off the windshield wiper5 To wipe with washer fluidX Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Turn switch : to the corresponding

position

94 Good visibilityCo

ntro

ls

i Use washer fluid to wipe the rear windoweven when it is raining. This prevents therear window from smearing.

Windshield washer system

: To wipe with washer fluid; To switch on the windshield wipersX Press the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction ofarrow :.The windshield wipers wipe with washerfluid.

i Wipe the windshield using washer fluideven if it is raining. By doing so, you willprevent smears on the windshield.

Headlamp cleaning systemX Switch on the low-beam headlamps.X Switch on the windshield washer system.

The headlamps are cleaned with a high-pressure water jet.

Windshield heater

Important safety notes

G WarningClear all windows of ice and snow beforedriving off. Reduced visibility can, otherwise,endanger you or others.

Windshield heaterThe windshield heater is operational when theengine is running.The windshield heater consumes a lot ofpower. You should therefore switch off theheater as soon as the windshield is clear. Theheating switches off automatically after fiveminutes.

Windshield heater switchX Start the engine.X To switch on/off: press the : switch.

The indicator lamp in the switch comes onwhen the windshield heater is switched on.

Rear window defrosterThe rear window defroster is operationalwhen the engine is running. The rear windowdefroster consumes a lot of power. Youshould therefore switch the rear windowdefroster off as soon as the window is clear.The heating switches off automatically afterapproximately twelve minutes.

Rear window defroster switch

Good visibility 95

Cont

rols

Z

X Start the engine.X To switch on/off: press the : switch.

The indicator lamp in the switch comes onwhen the rear window defroster is switchedon.

96 Good visibilityCo

ntro

ls

Climate control

Overview of climate control systemsThe vehicle is equipped with one of the following climate control systems:

Heating

The heating system is a heating andventilation system, without a cooling system(Y page 98).

Air-conditioning system

The air-conditioning system is a combinationof a heating and ventilation system, togetherwith a cooling system (Y page 99).

Rear-compartment heating

The separately activated rear-compartmentheating allows a separate temperature andairflow setting for the rear compartment(Y page 99).

Rear-compartment air-conditioning system

The separately activated rear-compartmentair conditioning allows a separatetemperature and airflow setting for the rearcompartment (Y page 100).

On vehicles without rear-compartment air conditioning, the control unit is equipped with apaper holder (Y page 131).

Climate control 97

Cont

rols

Z

General notes

G WarningA driver's attention to the road and trafficconditions must always be his/her primaryfocus when driving.For your safety and the safety of others, werecommend that the driver should only selectfunctions through the control panel of theclimate control system when traffic and roadconditions permit it to be done safely.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

The air-conditioning system regulates thetemperature and humidity of the vehicleinterior and filters undesired particles out ofthe air.The heating/air-conditioning system can onlybe operated when the engine is running. Thesystem only functions optimally when theside windows are closed.The installed filter removes most dustparticles, pollen and unpleasant odors drawnin from the outside air. A clogged filterreduces the airflow into the vehicle interior.The interval for replacing the filter dependson environmental influences. The intervalmay be shorter than that indicated in theMaintenance Booklet.

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather or briefly switch toair-recirculation mode to quickly cool downthe vehicle if you have air conditioning/automatic climate control. In this way, youwill accelerate the cooling process andachieve the desired temperature faster.

G WarningObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows couldotherwise fog up. This may obstruct your viewof the traffic situation and, as a result, youmay cause an accident.

Electrical heater booster systemThe vehicle can be equipped with anelectrically-powered heater booster system.The heater booster system ensures that thevehicle interior is heated up very quicklyduring the engine's warm-up phase.

i The heater booster system switches onautomatically as required.

Overview of the functions of theclimate control system

Heating

Control panel, left-hand-drive vehicles

Operation: Sets the temperature (Y page 100)

z Defrosts the windshield

; K Sets the airflow (Y page 102)

z Defrosts the windshield

= e Switches air-recirculation modeon/off (Y page 104)

? Sets the air distribution(Y page 102)

sz Defrosts the windshield

98 Climate controlCo

ntro

ls

Recommendations for optimum climatecontrol:Rset the temperature control to the middle

level. Only change the temperature in smallincrements.Ronly use the defrosting function until the

windshield is clear again (Y page 103).Ronly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.

in a tunnel. The windows could otherwisefog up, because the flow of fresh air is cutoff and the air inside the vehicle iscirculated.

Rear-compartment heating

Operation: i Switches air-recirculation mode

on/off (Y page 100)

; K Sets the airflow (Y page 102)

= Sets the temperature (Y page 100)

For optimum climate control, set thetemperature control to the middle level. Onlychange the temperature in small increments.

Air-conditioning system

Operation: Sets the temperature (Y page 100)

z Defrosts the windshield

; Sets the airflow (Y page 102)K Increases the airflowI Decreases the airflow

= e Switches air-recirculation modeon/off (Y page 104)

? x Switches the reheat function(window air dehumidification) on/off(Y page 103)

A Sets the air distribution(Y page 102)

sz Defrosts the windshield

B ¿ Switches cooling with airdehumidification on/off(Y page 100)

C Blower setting bar display

z Defrosts the windshield

Recommendations for optimum climatecontrol:RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †) . Only

change the temperature in smallincrements.RSwitch on cooling with air

dehumidification. The indicator lamp in theswitch comes on.ROnly use the defrosting function until the

windshield is clear again (Y page 103).ROnly use the reheat function until the

fogged up windows are clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.

in a tunnel. The windows could otherwisefog up, because the flow of fresh air is cutoff and the air inside the vehicle iscirculated.

Climate control 99

Cont

rols

Z

Rear-compartment air-conditioningsystem

Operation: Sets the airflow (Y page 102)

K Increases the airflowI Decreases the airflow

; Sets the temperature (Y page 100)

= K Blower setting bar display

? i Activates/deactivates the rear-compartment air-conditioningsystem (Y page 100)

For optimum climate control, set thetemperature control to the middle level. Onlychange the temperature in small increments.

Switching the climate control on/offWhen the climate control is switched off, airintake and air circulation also stop. Onlyselect this setting briefly, as otherwise, thewindows may fog up.

Air-conditioning systemX To activate: press the K button and

adjust the blower setting to at least the firstlevel.The blower speeds are shown in bars nextto the button.

X To switch off: press the I button andafter reaching the lowest blower setting,press it again.

Rear-compartment heating/rear-compartment air conditioningX Press the i button.

If the indicator lamp in the button lights up,the rear-compartment heating/rear-compartment air conditioning is switchedon.

Switching cooling with airdehumidification on/off

If you want to cool the air inside the vehicleto the set temperature, you must switch oncooling with air dehumidification in vehicleswith an air-conditioning system. The air insidethe vehicle is then cooled and dehumidified.This prevents the windows from misting up.Condensation may appear on the undersideof the vehicle when in cooling mode.

G WarningIf you switch off the cooling function, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fog upmore quickly. This may prevent you fromobserving the traffic conditions, therebycausing an accident.

X Press the ¿ button.If the indicator lamp in the button lights up,cooling with air dehumidification isswitched on.

Setting the temperature

Heating/air-conditioning systemX Turn temperature control : clockwise to

increase the temperature orcounterclockwise to reduce thetemperature (Y page 98), (Y page 99).Begin in the center position or at 22 †.Only change the temperature in smallincrements.

100 Climate controlCo

ntro

ls

Rear-compartment heating/rear-compartment air conditioningX Make sure that the rear-compartment

climate control (rear-compartmentheating/air conditioning) is switched on(Y page 100).

X Turn rear-compartment heatingtemperature control =(Y page 99) or rear-compartment air conditioning temperaturecontrol ;(Y page 100) clockwise toincrease or counterclockwise to reduce thetemperature. Only change the temperaturein small increments.

i Your vehicle may be equipped with rear-compartment heating and rear-compartment air conditioning.If you set the temperature control to thecenter position, only one of the two climatecontrol systems is activated in the rearcompartment and set to air-recirculationmode (Y page 104).

Setting the air vents

General notes

G WarningAir flowing out of the air vents may be very hotor very cold. Therefore, there is a risk offrostbite or burns to exposed skin in theimmediate proximity of these air vents. Keepexposed parts of the body away from theseair vents. If necessary, direct the airflow to adifferent area of the vehicle interior.

You can set the center and side air vents. Theentire vehicle interior is ventilated via the airvents.

Observe the following instructions so air canflow freely through the air vents:Rkeep the air inlet on the hood free from ice

and snow.Rnever cover the vents or air inlet and outlet

grilles in the vehicle interior.Rfor virtually draft-free ventilation, move the

sliders on the center air vents to the centralposition.

Center air vents

: Center air vent, left; Center air vent, right= Thumbwheel for center air vent, right? Thumbwheel for center air vent, leftX Turn thumbwheel = or ? to the right to

open and to the left to close to close thecenter air vent.

Side air vents

Side air vent (example, right-hand side of thevehicle)

Climate control 101

Cont

rols

Z

X Turn thumbwheel = up to open and downto close side air vent :.

If the ® symbol can be seen onthumbwheel =, defroster vent ; is open.

Air ventsYou can use the air vents to ventilate thevehicle interior on the left and right, in the rearand the headroom.

Air vents (example, right-hand side of the vehicle): Air vent thumbwheel, left-hand side of the

vehicle; Air vent thumbwheel, right-hand side of

the vehicleX Turn thumbwheel : or ; to the right to

open and to the left to close the air vents.

Air vent in the roof ductOn vehicles with rear-compartment airconditioning, adjustable air vents areintegrated into the roof duct.

X Set the airflow by opening/closing the airflaps.

X Set the air distribution by turning airvents :.

! Always leave at least one air vent open.If the rear-compartment air conditioning isswitched on and all the air vents are closed,the air-conditioning system may bedamaged.

Setting the air distributionThe air distribution symbols have thefollowing meanings:m Directs air through the center

and side air ventssz Directs air to the windshield and

the air ventsq Directs air to the windshield, the

air vents and into the footwellr Directs air to the air vents and

into the footwell

Heating/air-conditioning systemX Set air-distribution control for the

heating ?(Y page 98) or air conditioningA(Y page 99) to the correspondingsymbol.

Setting the airflow

Heating/rear-compartment heatingX On vehicles with rear-compartment

heating, make sure that the rear-compartment climate control is activated(Y page 100).

X Set airflow control ; to the desired level(Y page 98), (Y page 99).

102 Climate controlCo

ntro

ls

Air-conditioning system/rear-compartment air conditioningX On vehicles with rear-compartment air

conditioning, make sure that the rear-compartment climate control is activated(Y page 100).

X Press the I button to reduce or theK button to increase the airflow.The blower speeds are shown in bars nextto the buttons.

Defrosting the windows

G WarningClear all windows of ice or snow before settingoff. Otherwise, impaired visibility couldendanger you and others.

Only use the following settings until thewindows are clear again.X Vehicles with window heating: switch on

the front and/or rear window defroster(Y page 95).

HeatingX Set temperature control : and airflow

control ; to z (Y page 98).X Set air-distribution control ? tos z (Y page 98).

X Close the center air vents and the airoutlets for the headroom and the rearcompartment (Y page 101).

X Direct the side air vents towards the sidewindows and open the demister vents forthe side windows (Y page 101).

Air-conditioning systemX Set temperature control : toz (Y page 99).

X Press the K button until the maximumblower output is reached.All bars in the display next to the buttonlight up.

X Set air-distribution control A tos z (Y page 99).

X Close the center air vents and the airoutlets for the headroom and the rearcompartment (Y page 101).

X Direct the side air vents towards the sidewindows and open the demister vents forthe side windows (Y page 101).

Defrosting windows

Windows fogged up on the insideOnly use the following settings until thewindows are clear again.X Vehicles with window heating: switch on

the front and/or rear window defroster(Y page 95).

X Switch off air-recirculation mode(Y page 104).

HeatingX Set temperature control : to a higher

temperature (Y page 98).X Set airflow control ; to a higher blower

setting. It should be set at least to level two(Y page 98).

X Set air-distribution control ? tos z (Y page 98).

If the windows still fog up, set the control asdescribed for defrosting (Y page 103).

Air-conditioning systemX Activate cooling with air dehumidification

(Y page 100).X Press the ¨ button.

The reheat function is switched on. Theindicator lamp in the switch lights up.To switch off the reheat function, press the¨ button again. The indicator lamp inthe button goes out.

Climate control 103

Cont

rols

Z

Windows fogged up on the outsideOnly use the following settings until thewindshield is clear again.X Switch on the windshield wipers

(Y page 94).X Adjust air distribution to the footwell

(Y page 102).X Close the air vents (Y page 101).

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

You can deactivate the intake of fresh air ifunpleasant odors enter the vehicle fromoutside. The air inside the vehicle will only becirculated.

G WarningAt low outside temperatures, only switch overto air-recirculation mode for brief periods.Otherwise, the windows could fog up, thusimpairing visibility and endangering yourselfand others. This may prevent you fromobserving the traffic conditions and therebycause an accident.

Heating/air-conditioning systemX Press the e button.

If the indicator lamp in the button lights up,air-recirculation mode is activated.

Air-recirculation mode switches offautomatically after about 10 to 30 minutes,depending on the outside temperature.

Rear-compartment heating/rear-compartment air conditioningIf your vehicle is equipped with rear-compartment heating and rear-compartmentair conditioning, you can activate/deactivatethe air-recirculation mode of the rear-compartment climate control.X To activate: set temperature control of the

rear-compartment heating =(Y page 99)or or temperature control of the rear-

compartment air conditioning ;(Y page 100) to the center position.Only one of the two climate controlsystems in the rear compartment isactivated and is in air-recirculation mode.

X To deactivate: turn temperature control ofthe rear-compartment heating=(Y page 99) or temperature control ofthe rear-compartment air conditioning ;(Y page 100) clockwise orcounterclockwise. Only change thetemperature in small increments.

Auxiliary heating

Important safety notes

G WarningExhaust fumes are produced while theauxiliary heating system is in operation. If youbreathe in these exhaust fumes, you could bepoisoned. Therefore, always switch off theauxiliary heating in enclosed spaces withoutan extraction system, e.g. a garage.

G WarningParts of the vehicle can become very hotduring operation of the auxiliary heating.Make sure that the exhaust system does notunder any circumstances come into contactwith highly flammable material such as drygrass or fuels. Otherwise, the highlyflammable material could ignite and set thevehicle alight.Auxiliary heating operation is prohibited atgas stations or when your vehicle is beingrefueled. Therefore, the auxiliary heatingmust be switched off at gas stations.

G WarningWhen transporting hazardous materials,always observe the relevant safetyregulations.Spray canisters and gas cartridges or otherpressurized containers carried in the vehicle

104 Climate controlCo

ntro

ls

may be highly flammable and could explode ifheated.In particular, make sure that the containersdescribed above are not placed in the hot airflow from the auxiliary heating system. Do notstow such containers directly next to or on topof the heater.You could otherwise endanger yourself andothers.

The auxiliary heating system operatesindependently of the engine andcomplements the vehicle heating or airconditioning.You can set the auxiliary heating at an outsidetemperature of up to 39 ‡ (4 †) in order to:Rpre-heat the vehicle interiorRadditionally warm the coolant, thereby

conserving the engine and saving fuelRsupport the vehicle's heating system while

the engine is running and outsidetemperatures are low (heater boosterfunction)

i If the outside temperature rises above39 ‡ (4 †), the auxiliary heating and heaterbooster function switch off automatically.

! Switch on the auxiliary heating system atregular intervals (at least once a month) forapproximately 10 minutes.Make sure that the flow of hot air is notblocked. Otherwise, the auxiliary heatingwill overheat and switch off.

i If the interior motion sensor (Y page 62)is armed and the auxiliary heating isswitched on, it is possible that the interiortemperature monitoring may cause a falsealarm. In this case, either deactivate theinterior motion sensor or switch off theauxiliary heating.

Before switching onX The fuel tank must be at least one-quarter

full.X Set the desired temperature using the

temperature control of the heating or theair-conditioning system (Y page 100).

X Set the air distribution as required(Y page 102).

X Open the center and side air vents and setthem to the middle position (Y page 101).

i The auxiliary heating automaticallyswitches to heater booster mode after theengine is started.

Operating using the switch

: To switch the auxiliary heating on/off; To switch the heater booster function on/

off (Y page 107)X To switch on the auxiliary heating: press

the y switch for longer than twoseconds.RThe auxiliary heating heats or ventilates

the interior to the temperature that youhave set.RThe blower switches to the lowest speed.RThe red indicator lamp in the switch

comes on.

Climate control 105

Cont

rols

Z

X To switch off the auxiliary heating: pressthe y switch.

orX Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition

lock.The red indicator lamp in the switch goesout.The auxiliary heating operates for aboutanother two minutes and then switches offautomatically.

Selecting a switch-on timeYou can use the on-board computer to defineup to three switch-on times, one of which canbe selected.

On-board computer without steeringwheel buttonsX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press the y switch.

The y symbol in the display flashes.orX Press the 4 menu button on the

instrument cluster repeatedly until they symbol flashes in the display.

X Use the f or g buttons on the instrumentcluster to select switch-on time 1 to 3The switch-on time selected is displayed.

X Wait 10 seconds for the standard display toappear.The switch-on time is selected. The yellowindicator lamp in the y switch comeson.

If you have not preselected a switch-on timeand --:-- is shown in the display, this meansthat automatic switch-on mode isdeactivated. The yellow indicator lamp in they switch goes out.

i If you turn the key to position 0 in theignition lock, the yellow indicator lamp inthe y switch goes off after 30 minutes.

The red indicator lamp in the y switchcomes on when the auxiliary heatingswitches on.

On-board computer with steering wheelbuttonsX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press the y switch.

The Aux. heating submenu is shown inthe display.The selection marker highlights thepreselected switch-on time, or Timer off,if no switch-on time has been preselected.

i You can also access the Aux. heatingsubmenu via the Settings(Y page 79)menu.

X Use the W or X buttons on thesteering wheel to select the desired switch-on time.Use the Timer off setting to deactivateautomatic switch on.

X Press the V menu button on thesteering wheel.The switch-on time is selected. The yellowindicator lamp in the y switch comeson.

i If you turn the key to position 0 in theignition lock, the yellow indicator lamp inthe y switch goes off after 30 minutes.The red indicator lamp in the y switchcomes on when the auxiliary heatingswitches on.

106 Climate controlCo

ntro

ls

Setting the switch-on time

On-board computer without steeringwheel buttonsX Use the same method to select a switch-on

time as described in the "Preselecting aswitch-on time" section.

X Press the 9 reset button on theinstrument cluster to set the desiredswitch-on time.The hour display flashes.

X Use the f and g buttons on theinstrument cluster to set the hours.

X Press the 9 reset button.The minute display flashes.

X Use the f and g buttons to set theminutes.

On-board computer with steering wheelbuttonsX Use the same method to select a switch-on

time as described in the "Preselecting aswitch-on time" section.

X Press the & menu button on thesteering wheel.The Hours submenu is shown in thedisplay.

X Press the W or X button on thesteering wheel to set the hours.

X Press the & button.The Minutes submenu is shown in thedisplay.

X Press the W or X button to set theminutes.

X Press the V button.The switch-on time is set and selected.

Heater booster functionIf the outside temperature is lower than39 ‡ (4 †), the fuel-operated auxiliaryheating heats the vehicle as quickly aspossible when the engine is running.

The auxiliary heating automatically switchesto heater booster mode after the engine isstarted.

i If the outside temperature rises above39 ‡ (4 †), the auxiliary heating and heaterbooster function switch off automatically.

Vehicles with auxiliary heating

: To switch the auxiliary heating on/off; To switch the heater booster function on/

offX To switch on/off: press the ¢ switch.

The indicator lamp in the switch lights up ifthe heater booster function is switched on.

After switching off, the auxiliary heatingoperates for about another two minutes andthen switches off automatically.If you switch off the engine without switchingoff the heater booster function, the systemwill be switched on the next time the engineis started (memory function).

Climate control 107

Cont

rols

Z

Roof ventilator in the cargocompartmentThe roof ventilator can be used to ventilate orextract air from the cargo compartment.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X To extract air: press upper section : ofthe ´ switch.The roof ventilator removes used air fromthe cargo compartment.

X To ventilate: press lower section ; of the· switch.The roof ventilator feeds fresh air into thecargo compartment.

X To switch off: set the switch to the middleposition.

Driving and parking

Preparing for a journey

Visual check of the vehicle exteriorX In particular, check the following

components on the vehicle, and on thetrailer as necessary:Rlicense plates, vehicle lighting, turn

signals, brake lamps and wiper blades fordirt and damageRtires and wheels for firm seating, correct

tire pressure and general conditionRtrailer tow hitch for play and security

i The towing device is one of the mostimportant components on the vehicle with

regard to road safety. The separateinstructions issued by the manufacturerpertaining to operation, care andmaintenance should be observed.

X Rectify any noticeable defects beforecommencing the journey.

Checks in the vehicle

Emergency equipment/first-aid kitThe equipment for first aid and breakdownassistance is located in the storagecompartment in the driver's/co-driver's doorand behind the driver's seat.X Check the equipment to make sure that it

is accessible, complete and ready for use.

Vehicle lightingX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.X Check the lighting system with the aid of a

second person.X Replace defective bulbs (Y page 234).

Before driving off

G WarningFree movement of the pedals must not beimpaired. This would otherwise jeopardize theoperating and road safety of the vehicle.Objects could get caught between the pedalsif you accelerate or brake suddenly. You willthen be unable to brake, declutch oraccelerate as intended. You could cause anaccident, thereby endangering yourself andothers.RIf you are using floormats and carpets,

make sure that they are properly securedin the driver's footwell so that they do not

108 Driving and parkingCo

ntro

ls

slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not placefloormats on top of one another.RDo not put any objects in the driver's

footwell.RStow and secure all loose objects in such a

way that they cannot get into the driver'sfootwell while the vehicle is in motion.

G WarningIf they are not properly closed, the doorscould open while the vehicle is in motion. Thismay, for example, cause you to lose your loadand injure passengers or endanger other roadusers.For this reason, please make sure that all thedoors are properly closed and can be lockedbefore starting your journey.

X Close all doors.X Secure the load according to the loading

guidelines (Y page 144).X Make sure that the floormats and carpets

are properly secured so that they cannotslip and obstruct the pedals.

Starting the engine

G WarningDo not place any objects in the driver'sfootwell. If you use a floormat or carpet in thedriver's footwell, make sure that it is correctlysecured and that there is sufficient clearancefor the pedals.Do not place several floormats on top of oneanother.Loose objects or the floormats couldotherwise get caught between the pedals ifyou accelerate or brake suddenly. You willthen not be able to brake or accelerate asintended. This could lead to accidents andinjury.

G WarningNever leave the engine running in enclosedspaces. The exhaust gases contain toxic

carbon monoxide. Breathing in exhaust fumesis a health hazard and can lead tounconsciousness or death.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.

i If you depress the brake pedal whenstarting the engine, the pedal travel is shortand the pedal resistance is high.Pedal travel and resistance return tonormal when you depress the brake pedalagain.

X Before starting the engine, make sure that:Rall the doors are closed.Rall the vehicle occupants are wearing

their seat belts correctly.Rthe parking brake is applied.Rthe selector lever is in position P.

i You can also start the engine in neutralN.

Automatic transmission gearshift patternj Park position with selector lever lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

Driving and parking 109

Cont

rols

Z

Starting the engineX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.The % preglow indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X When the % preglow indicator lampgoes out, turn the key to position 3 in theignition lock and release it as soon as theengine is running.

i You can start the engine without preglowwhen the engine is warm.

i Depending on the equipment installed,the vehicle either automatically lockscentrally after switching on the ignition orafter pulling away. The locking knobs in thedoors drop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.Automatic door locking can be deactivated(Y page 55).

Driving off

G WarningDo not downshift for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface. This couldcause the drive wheels to lose their grip andthe vehicle could skid. You could lose controlof the vehicle and cause an accident.

i After pulling away or switching on theignition, the vehicle automatically lockscentrally. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.Automatic door locking can be deactivated(Y page 55).

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.The selector lever lock is released.

X Release the parking brake (Y page 112).The c indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

X Move the selector lever to position D or R.i On vehicles with a reverse warning

feature, a warning signal sounds whenreverse gear is engaged to alert other roadusers.

! Only shift into reverse gear when thevehicle is stationary. You could otherwisedamage the transmission.

X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

General driving tips

Steering

G WarningDo not switch off the engine while the vehicleis in motion.There is no power assistance for the steeringor the service brake when the engine is notrunning.Steering and braking require significantlymore effort and you could lose control of thevehicle and cause an accident as a result.

! Do not hold the steering wheel at fullsteering angle for a long time, e.g. whenturning or maneuvering.The hydraulic pump could be damaged ifthe hydraulic fluid temperature increases.

Overrun cut-offIf you take your foot off the accelerator pedal,the diesel fuel supply is cut off in overrunmode when the engine speed is out of the idlespeed control range.

110 Driving and parkingCo

ntro

ls

Driving in wet conditions

G WarningThere is a danger of hydroplaning occurring,even if you are driving slowly and your tireshave sufficient tread depth, depending on thedepth of water on the road.For this reason, avoid tire ruts and brakecarefully.

Driving on flooded roadsIf you have to drive on stretches of road onwhich water has collected, the water levelmust not rise above the bottom edge of thebumper. The maximum speed at which youmay drive is walking speed.

! Note that vehicles in front or oncomingvehicles create waves. This could meanthat the maximum permitted water depthis exceeded.You must observe these notes. Otherwise,damage may occur to the engine, electricsor transmission.

Driving in winterDrive particularly carefully on slippery roadsin winter. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand braking maneuvers.

G WarningDo not downshift for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface. This couldcause the drive wheels to lose their grip andthe vehicle could skid. You could lose controlof the vehicle and cause an accident.

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed, shift tothe neutral position N. Try to maintain controlof the vehicle using corrective steering

! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmay roll only briefly in the neutral positionN. Prolonged rolling of the wheels, e.g.when being towed, will result intransmission damage.

Road salt may adversely affect brakingperformance. Consequently, you may need todepress the brake pedal more forcefully inorder to achieve normal braking force. Applythe brakes regularly when driving for longerperiods on gritted or salted roads. This willrestore the brakes to their normal level ofperformance.When stopping the vehicle after traveling onroads that have been salted, make sure thatthe brakes are fully functional beforeproceeding further.

i Fit snow chains to the outside rear wheels(driven axle) in good time for driving onsnow, slush or ice. Comply with themanufacturer's fitting instructions.

You will find information about winter tiresand about driving with snow chains in the"Operation" section .

Tire gripWhereas the vehicle can be fully controlled ata certain speed on a dry road surface, youmust reduce your speed on a wet or icysurface to maintain the same degree ofsafety.Pay particular attention to the roadconditions at temperatures around freezingpoint. When ice forms on the road surface(e.g. due to fog), applying the brakes cancause a thin layer of water to form rapidly onthe ice and tire grip will be greatly reduced.Drive with particular care in such weatherconditions.

Stopping the vehicle and switchingoff the engine

G WarningAlways switch off the engine and apply theparking brake before leaving the vehicle.Otherwise, the vehicle could roll away if it isnot secured.

Driving and parking 111

Cont

rols

Z

On gradients steeper than 15%:Rsecure an unladen vehicle at the front axle,

e.g. using a wheel chock or similar object.Radditionally, secure a laden vehicle at the

rear axle, e.g. using a wheel chock or similarobject.

G WarningMake sure that the exhaust system does notunder any circumstances come into contactwith easily ignitable material such as dry grassor gasoline. Do not park the vehicle on drygrassland or harvested grain fields.Otherwise, the flammable material may igniteand set the vehicle on fire.

G WarningOnly remove the key from the ignition lockwhen the vehicle is stationary, since youcannot steer the vehicle with the keyremoved.Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle. They could release the parking brake.This could lead to a serious or fatal accident.

! When the vehicle is parked, alwaysremove the key to prevent the battery frombecoming discharged.On vehicles with a battery isolating switch,switch off the power supply if the vehicle isto be out of use for a longer period of time.

G WarningYou must use the parking lamps to enableyour vehicle to be recognized on public roadswhen it is dark. You can also use reflectivenight parking signs in built-up areas.Observe legal requirements.

X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the automatic transmission to

position P.X Apply the parking brake.

i On steep slopes, turn the front wheelstowards the curb.

! If the coolant temperature is very high,e.g. after driving on mountain roads, leavethe engine running at idle speed for abouttwo minutes before turning it off.This allows the coolant temperature toreturn to normal.

X To switch off the engine: turn the key toposition 0 in the ignition lock and removeit.The immobilizer is activated.

X Switch on the parking lamps if necessary.X On uphill or downhill gradients, secure the

vehicle additionally against rolling away atthe axle with the heaviest load, e.g. by usinga wheel chock or similar object.Use the wheel chock (Y page 183) for thispurpose.

Brakes

Parking brake

G WarningNever leave children unsupervised in thevehicle. They could release the parking brake.This could lead to a serious or fatal accident.

i Only apply the parking brake when thevehicle is stationary.

112 BrakesCo

ntro

ls

Applying the parking brakeX Pull brake lever : up as far as the last

possible detent.The c indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

i On vehicles with a folding brake lever, youcan then press lever : down to the stop.

Releasing the parking brakei On vehicles with a folding brake lever, you

must first pull brake lever : up to the stop.X Raise brake lever : slightly and press

release knob ;.X Guide brake lever : down to the stop.

The c indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Emergency brakingAs a rule, you may only apply the parkingbrake when the vehicle is stationary.In exceptional cases, the parking brake canbe used for emergency braking if the servicebrake fails.X Keep release knob ; pressed and

carefully apply brake lever :.

G WarningIf the brake lever is applied abruptly, the rearwheels could lock. The vehicle could then gointo a skid.Make sure that you apply the brake levercarefully to ensure that braking application ismoderated.

Automatic transmission

OverviewThe automatic transmission adapts to yourindividual driving style by continuouslyadjusting its shift points. These shift pointadjustments take into account the currentoperating and driving conditions. If the

operating or driving conditions change, theautomatic transmission reacts by adjustingthe gearshift program.

The automatic transmission selects theindividual gears automatically. This dependson:Rthe selector lever position D with shift

ranges 4, 3, 2 and 1(Y page 115)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speedThe selector lever position or the current shiftrange is shown in the display. Display onvehicles with steering wheel buttons(Y page 77) and without steering wheelbuttons (Y page 73).When the selector lever is in position D, youcan influence the gearshifts made by theautomatic transmission. You can restrict theshift range or you can perform gearshiftsyourself.

Automatic transmission 113

Cont

rols

Z

Selector lever positions

B Park positionThis prevents the vehicle fromrolling away when stopped. Onlymove the selector lever to P whenthe vehicle is stationary.You can only remove the key whenthe selector lever is in position P.The selector lever is locked inposition P when the key isremoved.

C Reverse gearOnly move the selector lever to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. bypushing or towing.Do not move the selector lever toN while driving. The automatictransmission could otherwise bedamaged.If ASR is deactivated or ESP® hasmalfunctioned: only move theselector lever to N if the vehicle isin danger of skidding, e.g. on icyroads.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. All fiveforward gears are available.

TouchshiftWhen the selector lever is in position D, youcan perform gearshifts yourself.X To shift down: press the selector lever to

the left towards D–.The automatic transmission shifts to thenext gear down, depending on the gear

currently engaged. This will also restrict theshift range.

G WarningDo not change down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface. This couldcause the drive wheels to lose their grip andthe vehicle could skid.

i The automatic transmission does not shiftdown if you press the selector levertowards D– while traveling at too high aspeed. The engine could otherwise overrev.

X To shift up: briefly press the selector leverto the right towards D+.The automatic transmission shifts to thenext gear up, depending on the currentgearshift program. This also extends theshift range.

X To derestrict the shift range: press andhold the selector lever towards D+ until Dis shown once more in the display.The automatic transmission shifts from thecurrent shift range directly to D.

X To select the optimum shift range: pressand hold the selector lever to the lefttowards D–.The automatic transmission will shift to arange which allows easy acceleration anddeceleration. To do this, the automatictransmission will shift down one or moregears.

Shift rangesWhen the selector lever is in position D youcan restrict or derestrict the shift range forthe automatic transmission.X Press the selector lever briefly to the right

towards D+ or left towards D–.The set shift range is shown in the display.

i If the maximum engine speed for the shiftrange is reached and you depress theaccelerator pedal, the automatic

114 Automatic transmissionCo

ntro

ls

transmission will not shift up if the shiftrange is restricted.

7 The automatic transmission shiftsthrough all five gears.

? The automatic transmission shiftsonly as far as fourth gear.

= The automatic transmission shiftsonly as far as third gear.This position allows you to use thebraking effect of the engine.

5 The automatic transmission shiftsonly as far as second gear.This position is for journeys inarduous conditions, inmountainous terrain or on steepmountain roads. You can use theengine's braking effect on downhillgradients.

4 The automatic transmission onlyworks in first gear.The braking effect of the engine canbe utilized on extremely steepdownhill gradients and longdownhill stretches.

Driving tips

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how theautomatic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRlots of throttle: later upshifts

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration:X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to thenext gear down, depending on the enginespeed.

X Ease off on the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts up again.

StoppingIf you only need to stop briefly:X Leave the selector lever in the drive

position.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away

using the brake pedal.

ManeuveringManeuvering in a tight space:X Control the vehicle's speed by braking

carefully.X Accelerate only slightly and avoid jolting.

i For rapid maneuvering (e.g. to rock thevehicle out of snow or slush), you can shiftback and forth between drive position Dand reverse gear R at low speeds withoutapplying the brakes.

Towing a trailerX Run the engine in the moderate engine

speed range on steep uphill gradients.X Depending on the uphill or downhill

gradient, shift down to shift range 3 or2(Y page 115), even if cruise control isswitched on.

Working on the vehicle

G WarningApply the parking brake and move theselector lever to P when working on the

Automatic transmission 115

Cont

rols

Z

vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle could rollaway.

Driving the vehicle

Exhaust gas aftertreatmentThe exhaust gas aftertreatment requires areducing agent, Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF), inorder to function correctly. Filling up the DEFtank is usually part of the service scope. DEFconsumption depends on operational anddriving conditions; the supply does not haveto suffice until the next scheduled service. Forthis reason, refill the DEF tank regularlyduring vehicle operation, or, at the latest,after the first warning message has beenreceived from the on-board computer.To conform with emission regulations, youmust operate the vehicle with DEF and refillthe supply regularly. If you try to operate thevehicle without DEF, with diluted DEF, or witha different reduction agent, the enginemanagement detects this and issues awarning message, after which the enginecannot be restarted.If the DEF supply drops below1.5 US gal (5.5 l), you receive the first warningmessage and you hear a warning tone. Afterthe first message appears, the remaining DEFsupply suffices for approximately 1000 miles(1600 km) in normal driving conditions.Then, the reserve range of 0.8 US gal (3.0 l)is reached. Once the reserve range has beenreached, you receive the next warningmessage and you hear a series of warningtones. After the first message appears, theDEF reserve suffices for approximately1200 miles (1900 km). You can, however,only start the engine another 16 times.You should now, at the latest, fill up with atleast 2.0 US gal (7.6 l) of DEF (Y page 143)or have the DEF tank filled at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

When the number of remaining engine startsis 0, the engine management prevents theengine from being started.If the ; check engine indicator lamp lightsup, the exhaust gas aftertreatment is faulty oran emission-relevant malfunction hasoccurred (Y page 195). You can then drive amaximum of 50 miles (80 km) before theengine management limits the number ofremaining engine starts.If the exhaust gas aftertreatment is faulty,have it checked and repaired at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. We recommend that youuse an authorized Sprinter Dealer for thispurpose.You will find further information on DEF in the"Service products" section (Y page 155).

Level indicatorYou will find further information about DEFconsumption in the "Driving tips" section(Y page 140).

Vehicles without steering wheel buttonsIf the DEF supply is less than1.5 US gal (5.5 l), the å indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster lights up and the¯dEF Chk message appears in thedisplay.If the DEF supply drops below the reservelevel of 0.8 US gal (3.0 l), the å indicatorlamp in the instrument cluster lights up andthe ̄ StArtS RE xx message is shown inthe display. xx refers to the number ofremaining engine starts (from 16 to 0).

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsIf the DEF supply is less than1.5 US gal (5.5 l), the Check Diesel Exhaust Fluid See Operator's Manualmessage appears in the display.If the DEF supply drops below the reservelevel of 0.8 US gal (3.0 l), the åxx starts remaining message appears in thedisplay. xx refers to the number of remainingengine starts (from 16 to 0).

116 Driving the vehicleCo

ntro

ls

ADR (working speed governor)When activated, the working speed governor(ADR) automatically increases the enginespeed to a preset or adjustable speed(Y page 117).

i After a cold start, the idling speed of theengine is increased automatically. If thepreset working speed is lower than theincreased idling speed, the working speedis only reached once the engine hascompleted the warm-up phase.It is only possible to activate ADR with thevehicle stationary and the parking brakeapplied.The selector lever must be in position P.

Activating/deactivating ADR

X To activate: press upper section : of theE switch while the engine is running.The indicator lamp in the switch comes on.Vehicles without steering wheel buttons:The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.Vehicles with steering wheel buttons:The Operating speed governor active message appears in the display.

X To deactivate: press lower section ; ofthe E switch while the engine isrunning.The indicator lamp in the switch goes out.

i ADR is automatically deactivated when:Ryou release the parking brake.Rthe brake pedal is depressed.Rthe vehicle moves.Rthe control unit detects a malfunction.

Setting the working speed

X Activate ADR (Y page 117).X To increase: press upper section : of theE switch.

X To decrease: press lower section ; of theF switch.

i On vehicles with cruise control, you canuse the cruise control lever to increase ordecrease the engine speed in the same wayas for the road speed. Set the speed usingthe cruise control lever (Y page 119).

i After a cold start, the idling speed of theengine is increased automatically.You can only reduce the working speed tothe level of the current idling speed.

Driving systems

OverviewThe following pages describe driving systemsthat may be a component in your vehicle:RCruise control (Y page 118) which you can

use to control the speed of your vehicleRPARKTRONIC (Y page 119) and the rear

view camera (Y page 122) which assist youwith parking and maneuvering

Driving systems 117

Cont

rols

Z

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains the speed of thevehicle for you.Use cruise control if road and trafficconditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canset any speed from 20 mph upwards inincrements of 1 mph.

i If you have set km/h as the unit for thedigital speedometer , you can set any speedfrom 30 km/h upwards in increments of1 km/h.

G WarningCruise control is unable to take account ofroad and traffic conditions.Always pay attention to the traffic conditions,even when cruise control is activated.Cruise control is only an aid designed to assistdriving. You are always responsible for thevehicle's speed and for braking in good time.If there is a change of drivers, make sure thatyou inform the new driver about the set cruisespeed. Otherwise, sudden acceleration orbraking could endanger you or others.

G WarningDo not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do not

allow you to maintain a constant speed (e.g.heavy traffic or winding roads). You couldotherwise cause an accident.Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerating

could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skid.Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,

heavy rain or snow

i Cruise control may not be able tomaintain the stored speed on uphill ordownhill gradients. The stored speed isresumed if the gradient evens out and thevehicle's speed does not fall below 20 mph(30 km/h).

Cruise control leverThe cruise control lever is the uppermostlever on the left of the steering column.

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To resume the last speed stored= To store the current speed or a lower

speed? To deactivate cruise control

Storing the current speedX Accelerate/decelerate the vehicle to the

speed desired above 20 mph (30 km/h).X Briefly push the cruise control lever up :

or down =.X Release the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control is activated. The currentspeed is stored.

You cannot activate cruise control if:Ryou are driving slower than 20 mph

(30 km/h).Ryou depress the brake pedal.Ryou apply the parking brake and the c

indicator lamp in the instrument clusterlights up.

i Other drive and brake systems notdescribed in this Operator's Manual, suchas a retarder, may affect cruise control. Youcan find information on this in the separateoperating instructions provided by thebody manufacturer.

118 Driving systemsCo

ntro

ls

Resuming the stored speed

G WarningOnly select a stored speed if you know whatthat speed is and whether it is suitable for thecurrent driving and traffic situation. You canotherwise endanger yourself and others byunintentionally triggering suddenacceleration or braking.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrow ;.

X Release the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated and resumes thevehicle's speed to the last speed stored.

i When you first move the cruise controllever in the direction of arrow ; afterstarting the engine, cruise control isactivated and the current road speed isstored.

Setting the speed

G WarningThe rate at which you increase the speed inincrements of 1 mph (1 km/h) may be fasterthan your vehicle is able to accelerate. Yourvehicle may then continue to accelerate up tothe newly set speed even after you havereleased the cruise control lever.Only increase the speed as the prevailingconditions permit. Sudden acceleration couldotherwise endanger you and others.

X Briefly push the cruise control leverupwards : to increase the speed ordownwards = to reduce the speed.The last speed stored is increased/reduced in increments of 1 mph (1 km/h).

orX Press and hold the cruise control lever

up : or down = until the desired speedhas been reached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The current speed is stored.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If youaccelerate briefly, e.g. to overtake, andthen ease off the accelerator pedal again,cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speedto the last speed stored.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are various ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly push the cruise control lever

forwards ?.

orX Apply the brakes.The last speed set remains stored.

i The last speed set is deleted when youswitch off the engine.

i Cruise control is deactivatedautomatically when:Ryou apply the brakes.Ryou apply the parking brake and thec indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.Ryou are driving slower than 20 mph

(30 km/h).RESP® or ASR intervenes.Ryou shift the automatic transmission to

neutral position N while the vehicle is inmotion.Rthere is a malfunction in the ESP®, ASR

or ABS system.

PARKTRONIC

General notes

G WarningPARKTRONIC is only an aid and may notdetect all obstacles. It is not a substitute forattentive driving.You are always responsible for safety andmust continue to pay attention to your

Driving systems 119

Cont

rols

Z

immediate surroundings when parking andmaneuvering. You could otherwise endangeryourself and others.

G WarningMake sure that no persons or animals are inthe maneuvering range. Otherwise, theycould be injured.

PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid.PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audiblythe distance between your vehicle and anobject.Your vehicle features two sound emitters withdifferent frequencies for the warning tones.The warning ranges in front of and behind thevehicle are indicated by different warningtones.PARKTRONIC is automatically activated whenthe key is turned to position 2 in the ignitionlock, the parking brake is released and theselector lever is moved to position D, N or R.PARKTRONIC is deactivated automatically atspeeds above 11 mph (18 km/h).PARKTRONIC is reactivated automatically atspeeds below 10 mph (16 km/h).PARKTRONIC monitors the area around yourvehicle with sensors in the front and rearbumpers.

Range of the sensorsThe sensors must be free of dirt, ice andslush; otherwise, they may not functioncorrectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 163).

Front sensors

Center Approximately 39 in(100 cm)

Corners Approximately 26 in(65 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approximately 71 in(180 cm)

Corners Approximately 39 in(100 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approximately 12 in(30 cm)

Front cornersensors

Approximately 10 in(25 cm)

Rear corner sensors Approximately 12 in(30 cm)

120 Driving systemsCo

ntro

ls

If an obstacle is within this range, allsegments of the warning displays light up andyou hear a warning tone. If the distancebetween the vehicle and the obstacle fallsbelow the minimum range, it is possible thatthe distance may no longer be displayed.

! Pay particular attention to obstaclesabove or below the sensors when parking,such as flower pots or trailer towbars.PARKTRONIC does not recognize suchobjects when they are in the immediatevicinity of the vehicle. You could damagethe vehicle or objects.PARKTRONIC can suffer interference from:Rultrasonic sources such as a lorry's

compressed-air brakes, an automatic carwash or a pneumatic drillRattachments to the vehicle, e.g. rear

mounted racksRnumber plates (vehicle license plates)

that are not affixed flat against thebumperRdirty or icy sensors

Warning displaysThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensor and the obstacle.

Warning display, front area: Left-hand side of vehicle; Right-hand side of vehicle= Segments

Warning display for the left-hand rear area in theleft-hand exterior mirror? Warning display segmentsA Readiness indicator segment

The warning display is divided into five yellowand two red segments for each side of thevehicle. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellowindicator segments = and A light up.There is a malfunction if only the redsegments of the warning display light up(Y page 215).The position of the selector lever determineswhether the front and/or rear area ismonitored.

Selector lever position

Monitoring

D Front area

R or N Front and rear area

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment, an intermittent warning

tone sounds for approximatelytwo seconds.Rseventh segment, a continuous warning

tone sounds. You have reached theminimum distance.

Driving systems 121

Cont

rols

Z

Roll-back warningPARKTRONIC automatically monitors thearea behind the vehicle if the vehicle beginsto roll backwards without reverse gearengaged, e.g. after stopping on an uphillgradient.If PARKTRONIC recognizes an obstacle at adistance of at most 31 in (80 cm), all thesegments in the warning display light up. Acontinuous warning tone also sounds as thevehicle approaches the obstacle and for afurther two seconds after the vehicle hascome to a halt.

Activating/deactivating PARKTRONICYou can activate/deactivate PARKTRONICmanually.

X Press button :.If PARKTRONIC is deactivated, theindicator lamp in the switch lights up.

Towing a trailerIf your vehicle is equipped with the electricwiring required for towing a trailer and youattach a trailer, PARKTRONIC is deactivatedfor the rear area as soon as you haveestablished an electrical connection betweenyour vehicle and the trailer. If you use anadapter for the socket, remove it from thesocket after detaching the trailer. Otherwise,PARKTRONIC remains deactivated for therear area.If the trailer coupling is detachable, remove itwhen it is no longer required. PARKTRONIC

measures the minimum detection range to anobstacle from the bumper, not the ballcoupling.

Rear view cameraThe rear view camera is a visual parking aid.It shows you the area behind the vehicle on aseparate monitor on the center console.The rear view camera is activated when youengage reverse gear.The camera is in the middle of the roof abovethe high-mounted brake lamp (Y page 163).

: Monitor for rear view camera

G WarningThe rear-view camera is only a driving aid andmay display obstacles as foreshortened,incorrectly or not at all. It cannot replace yourattentiveness.The rear-view camera cannot display allobjects located very near and/or under therear bumper. It does not warn you of acollision, persons or objects.You are responsible for safety at all times andmust continue to pay attention to yourimmediate surroundings during parking andmaneuvering. This applies not only to the areabehind, but also to the area in front of andbeside your vehicle.You may otherwise not recognize people orobjects, if any, and by driving onwards, injurepeople or damage objects and the vehicle. Werecommend also using PARKTRONIC at alltimes during parking.

122 Driving systemsCo

ntro

ls

G WarningMake sure that no persons or animals are inthe maneuvering range. Otherwise, theycould be injured.

G Warning!The rear-view camera could either stopfunctioning or function incorrectly if:Rit is raining very heavily or snowing, or it is

foggy.Rthe parking space is located in a very dark

place.Rthe camera is exposed to very strong white

light. White stripes may appear on thedisplay.Rthe surrounding area is illuminated with

fluorescent light. The display may flicker.Rthere is a rapid change in temperature, e.g.

if you drive out of the cold during winter intoa heated garage.Rambient temperatures are very high.Rthe camera lens is dirty or obstructed.Rthe rear of the vehicle is damaged. In this

case, have the position and setting checkedat a qualified specialist workshop that hasthe necessary specialist knowledge andtools to carry out the work required. For thisreason, we recommend an authorizedSprinter Dealer.

You will find information about cleaning thecamera in the "Operation" section(Y page 163).

Switching on the rear view cameraX Make sure that the ignition is switched on.X Engage reverse gear.

The rear view camera is switched on.

Using the monitor

Monitor buttons: : Down button; 9 Up button= t Menu/Confirm button? u Monitor on/off switchA Speaker cover

Switching on the monitorYou can switch on the monitor by:Rengaging reverse gear

The rear view camera is activated. This thenswitches the monitor on.Rpressing the u button

The input for auxiliary equipment (AUX) onthe monitor is activated.

i If you have switched the monitor off usingthe u button, you must pressthe u button after engaging reversegear. Only then is the monitor switched on.

Input for auxiliary equipment (AUX)

If you engage reverse gear while usingauxiliary equipment, the monitor switches tothe rear view camera.When you disengage reverse gear, themonitor continues to show the picture from

Driving systems 123

Cont

rols

Z

the rear view camera for around 15 secondsbefore switching back to the auxiliary deviceinput (AUX).

Switching off the monitorIf the monitor was switched on by engagingreverse gear, it switches off automatically15 seconds after you disengage reverse gear.You can switch off the monitor by pressingthe u button. In this case, the followingmessage is shown for seven seconds beforeit switches off.

Menu system

Setting the volumeX Press the : or 9 button.

The volume of the integrated loudspeakeris adjusted in increments.

i The volume of the optional infraredheadphones is adjusted on theheadphones themselves.

X Press the t button to exit the volumeadjustment.

i If you do not press a button for sevenseconds, the monitor switches off thevolume adjustment.

Selecting the main menuX Press the t button.

The menu selection for the main menu(menu level 1) is displayed.

X Press the : or 9 button until themenu you want is highlighted.

X Press the t button.The menu is selected.

You can select the following menus:RDisplay (Y page 125)RPicture format (Y page 126)RStandard (Y page 127)RMenu language (Y page 127)RFactory setting (Y page 128)RBack S(Y page 124)

Skipping back a menu

X Press the : or 9 button until the S symbol is highlighted.

X Press the t button.The higher-level menu is displayed.

124 Driving systemsCo

ntro

ls

Display menuYou can customize the monitor display in theDisplay menu.You can select the following submenus:RLighting (Y page 125)RBrightness (Y page 125)RContrast (Y page 125)RColor (Y page 126)RTintRBack S(Y page 124)

Lighting submenuYou can adjust the background illuminationof the monitor in the Lighting submenu.X Press the t button.

The main menu (menu level 1) is displayed(Y page 124).

X Press the : or 9 button until theDisplay menu is highlighted.The Display menu is selected.

X Press the t button.The submenus (menu level 2) aredisplayed.

X Press the : or 9 button until theLighting submenu is highlighted.

X Press the t button.The lighting setting is displayed.

X Press the : or 9 button.The background lighting is adjusted inincrements.

X Press the t button.The submenus (menu level 2) aredisplayed.

i If you do not press a button for sevenseconds, the menu is automatically closed.

Brightness submenuYou can adjust the brightness of the monitorin the Brightness submenu.X Press the t button.

The main menu (menu level 1) is displayed(Y page 124).

X Press the : or 9 button until theDisplay menu is highlighted.The Display menu is selected.

X Press the t button.The submenus (menu level 2) aredisplayed.

X Press the : or 9 button until theBrightness submenu is highlighted.

X Press the t button.The brightness setting is displayed.

X Press the : or 9 button.The brightness is adjusted in increments.

X Press the t button.The submenus (menu level 2) aredisplayed.

Contrast submenuYou can adjust the picture contrast of themonitor in the Contrast submenu.

Driving systems 125

Cont

rols

Z

X Press the t button.The main menu (menu level 1) is displayed(Y page 124).

X Press the : or 9 button until theDisplay menu is highlighted.The Display menu is selected.

X Press the t button.The submenus (menu level 2) aredisplayed.

X Press the : or 9 button until theContrast submenu is highlighted.

X Press the t button.The contrast setting is displayed.

X Press the : or 9 button.The contrast is adjusted in increments.

X Press the t button.The submenus (menu level 2) aredisplayed.

Color submenuYou can adjust the color setting of themonitor in the Color submenu.X Press the t button.

The main menu (menu level 1) is displayed(Y page 124).

X Press the : or 9 button until theDisplay menu is highlighted.The Display menu is selected.

X Press the t button.The submenus (menu level 2) aredisplayed.

X Press the : or 9 button until theColor submenu is highlighted.

X Press the t button.The color setting is displayed.

X Press the : or 9 button.The contrast is adjusted in increments.

X Press the t button.The submenus (menu level 2) aredisplayed.

Tint submenu (NTSC color balance)In the NTSC standard you can adjust the colorbalance of the monitor in the TINT submenu.X Press the t button.

The main menu (menu level 1) is displayed(Y page 124).

X Press the : or 9 button until theDisplay menu is highlighted.The Display menu is selected.

X Press the t button.The submenus (menu level 2) aredisplayed.

X Press the : or 9 button until theTINT submenu is highlighted.

X Press the t button.The color balance setting is displayed.

X Press the : or 9 button.The color balance is adjusted inincrements.

X Press the t button.The submenus (menu level 2) aredisplayed.

Picture format menuYou can set the display format for the monitorin the Picture format menu.X Press the t button.

The main menu (menu level 1) is displayed(Y page 124).

X Press the : or 9 button until thePicture format menu is highlighted.

X Press the t button.The submenu (menu level 2) is displayed.

i The current picture format is marked withthe M symbol.

126 Driving systemsCo

ntro

ls

X Press the : or 9 button until theformat you want is highlighted.

X Press the t button.Your selected format is activated.

i The 16:9 format fills the entire monitorscreen. The rear view camera generates a16:9 format. Regular video signals usuallyrequire the 4:3 format.

i If you select S and press the tbutton, the monitor goes back to the mainmenu (menu level 1).

Standard menuYou can set the video standard for themonitor in the Standard menu.X Press the t button.

The main menu (menu level 1) is displayed(Y page 124).

X Press the : or 9 button until theStandard menu is highlighted.

X Press the t button.The submenu (menu level 2) is displayed.

i The current standard is marked with the M symbol.

X Press the : or 9 button until therequired standard is highlighted.

X Press the t button.The selected standard is activated.

i The video signal from the rear viewcamera uses the NTSC standard. Normalvideo signals generally use the PALstandard.

i If you select S and press the tbutton, the monitor goes back to the mainmenu (menu level 1).

Menu language menuYou can set the language for the monitormenus in the Menu language menu.X Press the t button.

The main menu (menu level 1) is displayed(Y page 124).

X Press the : or 9 button until theMenu language menu is highlighted.

X Press the t button.The submenu (menu level 2) is displayed.

i The current language is marked with the M symbol.

X Press the : or 9 button until thelanguage you want is highlighted.

X Press the t button.The selected language is activated.

i If you select S and press the tbutton, the monitor goes back to the mainmenu (menu level 1).

Driving systems 127

Cont

rols

Z

Factory setting menuYou can reset the monitor to the factorysettings in the Factory setting menu.X Press the t button.

The main menu (menu level 1) is displayed(Y page 124).

X Press the : or 9 button until theFactory setting menu is highlighted.

X Press the t button.The monitor displays the followingmessage:

X Press the : or 9 button until therequired setting is highlighted.RYes: all settings are overwritten with the

factory settings.RS: return to the main menu without

accepting the factory settings.

i If you select S and press the tbutton, the monitor goes back to the mainmenu (menu level 1).

Switching off the monitor while drivingIf you drive faster than 6 mph (10 km/h), themonitor switches off for safety reasons.You will see the following message for sevenseconds until the monitor switches off.

If the speed falls below 5 mph (8 km/h), themonitor switches on again.

Features

Ashtray

Ashtray insert in the ashtray compartment in thecenter consoleX Pull ashtray compartment : out by

recess ;.X To open: fold cover = upwards.X To remove the insert: hold the ashtray by

the recesses on the left and right and pullthe insert out to empty it.

X To replace the insert: press it down intothe holder.

128 FeaturesCo

ntro

ls

Ashtrays in the passengercompartment

Ashtrays on the left and right in the side trim panelsX To open: fold out the ashtray.X To remove the insert: press retaining

clip : down and remove the ashtray fromthe trim.

X To replace the insert: insert the ashtraydown into the trim and close it.

Cigarette lighter

G WarningOnly hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob.Otherwise, you might burn yourself.Make sure that children traveling in thevehicle are not able to injure themselves onthe hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with it.

Ashtray compartment in the center console

X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

X Press in cigarette lighter :.The cigarette lighter will pop outautomatically when the heating element isred-hot.

G WarningDo not press the cigarette lighter in tooforcefully. The ashtray compartment couldclose and your fingers could become trapped.

Stowage spaces and stowagecompartments

G WarningYou should only load the stowage spaces insuch a way that the occupants cannot beinjured by objects being thrown around thepassenger compartment in the event of anaccident, braking or sudden change indirection.Therefore, do not carry heavy, bulky, pointedor sharp-edged objects in the stowage spacesor stowage compartments.

Dashboard stowage compartment

Example, right-hand side

G WarningDo not store objects in the stowage spaceabove the co-driver's air bag if they protrudeout of the stowage space. This ensures thatthe co-driver's air bag can inflate fully.

Features 129

Cont

rols

Z

! The right and left storage spaces may beloaded with a maximum of 11 lbs (5 kg)each.

Stowage compartment above thewindshield

Example, left-hand side: Stowage compartment

! The right and left storage spaces may beloaded with a maximum of 5.5 lbs (2.5 kg)each.

Stowage space above the headliner

On vehicles with a partition, stowagespace : can be loaded from the cargocompartment.

! The entire storage space may be loadedwith a maximum of 66 lbs (30 kg).Do not place high, bulky loads in thestowage space. You could otherwisedamage the headliner in the event of sharpbraking.

Stowage compartment in the centerconsole

Stowage compartment with lid above the centerconsoleX To open: pull release handle ;.

Lid : swings up.X To close: close lid : and engage it.

The lid of the stowage compartment mustremain closed while the vehicle is in motionto ensure that stowed objects are containedsafely.

Stowage compartment in the doorYou can use these stowage compartments tostore small, light items.

Stowage compartment under the twinco-driver's seatOn vehicles with a twin co-driver's seat, thestowage compartment is under the seatcushion (Y page 65).You can use the stowage compartment tosafely store tools and other small parts.

130 FeaturesCo

ntro

ls

Glove box

1 Locked2 Unlocked= Glove box handle

i You can lock and unlock the glove boxusing the vehicle key.

X To open: pull glove box handle = in thedirection of the arrow.

? Card holderA Pen holderX To close: fold the cover up and press it until

it engages.

Eyeglasses compartment in theoverhead control panel

X To open: press cover : of the eyeglassescompartment.The eyeglasses compartment folds out.

X To close: press cover : of the eyeglassescompartment into the overhead controlpanel until it engages.

Paper holder

X Press the top of paper holder :.

Features 131

Cont

rols

Z

Folding table

X Pull folding table : forwards by the tab.X Fold folding table : down in the direction

of the arrow and onto the seat cushion.i The folding table is equipped with a pen

holder and cup holders.

Cup holder! Do not use the cup holder recesses as

ashtrays. You could otherwise damage thecup holders.

Cup holders in the front

G WarningDo not leave loose objects in the cup holderwhile the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, theloose objects could injure you or otherpassengers in the event of:Ran accidentRbrakingRa sudden change of directionOnly use drinks containers that can be sealedand that are of the correct size. The drinkscould otherwise spill.Cup holders should not be used for hot drinks.Otherwise, you may scald yourself.

Cup holder (example: right-hand side of vehicle): Cup holder in the dashboard stowage

compartment

Cup holder (example: right-hand side of vehicle); Bottle holder in the front door

Cup holder in the center consoleX Pull cup holder compartment = out by

recess ?.Cup holder A opens fully.

i You can adjust the diameter of the cupholder.

132 FeaturesCo

ntro

ls

X Place the beverage container in cupholder A.

X Push clamping arm B against thecontainer.

Cup holders in the rear

X Pull out cup holder :.

G WarningSlide the cup holders back under the seatsbefore leaving the vehicle. You and otherscould otherwise injure yourselves on theprotruding cup holders.

SocketThe 12 V sockets for accessories areRat the bottom of the center console

(12 V, 25 A)Ron the inside of the driver's seat frame

(12 V, 15 A)Rin the corner lining next to the rear doors

in the passenger compartment(12 V, 15 A)Rin the cargo compartment next to the left

rear door (12 V, 15 A)

Socket on the lower section of the center console: 12 V socket, 25 A

You can use the 12 V sockets (15 A) foraccessories with a maximum powerconsumption of 180 W. You can connectaccessories with a maximum powerconsumption of 300 W to the 12 V socket(25 A) on the lower section of the centerconsole.

! Only use the 12 V socket (25 A) on thecenter console for connecting the electricair pump (premium tire sealant). You mayotherwise damage the electrical systems ofthe vehicle.

i The sockets are supplied with power evenwhen the key is removed from the ignitionlock. Please be aware that the battery maybecome discharged if accessories, e.g. acoolbox, remain connected while theengine is not running.

Communications

Electronic communicationsequipment

G WarningAlways pay attention to road and trafficconditions.Only operate electronic equipment when roadand traffic conditions permit. Bear in mindthat at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately50 km/h), your vehicle covers about 44 ft(approximately 14 m) every second.

Communications 133

Cont

rols

Z

A navigation system does not supplyinformation on the load-bearing capacity ofbridges or the overhead clearance ofunderpasses.The driver remains responsible for the safetyof the vehicle at all times.Observe legal requirements.Telephones, two-way radios and fax machineswithout an exterior antenna could interferewith the vehicle electronics and thuscompromise the operational safety of thevehicle. There is an increased risk of accident.Do not use this equipment while the vehicleis in motion.

Failure to observe the Sprinter installationspecifications can result in the invalidation ofyour vehicle's operating permit.You will find information on retrofittingelectrical or electronic equipment in the"Technical data" section (Y page 277).

Telephone

G WarningA driver's attention to the road must alwaysbe his/her primary focus when driving. Foryour safety and the safety of others, werecommend that you pull over to a safelocation and stop before placing or taking atelephone call. If you choose to use thetelephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone whenweather, road and traffic conditions permit.Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h ), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

G WarningExcessive electromagnetic radiation mayconstitute a health hazard to yourself andothers. Use of an exterior antenna gives

consideration to scientific discussionsurrounding the possible health risk posed byelectromagnetic fields.The exterior antenna should only be installedat a qualified specialist workshop which hasthe necessary specialist knowledge and toolsto carry out the work required. Werecommend that you use an authorizedSprinter Dealer for this purpose. In particular,work relevant to safety or on safety-relatedsystems must be carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

We recommend the use of an approvedexterior antenna for operating the mobilephone. Only in this way can optimal mobilephone reception quality in the vehicle beensured and mutual interference between thevehicle electronics and mobile phonesminimized.Observe the legal requirements for eachindividual country.The mobile phone fitting includes a hands-free system integrated into the vehicle. Themicrophone for the hands-free system isinstalled in the overhead control panel or inthe overhead stowage compartment togetherwith the front interior light.In order to use the hands-free system, you willneed a special bracket. The Sprinter range ofaccessories includes brackets for variousmobile phone models.

i Mobile phone brackets which areavailable from various manufacturers onthe open market are not compatible withthe Sprinter telephone system. You canrecognize suitable phone brackets for yourmobile, by the printed star and the B6 in thepart number on the rear of the phonebracket.

Detailed instructions for use can be found inthe operating instructions for the mobilephone bracket and in the separate operatinginstructions for the mobile phone fittings.

i The mobile phone battery is chargeddepending on the condition of charge

134 CommunicationsCo

ntro

ls

status and the position of the key in theignition lock. The mobile phone displayindicates the charging status.

Communications 135

Cont

rols

Z

136

Vehicle equipment ............................ 138Driving tips ........................................ 138Refueling ............................................ 142Transporting loads with the vehicle 144Operation in winter ........................... 153Service products ............................... 153Cleaning and care ............................. 161Maintenance ...................................... 166

137

Oper

atio

n

Vehicle equipment

i Diese Betriebsanleitung beschreibt alleModelle, Serien- und SonderausstattungenIhres Fahrzeugs, die zum Zeitpunkt desRedaktionsschlusses dieserBetriebsanleitung erhältlich waren.Länderspezifische Abweichungen sindmöglich. Beachten Sie, dass Ihr Fahrzeugnicht mit allen beschriebenen Funktionenausgestattet sein könnte. Dies betrifft auchsicherheitsrelevante Systeme undFunktionen.

Driving tips

Breaking-inIt is of decisive importance for the operatinglife, reliability and economy of the vehicle thatthe engine is not subjected to its full ratedload during the breaking-in period.Up to 1000 miles (1500 km)RRun the vehicle in carefully. Drive at varying

road and engine speeds.RAvoid heavy loads (driving at full throttle)

and high engine speeds. Do not exceed ¾of the maximum speed for each gear.RDo not change down a gear manually in

order to brake.RAvoid depressing the accelerator pedal

beyond the pressure point (kickdown) andonly engage gear 4, 3, 2 or 1 while drivingslowly.

After 1000 miles (1500 km)RGradually bring the vehicle up to full road

and engine speeds.

i These instructions must also be observedif you have the engine, the transmission, orthe rear axle differential of your vehiclereplaced.

Driving abroadAn extensive network of authorized SprinterDealers is also at your disposal when you aretraveling abroad. The respective workshopdirectories are available from any authorizedSprinter Dealer.In some countries, only fuels with a loweroctane rating or a higher sulfur content areavailable.You will find information about fuel in the"Service products" section (Y page 153).If you are traveling in countries wherevehicles are driven on the opposite side of theroad to that in which the vehicle is registered,you must have the headlamps:Rpartially masked (halogen headlamps)Rswitched over (Bi-Xenon headlamps)

G WarningMasking the headlamps incorrectly canimpair your visibility when driving with theheadlamps switched on. You could alsoimpede other road users. Oncoming trafficmay be dazzled.Always have the headlamps masked/switched over at a qualified specialistworkshop which has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired.For this we recommend an authorizedSprinter Dealer. All work relevant to safety oron safety-related systems must be carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving off-roadWhen driving the vehicle, particularly onrough terrain, ensure that the driven wheelsalways have sufficient traction.Avoid letting the drive wheels spin. Spinningdrive wheels can damage the differential.

! Always observe the ground clearance ofthe vehicle and avoid obstacles, e.g. deepruts.

138 Driving tipsOp

erat

ion

Obstacles could damage the vehicle, forexample:Rthe axlesRthe propeller shafts and the transmissionRthe tanks and supply reservoirsFor this reason, you should always driveslowly when driving off-road. If you have todrive over obstacles, have the co-driverdirect you.

G WarningIf you drive too fast off-road, you may notrecognize obstacles in good time or you mayunderestimate the roughness of the ground.When driving off-road, always drive slowly toavoid damaging the vehicle.The vehicle may slip to the side, tip and rollover. Always drive along the line of fall whenyou are on a slope. Never drive across a slope.Never turn the vehicle around on a slope. Ifthe vehicle cannot manage an uphill slope,drive back down the slope in reverse gear.You could lose control of the vehicle if youshift the transmission to neutral or disengagethe clutch on an incline and then try to brakethe vehicle using only the service brake.Never let the vehicle roll.Overloading the vehicle will increase the riskof the vehicle tipping over. Never exceed themaximum permissible axle loads under anycircumstances. Keep the vehicle's center ofgravity as low as possible when the vehicle isladen.If the vehicle is frequently or mainly operatedin muddy or marshy terrain, substances thatimpair braking efficiency, such as sand or oilmixed with water, could get into the brakesystem. This may lead to excessive wear anda reduction in braking efficiency. In anemergency, there is a risk that full brakingpower may no longer be available.After driving off-road, always carry out a shortbrake test. If you detect a reduced brakingeffect or hear grinding noises, have the brakesystem checked at a qualified specialist

workshop, for example at an authorizedSprinter Dealer.

G WarningWhen driving off-road, your body is subject toforces from all directions, due to the unevensurface. There is a danger that you could bethrown out of your seat and be injured. Alwayswear a seat belt, even when driving off-road.

Rules for driving off-road

G WarningIf you drive over obstacles or in ruts, thesteering wheel may jerk out of your grip andyou could injure the thumbs on both hands.Always hold the steering wheel cross firmlywith both hands. When driving over obstacles,you must expect steering forces to increasebriefly and suddenly.

RBefore driving off-road, stop the vehicle andshift to a low gear.ROnly drive off-road with the engine running

and a gear engaged.RDrive slowly and smoothly. Walking pace is

necessary in many situations.RMake sure that the wheels always remain

in contact with the ground.RDrive with extreme care over unknown

terrain where you can only see for a shortdistance. As a precaution, get out of thevehicle to take a look at the route to betaken first.RCheck the water depth before fording.RWatch out for obstacles (e.g. rocks, holes,

tree stumps and ruts).RAvoid edges where the surface could

crumble or break away.

Driving tips 139

Oper

atio

n

Z

Before driving off-roadX If the surface demands it, temporarily

deactivate acceleration skid control (ASR)when pulling away (Y page 49).

X Safely stow or secure any items of luggageor loads (Y page 144).

i We recommend that you additionallycarry a shovel and a recovery rope withshackle in the vehicle.

After driving off-road

G WarningDamage caused to the vehicle when drivingoff-road may cause consequential damage,the failure of mechanical assemblies as wellas accidents. Clean and inspect the vehicleafter any off-road use. Repair any damagebefore using the vehicle again.

X Activate the acceleration skid controlsystem (ASR) (Y page 49).

X Clean the vehicle (Y page 165).X Check the vehicle for damage.

Transport by railTransporting your vehicle by rail may besubject to certain restrictions or requirespecial measures to be taken in somecountries due to varying tunnel heights andloading standards.You may obtain information about this fromany authorized Sprinter Dealer.

Fuel consumptionFuel consumption depends on:Rthe vehicle versionRthe style of drivingRthe operating conditionsRthe type or quality of the fuel used

The vehicle will use more fuel than usual inthe following situations:Rat very low temperaturesRin city trafficRon short tripsRwhen towing a trailerRin mountainous terrainObserve the advice in the "Protection of theenvironment" section to keep fuelconsumption low .The following components of the differentvehicle versions influence fuel consumption:Rtire sizes, tire tread, tire pressure, tire

conditionRbodyRdrive unit gear ratiosRadditional equipment (e.g. air-conditioning

system, auxiliary heating system).Details concerning fuel consumption arerecorded in the on-board computer; use thesteering wheel buttons to call up the Trip computer menu (Y page 85).

DEF consumptionDepending on the vehicle version, the DEFconsumption of:Ra Cargo Van/Passenger Van is

approximately 2322 MPG(0.10 l/100 km)Ra Chassis Cab is approximately 1720 MPG

(0.14 l/100 km)In each case, the stated consumption figureis a mean value between urban and extra-urban driving cycles. The consumption figuredoes not refer to a specific vehicle, but isprovided for the purposes of comparisonbetween different vehicle types.DEF consumption, like fuel consumption, isvery dependent on the driving style and theoperating conditions. This means that the realconsumption figures during operation of yourvehicle may deviate from those stated.

140 Driving tipsOp

erat

ion

Engine oil consumption! If the vehicle is predominantly used for

short-distance driving, this could lead to amalfunction in the automatic cleaningfunction for the diesel particle filter. As aresult, fuel may accumulate in the engineoil and cause engine failure.Therefore, if you mainly drive shortdistances, you should drive on a highway oron rural roads for 20 minutes every310 miles (500 km). This ensures sufficientregeneration of the diesel particle filter.

Depending on the driving style, the vehicleconsumes a maximum of 1.0 US qt(1.0 l) ofoil over a distance of 620 miles (1000 km).Engine oil consumption may be higher if:Rthe vehicle is new.Ryou mainly operate the vehicle under

arduous operating conditions.Ryou frequently drive at high engine speeds.Regular maintenance is one of thepreconditions for moderate rates ofconsumption.You can only estimate the engine oilconsumption after you have driven aconsiderable distance.Check the engine oil level on a regular basis,e.g. weekly or each time you refuel(Y page 171).

Speed limiterYou can permanently limit the maximumspeed of your vehicle to 75 mph(120 km/h).We recommend that you have the maximumspeed programmed at an authorized SprinterDealer. This has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the requiredwork.

G WarningExceeding the permissible maximum speedcan cause tire damage, which could lead toloss of control of the vehicle.

As the driver, you must find out about themaximum speed of the vehicle and theresulting permissible maximum speed of thetires (tire and tire pressure).You must not exceed the speed limit for thetires listed in the tire pressure tables.

i You will find information about tirepressure in the "Technical data" section(Y page 280).

Reverse warning deviceOn vehicles with a reverse warning feature, awarning signal sounds when reverse gear isengaged to alert other road users. The volumeof this warning signal can be reduced fornight-time driving.

G WarningOther road users could fail to hear or couldignore the reverse warning feature warningsignal. For this reason, the reverse warningfeature cannot guarantee that there are nopeople or objects behind your vehicle.The reverse warning feature is a systemdesigned to assist you in ensuring the safetyof other road users. It does not, however,relieve you of your responsibility to make surethat there are no persons or objects behindyour vehicle while you are maneuvering.For this reason, always observe the road andtraffic conditions with due caution. To avoiddamage and injury, make sure that there areno persons or objects behind the vehicle whileyou are maneuvering. Have a second personassist you when maneuvering if necessary.

X To set the warning signal to quiet:engage the reverse gear twice in briefsuccession.The volume of the warning signal isreduced.

i The warning signal sounds at normalvolume by default and will need to be

Driving tips 141

Oper

atio

n

Z

reduced in volume each time reverse gearis engaged.

Refueling

G WarningFuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flamesand smoking as well as the use of auxiliaryheaters (sparks) are therefore prohibitedwhen handling fuel.Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heatingbefore refueling.

G WarningAvoid any contact with fuels.You can damage your health if your skincomes into direct contact with fuel or if youinhale fuel vapors.

%Environmental noteIf fuels are handled improperly, they pose adanger to persons and the environment. Donot allow fuels to run into the sewage system,the surface waters, the ground water or intothe ground.

! Filter the fuel before transferring it to thevehicle if you are refueling the vehicle frombarrels or containers.This will prevent malfunctions in the fuelsystem due to contaminated fuel.

G WarningDo not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with adiesel engine. Never mix diesel with gasoline.This causes damage to the fuel system andengine and could result in the vehicle catchingfire.

! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles witha diesel engine. Even small amounts ofgasoline will cause damage to the fuelsystem and engine. Damage resulting fromadding gasoline is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

! If the wrong fuel has been added bymistake, do not switch on the ignition. Ifyou do, the fuel could enter the fuel lines.The tank and the fuel lines must then bedrained. Inform a qualified specialistworkshop and have the tank and the fuellines drained completely.

The fuel filler flap is beside the front left-handdoor when viewed in the direction of travel. Itis only possible to open the fuel filler flapwhen the front door is open.

X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Switch off the auxiliary heating system

(Y page 104).X Open the front left-hand door first, and then

the fuel filler flap.X Close all vehicle doors to prevent fuel

vapors from entering the vehicle.X Turn tank filler cap ; counter-clockwise,

remove it and let it hang from retainingstrap :.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

X Replace tank filler cap ; and turnclockwise.You will hear a click when the fuel filler capis closed fully.

X Open the front left-hand door first, and thenclose the filler flap.

You will find information about fuel in the"Service products" section (Y page 153).

142 RefuelingOp

erat

ion

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)The exhaust gas aftertreatment requires areducing agent, Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF), inorder to function correctly.

G WarningIf you open the DEF reservoir cap at hightemperatures, ammonia vapors could bereleased.Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and areparticularly irritating for your skin, respiratoryorgans and eyes. This may result in burningeyes, nose and throat, as well as coughing andwatering eyes.Do not inhale ammonia vapors.

G WarningAvoid contact with DEF.DEF is hazardous to health. Do not allow DEFto come into contact with your skin. Rinseaffected areas with plenty of clean water andconsult a doctor if necessary.

%Environmental noteDispose of DEF in an environmentallyresponsible manner.

! Only use DEF in accordance withISO 22241. The exhaust gas aftertreatmentsystem may otherwise be damaged.Observe the MB Specifications for ServiceProducts, Sheet No. 352.0.Damage caused by the use of otherreducing agents will result in the loss ofyour New Vehicle Limited Warrantyentitlements.

! If DEF comes into contact with a paintedor aluminum surface, wash the surface offimmediately with plenty of water.

! DEF is not a diesel additive and must notbe mixed with fuel in the tank. Even smallamounts of DEF can cause engine damage.Damage resulting from adding DEF is notcovered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

i If the DEF level drops below the reservelevel, the second warning message(Y page 116) appears and at this point, atthe latest, you must add at least 2.0 US gal(7.6 l) of DEF.

You will find further information on DEF in the"Service products" section (Y page 155).

DEF filler neck in the enginecompartmentX Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Close all vehicle doors so that no ammonia

vapors can enter the vehicle.i Do not inhale any ammonia vapors which

may escape when you unscrew the tankfiller cap. Ammonia vapors have a pungentodor. However, they are neither toxic norhazardous to health in this concentration.

X Turn tank filler cap : counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Only fill the tank via the filler neck until theDEF level can be seen in the filler neck.

X Replace DEF tank filler cap : on the fillerneck and turn clockwise.You will hear a click when tank fillercap : is closed fully.

DEF filler neck on the right-hand vehiclesideX Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Close all vehicle doors so that no ammonia

vapors can enter the vehicle.

Refueling 143

Oper

atio

n

Z

i Do not inhale any ammonia vapors whichmay escape when you unscrew the tankfiller cap. Ammonia vapors have a pungentodor. However, they are neither toxic norhazardous to health in this concentration.

DEF tank on the right-hand side of the vehicle(example: Chassis Cab)

DEF tank filler capX Remove tool A for unlocking tank filler

cap ; from the footwell on the co-driver'sside (Y page 182).

X Pull cover ? up, turn 90° and release.X Insert tool A into hole = of tank filler

cap ;.X Turn tank filler cap ; counter-clockwise,

remove it and let it hang from retainingstrap :. Make sure that tool A remainsin tank filler cap ; while doing so.

X Only fill the tank via the filler neck until theDEF level can be seen in the filler neck.

X Replace tank filler cap ; and turnclockwise.

X Pull tool A out of tank filler cap ; andstow with the vehicle tool kit in the footwellon the co-driver's side.

X Pull cover ? up over hole = of tank fillercap ;, turn and release.

X Turn tank filler cap ;.If tank filler cap ; turns freely, the DEFtank is closed.

Transporting loads with the vehicle

Loading guidelines

G WarningSecure and position the load as described inthe loading guidelines. You or others couldotherwise be injured by the load slipping orbeing thrown around in the event of sharpbraking, sudden changes in direction or onpoor road surfaces. This also applies to seatswhich have been removed if they remain in thevehicle.Even if you follow all loading guidelines, theload increases the risk of injury in the eventof an accident. Observe the tips in the"Securing a load" section.

G WarningDo not allow the load, including passengers,to exceed the permissible gross vehicleweight or the gross axle weight rating for yourvehicle.If the gross axle weight rating or permissiblegross vehicle weight is exceeded duringtransport, tire durability and road safety areadversely affected. The vehicle's handling andsteering characteristics change noticeably.Braking and stopping distances aresignificantly longer.The vehicle's driving, steering and brakingcharacteristics change as the gross vehicleweight increases or when the center of gravityis raised.

144 Transporting loads with the vehicleOp

erat

ion

Always make sure that the distribution of theload is correct and adapt your driving styleaccording to the load.

G WarningIf you have installed a roof carrier, thevehicle’s handling, steering and brakingcharacteristics may change due to the highercenter of gravity. This is the case particularlyif the roof carrier is laden. Adapt your drivingstyle according to the vehicle load.Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions. An incorrectly secured roofcarrier and/or load could come loose, fall offand thereby endanger you or others.Observe the maximum roof load andmaximum roof carrier load. Loads transportedon the roof must always be secured withparticular care.Do not allow the load, including passengers,to exceed the permissible gross vehicleweight or the gross axle weight rating for yourvehicle.

G WarningWhen using suitable load securing aids andlashing material, always follow themanufacturer's operating instructions, inparticular the notes on discard criteriacontained therein.Load securing aids and lashing material maynot be used, for example, if:Ridentification marks are missing or illegibleRthere are yarn breakages, damage to

bearing seams or other signs of tearingRthere are signs of shearing, deformation,

pinching or other damageRthere is damage to clamping or connecting

elementsLoad securing aids and lashing material in thiscondition are ready for discard and must bereplaced.If you use load securing aids or lashingmaterials that are ready for discard, the loadis not correctly secured and could cause

serious injuries to you and others and causematerial damage.

G Warning!After an accident, have a damaged cargo flooror cargo area, lashing eyelets and lashingmaterial checked at a qualified specialistworkshop that has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired. The cargo could otherwise beinsufficiently secured during the nexttransport and could lead to serious injury toyou and other persons or material damage.For this reason, we recommend an authorizedSprinter Dealer. In particular, all work relevantto safety or on safety-related systems mustbe carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! If you are using a roof carrier, observe themaximum roof load and maximum roofcarrier load.

You will find information about the maximumroof load in the "Technical data" section(Y page 283) and information about roofcarriers in the "Carrier systems" section(Y page 149).

Before loadingX Tire pressure: check the tire pressure and

correct if necessary (Y page 281).X Cargo floor: clean the cargo floor.

The cargo floor must be free from oil anddust, dry and clean swept to prevent theload from slipping.

X Place non-slip mats (anti-slip mats) on thecargo floor if necessary.

! As soon as the non-slip mats show signsof deformation or develop squashed areas,or traces of cracking/cutting, they can nolonger be used to secure a load and mustbe replaced.

Transporting loads with the vehicle 145

Oper

atio

n

Z

During loadingX Observe the gross axle weight rating and

permissible gross vehicle weight for yourvehicle.

! On passenger van versions withmaximum seating layout, the permissiblerear axle load would be exceeded if the fullpayload were to be loaded in the cargocompartment.

i Bear in mind that the curb weight of thevehicle is increased by installing optionalequipment and accessories.

X Observe the information about loaddistribution (Y page 146).

X Secure the load (Y page 146). Alwaysobserve the relevant national regulations.

Checks after loadingX Securing loads: check that the load is

secure before every journey and at regularintervals during a long journey, and correctif necessary.

X Doors: close the sliding doors and reardoors.

G WarningMake sure that the sliding doors and reardoors are always closed when the engine isrunning.Exhaust fumes could otherwise enter thevehicle interior and poison you.

X Tire pressure: adjust the tire pressuresaccording to the vehicle load(Y page 281).

X Driving style: adapt your driving styleaccording to the vehicle load.

Load distributionThe overall center of gravity of the load shouldalways be as low as possible, centered andbetween the axles near the rear axle.

! Excessive loads on individual points of thecargo floor or on the load surface impairvehicle handling characteristics and couldcause damage to the floor covering.

On crewbuses:X Always transport loads in the cargo

compartment.X Always place the load against the backrests

of the rear bench seat.X Move large and heavy loads as far towards

the front of the vehicle as possible againstthe rear bench seat. Stow the load flushwith the rear bench seat.

X Always additionally secure the load withsuitable load securing aids or tie down.

i Observe the following notes:RDo not stack loads higher than the upper

edge of the backrests.RTransport loads behind seats that are not

occupied.RIf the rear bench seat is not occupied,

insert the seat belts crosswise into thebuckle of the opposite seat belt.

Securing loads

General notesAs the driver, you are responsible for ensuringthat the cargo is secured against sliding,tipping, rolling or falling. This applies togeneral traffic situations as well as evasivemaneuvers or full brake application and onpoor stretches of road.If your load is not secured in accordance withapplicable requirements and guidelinesregarding the securing of loads, you may beliable to prosecution, depending on the locallegislation and the consequences ofinadequately secured loads.You should therefore observe the respectivelegal requirements for the relevant country.Check that the load is secure before everyjourney and at regular intervals during a long

146 Transporting loads with the vehicleOp

erat

ion

journey, and correct an incorrectly orinadequately secured load if necessary.

i You can obtain information aboutsecuring the load correctly from themanufacturer of the load securing aids ortie down for securing the load.

X Fill spaces between the load and the cargocompartment walls or wheel arches (form-locking). Use rigid load securing aids, suchas wedges, wooden fixings or padding.

X Attach secured and stabilized loads in alldirections to the cargo tie-down points,cargo tie-down rings and loading rails in thecargo compartment or on the load surface,depending on the equipment in the vehicle.Only use tie downs, such as lashing rods orlashing nets and lashing straps, that havebeen tested in accordance with currentstandards (e.g. DIN EN).Always use the cargo tie-down rings closestto the load to secure it and pad sharp edgesfor protection.

i Tie-downs which have been tested inaccordance with current standards (e.g.DIN EN) can be obtained from specialistfirms or an authorized Sprinter Dealer.Loads, and heavy loads in particular, shouldpreferably be secured using the cargo tie-down rings.

Cargo tie-down points (example: Passenger Van): Cargo tie-down rings

Cargo tie-down points (example: Cargo Van): Cargo tie-down rings; Load rails

G WarningYou may not transport anyone in the cargocompartment or on the load surface. Neverlet more people ride in the vehicle than thereare seat belts available. Make sure everyoneriding in the vehicle is correctly restrainedwith a separate seat belt. Never use a seatbelt for more than one person at a time.

Transporting loads with the vehicle 147

Oper

atio

n

Z

G WarningDo not attempt to modify or repair the lashingpoints, cargo tie-down rings or tie downs. Theload or the cargo tie-down rings could workloose and cause serious injury to you andother people as well as material damage.Spread the load evenly between the lashingpoints or cargo tie-down rings.Observe the loading guidelines.

i Secure loose loads with a tested lashingnet or a tarpaulin.

X Always fasten the lashing net or tarpaulinto all available cargo tie-down points. Makesure that the retaining hooks are securedagainst accidental opening.

! Observe the information on the maximumloading capacity of the lashing points.If you use multiple lashing points to securea load, you should observe the maximumloading capacity of the weakest lashingpoint.When you brake hard, for example, forcesapply that can be far higher than the weightforce of the transported load. Always usemultiple lashing points to distribute theseforces, and distribute the load equallyamong them.

Information about the maximum loadingcapacity of the cargo tie-down points can befound in the "Technical data" section(Y page 283).

i If your vehicle is equipped with loadingrails in the cargo floor, you should placelashing rods directly in front of and behindthe load. The lashing rods directly absorbthe potential shifting forces.

G WarningIf you tension the lashing straps between theside walls, or between a side wall and thecargo floor, the maximum permissible load forthe loading rails or lashing points or eyeletscould be exceeded if the brakes are applied

suddenly, if the vehicle's direction is changedabruptly or in the event of an accident.The load would no longer be secured,resulting in a risk of serious injury beingcaused by the load slipping.For this reason, do not tension a lashing strapbetween the side walls or between a side walland the cargo floor.Only lashing rods are to be used between theloading rails on the side walls. Observe theoperating instructions of the lashing rodmanufacturer.

i Securing loads on the cargo floor bylashing them down is only recommendedfor lightweight loads. Place non-slip mats(anti-slip mats) on the cargo floor toincrease load security.

G WarningBefore releasing the lashing straps, you mustmake sure that the load is standing firmly andthat it cannot tip over once the straps havebeen removed. Otherwise, you or others couldbe injured by the load slipping.

Installing/removing cargo tie-downpoints for the loading rails

X To install: slide the cargo tie-down ringthrough a recess in the loading rail close tothe load until locking mechanism :engages in the recess.

i When you pull locking mechanism : upand out of the recess, the cargo tie-downring is able to move within the loading rail.

148 Transporting loads with the vehicleOp

erat

ion

Make sure that locking mechanism : isalways engaged in a recess.

G WarningIf not firmly anchored in the loading rail, thecargo tie-down ring may slip or be torn out ofthe loading rail in the event of sudden braking.The load would no longer be secured,resulting in a risk of serious injury beingcaused by the load slipping. For this reason,always check the cargo tie-down ring for firmseating after installing.

X Check the cargo tie-down ring for firmseating.

X To remove: pull locking mechanism : upand pull the cargo tie-down ring towardsthe locking mechanism and out of theloading rail through a recess.

Carrier systemsIt is possible to install a roof carrier if yourvehicle is equipped with securing rails on theroof.Special mountings (sliding blocks) areavailable as accessories. These are availablefrom any authorized Sprinter Dealer.

: Securing rails

G WarningIf you have installed a roof carrier, thevehicle’s handling, steering and brakingcharacteristics may change due to the highercenter of gravity. This is the case particularly

if the roof carrier is laden. Adapt your drivingstyle according to the vehicle load.Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions. An incorrectly secured roofcarrier and/or load could come loose, fall offand thereby endanger you or others.Observe the maximum roof load andmaximum roof carrier load. Loads transportedon the roof must always be secured withparticular care.Do not allow the load, including passengers,to exceed the permissible gross vehicleweight or the gross axle weight rating for yourvehicle.

You can find information about the maximumroof load in the "Technical data" section(Y page 283).

! Make sure that:Rthe roof rack mounting bolts are

tightened in the slot nuts provided witha torque of 6.0 – 7.4 lb-ft(8 – 10 Nm).Rthe bolts, when tightened, do not touch

the rails.Rthe slot nuts are not located in the area

of the plastic caps.Rthe slot nuts have the right cross-section.Rthe mounting rails in the interior are free

of dirt.Rretighten the mounting bolts evenly after

approximately 300 miles (500 km).We recommend that you only use roofracks tested and approved by Sprinter.These help avoid vehicle damage.

! If you would like to have the mountingrails retrofitted, have them installed at aqualified specialist workshop which has thenecessary specialist knowledge and toolsto carry out the work required. You couldotherwise damage the vehicle.For this reason, we recommend anauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

Transporting loads with the vehicle 149

Oper

atio

n

Z

Towing a trailer

Notes on trailer towing

Important safety notesThe trailer coupling is one of the mostimportant vehicle parts with regard to roadsafety. The notes on operation, care andmaintenance issued by the manufacturershould be observed.

G Warning!Improper equipment or driving techniquewhile driving with a trailer can cause you tolose control of your vehicle.Improper towing or failure to observe theOperator's Manual can lead to vehicledamage and/or serious injuries. Observe thefollowing guidelines in order to guarantee safedriving with trailers.Contact an authorized Sprinter Dealer if yourequire any explanation of the informationcontained in the Operator's Manual.

General notesRInstall only an approved trailer coupling on

your vehicle.Further information about availability andinstallation of trailer couplings can beobtained from any authorized SprinterDealer.RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not

suitable for installing detachable trailercouplings.RDo not install rented trailer couplings or

other detachable trailer couplings to thebumpers.RTo reduce the risk of damage to the ball

coupling when using a detachable trailercoupling, remove the ball coupling from itsmounting when it is not needed.

Coupling up a trailerObserve the maximum permissible trailerdimensions (width and length).

Most federal states and all Canadianprovinces require by law:Rsafety chains between the towing vehicle

and the trailer. The chains should be cross-wound under the trailer drawbar. They mustbe fastened to the vehicle's trailercoupling, not to the bumper or the axle.Allow for enough play in the chains tofacilitate turning tight corners.Ra separate brake system for certain types

of trailer.Ra safety switch for braked trailers. Check

the specific legal requirements applicableto your federal state.If the trailer detaches from the towingvehicle, the safety switch applies thetrailer's brakes.

i The vehicle's subharness has an electriccable to the brake light indicator lamp.

G WarningFollow the manufacturer's operatinginstructions for the trailer tow hitch whenusing a detachable trailer tow hitch.Couple and decouple the trailer carefully. Atrailer which is incorrectly coupled to thetowing vehicle could break away. A correctlycoupled trailer must be positionedhorizontally behind the vehicle.Ensure that the following weights are notexceeded:Rthe permissible noseweightRthe permissible trailer loadRthe permissible rear axle load of the towing

vehicleRthe permissible gross weight for both the

towing vehicle and the trailerThe permissible values, which must not beexceeded, can be found in your vehicledocuments and on the trailer tow hitch typeplates for the trailer and the vehicle. Wherethe values differ, the lowest is valid.

150 Transporting loads with the vehicleOp

erat

ion

X Make sure that the automatic transmissionis set to position P.

X Engage the vehicle's parking brake.X Close the rear doors.X Couple the trailer.X Establish all electrical connections.

Trailer coupled ready for use

Towing a trailerThere are numerous legal requirementsconcerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speedrestrictions. Make sure that your vehicle/trailer combination complies with the localrequirements not only in your area ofresidence but also at any location to whichyou are traveling. The police and localauthorities can provide reliable information.Please observe the following when towing atrailer:RTo acquaint yourself with driving with a

trailer and with the resulting changes tohandling, you should practice cornering,stopping and reversing in a traffic-freelocation.RBefore driving, check:

- trailer coupling- safety switch for braked trailers- safety chains- electrical connection- lights- wheels

RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide anunobstructed view of the rear section of thetrailer.RIf the trailer has electronically controlled

brakes, pull away slowly, brake manuallyusing the brake controller and check thatthe brakes are functional.RSecure any objects on the trailer to prevent

the cargo from slipping when the vehicle isin motion.RIf you couple up a trailer, regularly check

that the cargo is secure and make sure thatthe trailer lamps and (if applicable) thetrailer brakes are functioning correctly.RBear in mind that the handling will be less

stable when towing a trailer than whendriving without one. Avoid sudden steeringmovements.RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,

accelerates more slowly and has adecreased gradient climbing capability anda longer braking distance.It is more susceptible to crosswinds andrequires cautious steering.RIf possible, do not brake abruptly; apply the

brakes moderately to begin with to allowthe trailer to activate its brakes. Thenincrease the pressure on the brake pedal.RIf the automatic transmission repeatedly

shifts between gears when driving oninclines, restrict the shift range. Select shiftrange 4, 3, 2 or 1.Driving in a low gear and at a low speedreduces the risk of damaging the engine.RWhen driving on a downhill gradient, shift

to a low gear and take advantage of theengine's braking effect.Avoid continuous brake application as thismay overheat the vehicle brakes and, ifinstalled, the trailer brakes.RIf the coolant temperature increases

dramatically while the air-conditioningsystem is switched on, switch off the air-conditioning system.

Transporting loads with the vehicle 151

Oper

atio

n

Z

Coolant heat can additionally be dissipatedby opening the windows and by setting theblower fan and the interior temperature tomaximum.RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention

to the extended length of your vehicle/trailer combination.Due to the length of your vehicle/trailercombination, you will have to travel anadditional distance beyond the vehicle youare overtaking before returning to theoriginal lane.

If the trailer begins to swing from side to side:X do not accelerate.X do not counter-steer.X brake if necessary.

G WarningUnder no circumstances try to straighten thevehicle/trailer combination by increasing thespeed.

i You can reduce the risk of the trailerswinging and snaking by retrofitting anti-roll bars or trailer stability programs. Youcan obtain further information from anauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

Uncoupling a trailerX Make sure that the automatic transmission

is set to position P.X Engage the vehicle's parking brake.X Remove the trailer cable and uncouple the

trailer.X Engage the trailer's parking brake.

Load distributionThe Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is thecombined weight of the trailer together withthe cargo and equipment loaded on thetrailer. The maximum permissible grossweight is vehicle-specific and depends on theequipment level: 5000 lbs (2268 kg) or7500 lbs (3402 kg).

The permissible Trailer drawbar WeightRating (TWR) is the maximum weightpermitted on the trailer drawbar: 750 lbs(340 kg) or 500 lbs (227 kg) is the limit fortrailer couplings approved by the vehicledistributor named on the inside of the frontcover.The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)is the sum of the Gross Trailer Weight and thevehicle weight, including a driver weight ofapproximately 150 lbs (68 kg). Thepermissible GCWR is vehicle-specific anddepends on the equipment level.When driving with a trailer, you should notexceed the permitted Gross CombinationWeight Rating (GCWR).You must distribute the load on the vehicleand trailer so that the permitted maximumvalues for the vehicle (GCWR) and trailer(GTW) weight as well as permitted axle loads(GAWR) and noseweight (TWR) of your vehicleare not exceeded.

i Take into account that the vehicle'spermissible payload must be reduced tocompensate for the noseweight.

The applicable permissible values, whichmust not be exceeded, can be found in yourvehicle documents and on the type plates forthe trailer tow hitch, trailer and vehicle(Y page 277). You will also find a list of thepermissible values in the "Technical data"(Y page 284) section. Where the valuesdiffer, the lowest is valid.

! The permissible gross combinationweight is less than the sum of thepermissible gross vehicle weight plus thepermissible trailer load. Exceeding thepermissible gross combination weight canlead to damage to the drivetrain, to thetransmission or to the trailer tow hitch.For this reason, applicable values for thepermissible gross vehicle weight or thepermissible trailer load are reducedaccordingly if either the vehicle or thetrailer is fully loaded. In this case, the traileror the vehicle may only be partially loaded.

152 Transporting loads with the vehicleOp

erat

ion

Verify compliance with weight limitations ona weighbridge.

Trailer power supplyYour vehicle may be equipped with variouselectrical fittings for trailer towing.Depending on your trailer, you may need anadapter to allow your trailer to be connectedto the vehicle. Information about yourvehicle's electrical equipment is availablefrom any authorized Sprinter Dealer.

! Faulty wiring of the connector plug couldin certain circumstances cause otherelectronic systems to malfunction. For thisreason, we recommend having the wiringof the connector plug performed at anauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

Operation in winter

General notesHave your vehicle winterized at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedSprinter Dealer, at the onset of winter.This service includes the following:Roil change, if the engine oil currently used

does not have adequate low temperaturecharacteristics or if these are no longersufficient due to agingRthe antifreeze/anticorrosion

concentration in the coolant is checked.Rthe addition of a concentrated cleaning

agent to the water in the windshieldwasher/headlamp cleaning systemRbattery checkRa tire changePrior to the onset of winter, ensure that snowchains are available in the vehicle.Do not cover the surface of the radiator or theradiator grill, even in winter. Doing so couldcause the engine diagnostics to record falseor incorrect data. Recording of enginediagnostic data is legally prescribed and must

therefore be correct, clear andcomprehensible at all times.You will find information about diesel fuel foruse at low outside temperatures in the"Operation" section (Y page 154).Please also observe the information aboutwinter driving (Y page 111).You will find information about winter tiresand about driving with snow chains in the"Wheel and tires" section (Y page 153).

Service products

Fuel

G WarningFuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flamesand smoking as well as the use of auxiliaryheaters (sparks) are therefore prohibitedwhen handling fuel.Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heatingbefore refueling.

G WarningAvoid any contact with fuels.You can damage your health if your skincomes into direct contact with fuel or if youinhale fuel vapors.

! Filter the fuel before transferring it to thevehicle if you are refueling the vehicle frombarrels or containers.This will prevent malfunctions in the fuelsystem due to contaminated fuel.

! Refuel only with commercially availablevehicle diesel fuel, ULTRA-LOW SULFURDIESEL with a sulfur content no greaterthan 15 ppm. Fuels such as fatty acidmethyl ester FAME (bio-diesel fuels),marine diesel, heating oil etc. may not beused as a diesel fuel mixture.Refuel with B5 bio-diesel only if it fulfills therequirements listed under "Fuel quality".

Service products 153

Oper

atio

n

Z

Do not use any fuel additives, and useapproved flow improvers only whennecessary.There is otherwise a risk of impaired engineperformance or engine and catalyticconverter damage. The use of fuel additivesis always the responsibility of the vehicleoperator and may result in the restrictionor loss of your New Vehicle LimitedWarranty entitlements.

Fuel gradei You will generally find information about

the fuel grade on the filling pump.Otherwise, ask the gas station attendant.

Refuel only with commercially availableULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL (ULSD,maximum sulfur content of 15 ppm) thatconforms to the ASTM D975 standard.We approve the use of B5 bio-diesel (ULSDwith a maximum bio-diesel content of 5% byvolume ) for all Sprinter diesel engines withCommon-rail Direct Injection (CDI).You may refuel with B5 bio-diesel if the bio-diesel content is in accordance with theASTM standard D6751. It must also have thenecessary oxidation stability (at least 6 h inaccordance with the EN 14112 standard) toavoid damage caused by deposits and/orcorrosion.Pure bio-diesel and diesel fuels that have ahigher percentage of bio-diesel, such as B20,may damage the fuel system and the engineand are therefore not approved. Pleasecontact gas station personnel for moreinformation. The B5 bio-diesel marking on thepump must state unequivocally that the ULSDstandard is fulfilled. If the marking does notmake this clear, do not refuel from that pump.

! You can damage the engine and dieselparticle filter (DPF) by refueling with thefollowing diesel fuels:RLOW SULFUR DIESEL with a sulfur

content of maximum 500 ppmRdiesel fuel with a sulfur content greater

than 15 ppmRdiesel fuel with a bio-diesel content of

more than 5%Rdiesel fuel with a bio-diesel content up to

5% but that does not conform to therequirements listed under "Fuel quality"

Damage caused by the use of such dieselfuels is not covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Diesel at low temperaturesRefuel only with commercially availableULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL (ULSD,maximum sulfur content of 15 ppm) thatconforms to the ASTM D975 standard.To prevent operating problems, diesel withbetter flow qualities is available during thewinter months. You can obtain information atthe gas station or from your fuel supplier.At very low outside temperatures, paraffinmay separate from the diesel fuel and preventit from flowing freely.Your vehicle is equipped with a fuelpreheating system. This system alsoimproves the flow characteristics of thediesel fuel by about 46 ‡(8 †). ULTRA-LOWSULFUR DIESEL can therefore be used atoutside temperatures of down to14 ‡(–10 †) without any impairment.

Fuel additivesFlow improvers are fuel additives used toimprove the flow characteristics of dieselfuels.The effectiveness of flow improvers cannot beguaranteed with all fuels. Observe themanufacturer's recommendations.Information about approved flow improvers isavailable from any authorized Sprinter Dealer.

154 Service productsOp

erat

ion

! Do not use fuel additives (with theexception of flow improvers), since thiscould lead to malfunctions or enginedamage. Damage caused by the use ofsuch additives is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

! Do not add gasoline or kerosene to dieselfuel to improve its flow characteristics.Gasoline or kerosene impairs thelubricating properties of the diesel fuel.This may cause damage to the injectionsystem, for example.

At outside temperatures below14 ‡(–10 †) and with less cold-resistantwinter diesel fuel, add the amount of flowimprover appropriate to the outsidetemperature.Add this additive to the diesel in time, i.e.before the flow properties of the diesel areaffected by paraffin separation. Malfunctionscaused by paraffin separation can only berectified by heating the entire fuel system,e.g. by parking the vehicle in a heated garage.

G WarningIf you heat up the fuel system with a heat gun,for example, you may damage parts of the fuelsystem. Fuel could escape, be ignited, andcause a fire.Never heat the fuel system with a heat gun orwith a naked flame.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)DEF is the reducing agent for the exhaust gasaftertreatment. DEF is a nonflammable,nontoxic, colorless, odorless and water-soluble liquid.

! Only use DEF in accordance withISO 22241. The exhaust gas aftertreatmentmay otherwise be damaged.Observe the MB Specifications for ServiceProducts, Sheet No. 352.0.Damage caused by the use of otherreducing agents will result in the loss of

your New Vehicle Limited Warrantyentitlements.

! If DEF comes into contact with a paintedor aluminum surface, wash the surface offimmediately with plenty of water.

High ambient temperaturesIf DEF in the DEF reservoir heats up totemperatures over 122 ‡(50 †) for a longperiod of time (e.g. due to direct sunlight),ammonia vapors form.

G WarningIf you open the DEF reservoir cap at hightemperatures, ammonia vapors could bereleased.Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and areparticularly irritating for your skin, respiratoryorgans and eyes. This may result in burningeyes, nose and throat, as well as coughing andwatering eyes.Do not inhale ammonia vapors.

Low ambient temperaturesDEF freezes at a temperature ofapproximately 12 ‡(–11 †). The vehicle isequipped with a DEF preheating system at thefactory. This ensures that the vehicle can beoperated in winter, even at temperaturesbelow 12 ‡(–11 †).

Additives and tap water! Do not mix DEF with any additives and do

not dilute DEF with tap water. Otherwise,the exhaust gas aftertreatment may bedamaged.Observe the MB Specifications for ServiceProducts, Sheet No. 352.0.Damage caused by the use of additives ortap water is not covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Service products 155

Oper

atio

n

Z

StorageOnly store DEF in containers made of high-alloy Cr-Ni steel or Mo-Cr-Ni steel inaccordance with DIN EN 10 088-1/2/3 orplastic containers made of polypropylene orpolyethylene.

! Containers made of aluminum, copper,copper alloys as well as unalloyed orgalvanized steel are not suitable for storingDEF. If stored in these types of containers,DEF could cause constituents of thesemetals to dissolve and cause irreparabledamage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment.Damage caused by dissolved componentsof the storage container will result in a lossof your New Vehicle Limited Warrantyentitlements.

DisposalObserve country-specific laws andregulations when disposing of DEF.%Environmental noteDispose of DEF in an environmentallyresponsible manner.

PurityThe purity of DEF is essential to preventmalfunctions in the exhaust gasaftertreatment.If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g.during repair work, the same liquid must notbe used to refill the tank. Its purity is no longerguaranteed.

! Impurities in DEF (e.g. caused by otherservice products, cleaning agents, dust,etc.) result in increased emissions,malfunctions, catalytic converter damageor engine damage.

Engine oilsUse only approved engine oil that complieswith the MB Specifications for ServiceProducts.

! The bottles of the various engine oil typesare marked with ACEA (Association desConstructeurs Européens d'Automobiles)and/or API (American Petroleum Institute)classifications. Only use approved engineoils that conform to the following MBSpecifications for Service Products and theprescribed ACEA and/or APIclassifications. Using engine oils of anotherquality is not permitted and may lead to aloss of your New Vehicle Limited Warrantyentitlements.The use of other, non-approved engine oilsfor diesel engines can cause damage to thediesel particle filter (DPF).

The MB Specifications for Service Productsapply to your vehicle1

R228.51R229.51These engine oils are of high quality and havea beneficial effect on:Rengine wearRfuel consumptionRemissionsMulti-grade engine oils of the prescribed SAEclass (viscosity) may be used all year round,taking the outside temperatures intoaccount.

Oil changeOil change intervals depend on the vehicle'soperating conditions and the quality of theengine oil used.The on-board computer automatically showsthe date for the next oil change as an eventmessage in the display.

1 If the quality level for diesel engines is not available, you may refill with engine oils that comply with the MBSpecifications for Service Products, Sheet No. 228.5, 229.3 and 229.5. The refill quantity is then limited toa maximum of 1 qt (1 l).

156 Service productsOp

erat

ion

Select the SAE class (viscosity) of the engineoil in accordance with the outsidetemperature.

! If the SAE viscosity class of the engine oilused does not cover the outsidetemperature range in which you areoperating the vehicle, it must be changedin good time, in particular before the coldseason commences. Using an engine oilthat does not have adequate temperaturecharacteristics can lead to engine damage.The temperature range information of theSAE classification always refers to that offresh oil. The temperature characteristicsof the engine oil may deterioratesignificantly due to aging in use, especiallyat low outside temperatures.For this reason, we recommend that theengine oil be changed before the coldseason commences. Use an approvedengine oil of the specified SAE class.

Engine oil SAE classification

i Only by using engine oil with a particularlyhigh quality grade, e.g. according to SheetNumber 228.51 of the MB Specificationsfor Service Products, can the maximuminterval for oil change be achieved.

We recommend that you only add engine oilof the same quality grade and SAE class asused when the engine oil was last changed.You can obtain further information from anyauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

! Do not add too much oil. Adding too muchoil can result in damage to the engine or the

catalytic converter. Have excess oilsiphoned off.

Miscibility of engine oilsIf, in exceptional cases, oil of the type in theengine is not available, top up using anotherapproved mineral or synthetic engine oil.Engine oils are differentiated according to:Rengine oil brandRquality grade (sheet number)RSAE class (viscosity)Subsequently have the engine oil changed atthe earliest possible opportunity.

! Mixing oils reduces the benefits of usinghigh grade engine oils.

i The sheet number (quality grade) and theSAE classification (viscosity) can be foundon the designation on the oil bottle.

Service products 157

Oper

atio

n

Z

Change intervals for engine oil

Service product Maintenanceinterval

Product name/number MBSheetNo.

Engine oil for diesel engines 2 years or10,000 miles(16,000 km)2

See approved engine oils 228.51229.51

Transmission and steering oils

Automatic transmission

Service product Maintenanceinterval

Product name/number MBSheetNo.

Automatic transmission oil every secondmaintenanceservice

Shell ATF 3403/M-115 236.10

Fuchs/Shell ATF 3353 236.12

You can obtain further information from any authorized Sprinter Dealer.

Rear axle

Service product Maintenanceinterval

Product name/number MBSheetNo.

Transmission oil every sixthmaintenanceservice or every10 years3

BP Energear Hypo DC 80W-90 235.20

Mobil Delvac Synthetic Gear Oil75W-90

235.8

You can obtain further information from any authorized Sprinter Dealer.

2 The interval – time or distance – that is first reached applies.3 The maintenance interval criterion that occurs first applies.

158 Service productsOp

erat

ion

SteeringSteering, no maintenance required.

Service product Maintenanceinterval

Product name/number MBSheetNo.

Power steering fluid – Mobil ATF-D,Exxon Mobil Corporation orequivalent

236.3

You can obtain further information from any authorized Sprinter Dealer.

Brake fluid

G WarningBrake fluid is hazardous to health. Do notswallow brake fluid. See a doctor immediatelyif you swallow brake fluid.Make sure that brake fluid does not come intocontact with skin, clothing or eyes. Rinseaffected areas with plenty of clean water andconsult a doctor if necessary.Always wear gloves and eye protection whentopping up brake fluid.Store brake fluid only in the original closedcontainer and keep it out of the reach ofchildren. Comply with safety regulationswhen handling brake fluid.

Use only approved brake fluids that complywith the MB Specification for ServiceProducts, Sheet No. 331.0. You must observethe boiling points (DOT 4 plus).The brake fluid must have the followingcharacteristics in accordance with theFMVSS 116 and ISO 4925 standards:Rboiling point (ERBP) of at least

500 ‡(260 †)Rwet boiling point (WERBP) of at least

356 ‡(180 †)Rviscosity of a maximum of 1500 mm²/sOver a period of time, the brake fluid absorbsmoisture from the air. This reduces its boilingpoint.

G WarningIf the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low,vapor pockets may form in the brake systemwhen the brakes are subjected to a heavy load(e.g. on long downhill stretches). This wouldimpair braking efficiency. The vehicle'sstopping distance may then be longer. Thisincreases the risk of an accident.Have the brake fluid replaced everytwo years with brake fluid approved by thedistributor named on the inside of the frontcover and have the replacement confirmed inthe Maintenance Booklet.

i There is usually a notice in the enginecompartment to remind you when the nextbrake fluid change is due.

You can obtain further information from anyauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

Service products 159

Oper

atio

n

Z

Change intervals for brake fluid

Service product Maintenanceinterval

Product name/number MBSheetNo.

Brake fluid 2 years Intac B026ERBoiling point: 500 ‡(260 †)RWet boiling point:

356 ‡(180 †)

331.0

Coolant

G WarningCoolant contains glycol and is therefore toxic.Do not swallow the coolant. See a doctorimmediately if you swallow coolant.Make sure that coolant does not come intocontact with skin, eyes or clothing. In case ofcontact with eyes, rinse immediately withplenty of clean water. Clean affected areas ofskin and clothing with soap and waterimmediately. Change any affected clothingimmediately.

Coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor.In the coolant, the antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor is responsible for:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointThe coolant must remain in the coolingsystem all year round for corrosion protectionpurposes and to increase the boiling point –even in countries with hot climates.At the factory, the vehicle is filled with acoolant that ensures protection against frostand corrosion and which can be mixed withapproved antifreeze/corrosion inhibitors.

! Use only approved antifreeze/corrosioninhibitors that comply with the MBSpecification for Service Products, SheetNo. 325. Using other, non-approvedantifreeze/corrosion inhibitors may cause

damage to the coolant system and reducethe engine's service life.

Check the antifreeze/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the coolant every sixmonths.When the coolant is being renewed, thecoolant must contain 50 % by volume ofanticorrosion/antifreeze agent. This providesantifreeze protection down to–34.6 ‡(–37 †).Do not exceed a proportion of55 % by volume (antifreeze protection downto approximately –49.0 ‡ (–45 †)),otherwise heat dissipation is reduced.If there is a loss of coolant, do not replenishwith water only, but also add an approvedcorrosion inhibitor/antifreeze agent. Thewater in the coolant must meet certainrequirements, which are often fulfilled bydrinking water. If the water quality is notsufficient, you must treat the water.Observe the MB Specifications for ServiceProducts, Sheet Number 325.You can obtain further information from anyauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

160 Service productsOp

erat

ion

Change intervals for coolant

Service product Maintenanceinterval

Product name/number MBSheetNo.

Coolant, antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor

every sixthmaintenanceinterval orevery 15 years

EURO Peak Coolant/Antifreeze,OLD WORLD INDUSTRIES

325.0

Zerex G05,The Valvoline Company

325.0

Zerex G48,The Valvoline Company

325.0

Glysantin G05, BASF AG 325.0

RefrigerantThe air-conditioning system uses the refrigerant R-134a. This refrigerant does not damage theozone layer.You can obtain further information from any authorized Sprinter Dealer.

Service product Maintenanceinterval

Product name/number MBSheetNo.

Refrigerant — Refrigerant R-134a 361.0

Cleaning and care

General notesRegular care serves to maintain the value ofyour vehicle.It is advisable to use care products from thedistributor named on the inside of the frontcover. They are designed specifically forSprinters and represent the state of the art.These care products are available from anyauthorized Sprinter Dealer.Do not cover the surface of the radiator or theradiator grill, e.g. with a protective screen.Doing so could cause the engine diagnosticsto record false or incorrect data. Therecording of specific engine diagnostic datais legally prescribed and must therefore becorrect, clear and comprehensible at alltimes.

G WarningAlways keep care products sealed and out ofthe reach of children.Always follow the instructions for use of thecare products.Do not use fuel as a cleaning agent. Fuel ishighly flammable and constitutes a healthhazard.

%Environmental noteWash the vehicle only at a properly equippedwash bay. Dispose of empty containers andused cleaning materials in anenvironmentally-responsible manner.

Cleaning and care 161

Oper

atio

n

Z

G WarningNever use openings in the bodywork as steps.You may otherwise damage the vehicle or loseyour footing and injure yourself or others.If you have to clean the upper areas of thevehicle, always use suitable ladders or othersecure climbing aids.

G WarningDirty or iced-up steps and entrances create arisk of slipping or falling.Keep steps, entrances and footwear free fromdirt (e.g. mud, clay, snow and ice).

Cleaning the interior of the vehicle

Seat belts! Observe the following notes on cleaning

the seat belts:RRemove any stains or dirt immediately.

This will avoid residue or damage.RDo not bleach or dye the seat belts. This

could impair the function of the seatbelts.RDo not dry the seat belts in direct

sunlight or at temperatures above176 ‡ (80 †).

Steering wheel boss and cockpit

G Warning!When cleaning the steering wheel boss anddashboard, do not use cockpit sprays orcleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaningagents containing solvents cause the surfaceto become porous, and as a result, plasticparts may break away and be thrown aroundthe interior when an air bag is deployed, whichmay result in severe injuries.

Use a damp, clean and lint-free cloth to cleanthe plastic components and the cockpit. Ifparticularly dirty, use a mild detergent.

! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths anddo not scrub. You could otherwise scratchor damage the surfaces.

Radio and monitor displayX Switch off the radio or rear-view camera

monitor and let it cool.X Clean the display surface with a

commercially available microfiber clothand cleaner for TFT/LCD displays.

X After drying, polish the display surface witha dry microfiber cloth, applying only lightpressure.

! Do not use dry, rough or hard cloths orabrasive products, solvents or cleaningagents containing solvents. Do not scrub.Only apply light pressure when cleaning.Otherwise, you will damage the displaysurface, as it is sensitive to pressure andsusceptible to scratches.

Windows! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,

solvents or cleaning agents containingsolvents to clean the inside of the windows.Clean the inside of the windows with adamp cloth or a commercially availableglass cleaner.Do not touch the inside of the rear and sidewindows with hard objects, e.g. an icescraper or ring. You could otherwisedamage the windows or the rear windowdefroster.

Cleaning the exterior of the vehicle

General notesScratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused by neglector inadequate care cannot always becompletely remedied. In this case, visit aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. thenearest authorized Sprinter Dealer.

162 Cleaning and careOp

erat

ion

! In order to avoid consequential damage,repair damage caused by loose chippingsand remove any dirt immediately, inparticular:Rinsect remainsRbird droppingsRflash rustRtree resinRoils and greaseRfuelsRtar stainsRsalt residueWash your vehicle more frequently if it getsdirty more often.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod right after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. Generally, park thevehicle at operating temperature aftercleaning.

PARKTRONIC sensors

PARKTRONIC sensors (example: front bumper, leftside of vehicle): Sensors

Clean all the sensors in the front and rearbumpers with water, shampoo and a softcloth.

! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths anddo not scrub. You will otherwise scratch ordamage the sensors.

If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher or steam cleaner, observe theinformation provided by the manufacturerregarding the distance to be maintainedbetween the vehicle and the nozzle of thepower washer.

Rear-view camera lens

Rear-view camera in the middle of the roof abovethe high-mounted brake lamp: Rear-view camera lens; Microphone openings

Make sure not to put any wax on the lens ofrear-view camera : when waxing thevehicle. If necessary, remove the wax usingwater, shampoo and a soft cloth.

! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths anddo not scrub. You could otherwise scratchor damage the lens of the rear-viewcamera.When cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure or steam cleaner, observe aminimum distance of 1.6 ft (50 cm) to therear-view camera.To avoid damaging the rear-view camera,do not aim directly at the rear-view cameraor the microphone openings on the bottomof the rear-view camera.

Outside of the windshield and wiperblades

G WarningBefore cleaning the windshield or wiperblades, turn the key to 0 in the ignition lock.

Cleaning and care 163

Oper

atio

n

Z

The windshield wipers may otherwise moveand injure you.

X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock or remove it.

! Do not fold the windshield wipers awayfrom the windshield unless the hood isclosed. Otherwise, you could damage thehood.

X Fold the wiper arms away from thewindshield until you feel them engage.

X Clean the windshield and the wiper blades.X Fold the windshield wipers back again

before switching on the ignition.

HeadlampsWipe the headlamp lenses with a wet sponge.

! Only use washer fluid which is suitable forplastic lamp lenses. Unsuitable washerfluid could damage the plastic lamp lensesof the headlamps.Therefore, do not use:Rdry clothsRabrasive productsRsolventsRcleaning products containing solventsYou could otherwise scratch or damage thesurface of the lenses.

Sliding doorClean the contact plates and the tips of thecontact pins around the sliding door withwater, shampoo and a soft cloth.Do not oil or grease the contact plates andcontact pins.Remove foreign objects.

Power washers! Maintain the following minimum

distances between the high-pressurenozzle and the object being cleaned:Rapproximately 2.2 ft (70 cm) when using

round-jet nozzlesRapproximately 1 ft (30 cm) when using

25° flat-spray jets and concentrated-power jets

Keep the water jet moving while cleaning.To avoid causing damage, do not point thewater jet directly at:Rdoor jointsRbrake hosesRelectrical componentsRplug connectionsRsealsRthe drive train, especially not at the

intermediate bearing of the propellershaftRthe rear-view camera or the microphone

opening on the bottom of the rear-viewcamera. Keep a minimum distance of1.6 ft (50 cm).

G WarningDo not use round-jet nozzles to clean the tires.The pulsating water jet can cause damage tothe substructure of the tires that is not visiblefrom the outside. This type of damage onlybecomes noticeable at a much later stage andcan cause the tires to burst. This could causeyou to lose control of the vehicle, resulting inan accident and injuring yourself or others.Replace damaged tires immediately.

Automatic car washIf the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it beforeyou put it through an automatic car wash.

G WarningIf a wax preservative is applied after thevehicle is washed, you should remove the wax

164 Cleaning and careOp

erat

ion

from the windshield and the wiper blades toprevent smearing. Smears impair the driver'sview, and their effect is made worse inconditions where visibility is poor (e.g. glare,mist, darkness, snow). You may therefore failto recognize dangers, or not recognize themin time, and thereby cause an accident.

! Make sure that the automatic car wash issuitable for the size of the vehicle.Before washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash, fold in the exterior mirrors andremove the radio/telephone antenna.Otherwise, the exterior mirror, antenna orthe vehicle itself could be damaged.Make sure that the antenna is installed andthat the exterior mirrors are fully folded outagain when you leave the automatic carwash.

! Make sure that the side windows arecompletely closed, that the ventilation/heating is switched off and that thewindshield wiper switch is set to 0.Otherwise, the rain/light sensor could beactivated, triggering unintended wipermovements. This can cause damage to thevehicle.

After putting the vehicle through anautomatic car wash, wipe off wax from:Rthe rear-view camera lens (Y page 163)Rthe windshield and the wiper blades. This

prevents smears and reduces wiping noisewhich can be caused by residue on thewindshield.

Cleaning the engine! Water must not enter intake or ventilation

openings. When cleaning with highpressure water or steam cleaners, thespray must not be aimed directly atelectrical components or the terminals ofelectrical lines.

Preserve the engine after the engine hasbeen cleaned. Protect the belt drive systemfrom exposure to the preservative agent.

Alloy wheelsClean the alloy wheels regularly.

! Do not use any acidic or alkaline cleaningagents. They can cause corrosion on thewheel bolts (wheel nuts) or the retainersprings for the wheel-balancing weights.

After driving off-road or onconstruction sites

G WarningDirt on the vehicle can affect road andoperating safety.It can specifically result in the following dangers:Stone impact. Stones trapped between thetires can be thrown out while driving. Thiscould injure other road users or damage othervehicles (especially windscreens).Risk of skidding. Dirt and mud on the tires/on the road reduce the grip of the tires on theroad. This especially applies when the surfaceis wet. The vehicle could then start to skid.Risk of injury. Dirt and mud on the steps andentrance can make the steps unsafe. Thiscould cause you to slip off the steps and beinjured.For this reason, you should always clean yourvehicle carefully after driving off-road or onconstruction sites before driving on publicroads. Observe the corresponding safetynotices in this chapter if you use a powerwasher or an automatic car wash to clean yourvehicle.

X Clean the vehicle, paying special attentionto the following:RLighting systemRWindows and exterior mirrorsRAccess steps and entrances

Cleaning and care 165

Oper

atio

n

Z

RGrab handlesRWheels, tires and wheel archesRLicense plates

X Remove any trapped foreign objects, e.g.stones.

X Check the wheel suspension for damage.

G WarningDirty brake discs and brake pads/linings canimpair braking performance (up to the pointof total failure). This could lead to an accident.Check the brake system for operating safetyby testing the brakes before driving thevehicle on public roads.In the event of impaired braking, stop thevehicle while paying attention to the trafficconditions and contact a qualified specialistworkshop which has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools for the work required.For this, we recommend an authorizedSprinter Dealer. In particular, work relevant tosafety or on safety-related systems must becarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

After driving in mud, sand, water or in similarconditions:Rcheck the brake system for operating

safety.Rclean the wheels, chassis and brake

system.Rcheck the wheels, chassis and brake

system for damage. Have any damagerepaired at a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. an authorized Sprinter Dealer.

Maintenance

General notesThe scope and regularity of the maintenancework primarily depend on the often diverseoperating conditions.The vehicle Maintenance Booklet describesthe scope and frequency of maintenancework and contains additional notes on the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty and on serviceproducts.Specialist knowledge beyond the scope ofthese Operating Instructions is required whencarrying out testing and maintenance work.Have this work carried out by trainedpersonnel.

i Maintenance services must be carried outin accordance with the provisions andrecommendations in the MaintenanceBooklet.Not doing so could void the warranty claimand lead to refusal of goodwill gesturesafter the manufacturer has submitted adamage report.

G WarningBefore carrying out maintenance operationsand repairs, you must read the sectionsreferring to maintenance operations andrepairs:Rthis includes relevant sections of the

technical documentation, such as theoperating instructions and workshopinformation.Ryou should also familiarize yourself with the

legal requirements, such as work safetyregulations and accident preventionmeasures.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangersand thereby injure yourself or others.You must secure the vehicle on axle stands ofsufficient load bearing capacity if work isbeing carried out beneath it.Never use the vehicle jack instead of stands.The jack could slip and the vehicle could drop.This could result in serious injury to yourselfor others.The vehicle jack is intended only to raise thevehicle for a short time.Always have maintenance work carried out ata qualified specialist workshop. The workshopmust have the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired. For this, we recommend an

166 MaintenanceOp

erat

ion

authorized Sprinter Dealer. All work relevantto safety or on safety-related systems mustbe carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Observe the notes on parts in the "Technicaldata" section (Y page 276).%Environmental noteObserve measures to protect theenvironment when working on the vehicle.You must observe the legal requirementswhen disposing of service products, e.g.engine oil. This also includes all components,e.g. filters, which have come into contact withservice products.Any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Sprinter Dealer, can provideinformation about this.Dispose of empty containers, cleaning clothsand care products in an environmentally-responsible manner. Comply with theinstructions for use of the care products.Do not run the engine for longer thannecessary when the vehicle is stationary.

Active Service System (ASSYST)The ASSYST service indicator informs you ofthe next service due date.A service that is due is displayed about amonth in advance. A message is thendisplayed while the vehicle is in motion orwhile the ignition is switched on.

i Periods when the battery is disconnectedwill not be recorded by ASSYST. To makesure that you have the vehicle serviced atthe correct time, you should thereforesubtract periods when the battery isdisconnected from the days shown.The service indicator does not provideinformation about the oil level. The serviceindicator should therefore not be confusedwith the 5 engine oil level display.

i The service due date is displayed in daysor miles (kilometers), depending on thetotal distance driven.

The symbols or letters in the service indicatorshow the service due.¯ or A for a minor service° or B for a major service

Service due date indicator

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsThe following messages may be displayed:R¯ Service A in ... daysR¯ Service A in ... mi (km)R¯ Service A due nowVehicles without steering wheel buttonsThe following messages may be displayed:R¯ for service AR° for service BAdditionally you will see the remainingdistance in miles (mi) or kilometers (km) or theremaining time in days (d).

Service due date exceededA qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Sprinter Dealer, resets the serviceindicator when the service has been carriedout.

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsIf you have missed the service due date, oneof the following messages appears in thedisplay:R¯ Service A overdue by ... daysR¯ Service A overdue by ... mi

(km)Additionally a warning tone sounds.

Vehicles without steering wheel buttonsIf the service due date has been exceeded,ten seconds after switching on the ignitionthe ¯ or ° symbol flashes for the

Maintenance 167

Oper

atio

n

Z

service. You will also see a minus sign beforethe service due date.

Calling up the service due dateX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.The display is activated.

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsX Press the V or U button on the

steering wheel repeatedly until you see thestandard display (Y page 77).

X Press the & or * button on thesteering wheel repeatedly until you see thefollowing in the display, for example:R¯ Service A in ... daysR¯ Service A in ... mi (km)

Vehicles without steering wheel buttonsX Press the 4 menu button on the

instrument cluster repeatedly until the¯ or ° symbol for the serviceappears.Additionally you will see the remainingdistance in miles (mi) or kilometers (km) orthe remaining time in days (d).

Hood

Opening the hood

G WarningDo not pull the release lever while the vehicleis in motion. If you do so, the hood may openup and block your view.

G Warning!There is a risk of injury if the hood is open,even if the engine is not running.Some engine components can become veryhot.To avoid the risk of burns, only touch thosecomponents described in the Operator'sManual and observe the relevant safety notes.

G WarningThe radiator fan between the radiator and theengine can start automatically, even if the keyhas been removed from the ignition lock.Keep away from the area of rotation of the fanblades. You could otherwise be injured.The electronic injector control operates athigh voltage. For this reason, you must nevertouch injection system components while:Rthe engine is running.Rthe engine is being started.Rthe ignition is switched on.You could otherwise receive an electric shockand be severely or fatally injured.

Hood release lever in the driver's footwellX Pull release handle :.

The hood is released.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

168 MaintenanceOp

erat

ion

X Push hood catch release handle ;upwards.

X Swing the hood upwards until support strut= engages and the hood is supported.

Closing the hood

G WarningWhen closing the hood be careful that nobodybecomes trapped.

X Lift the hood slightly.X Press support strut = towards the back.

! When you press the support strut back,make sure that you do not press it againstthe detent position and cause it to bend.

X Lower the hood and let it drop shut from aheight of approximately 1 ft (30 cm).The hood engages audibly. If the hood canbe raised slightly, it is not properlyengaged.

X If the hood is not properly engaged, open itonce more and allow it to drop shut from aslightly greater height.

! Do not use your hands to push the hooddown. You could damage it otherwise.

Maintenance points under the hood

: Coolant tank cap (Y page 169); Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) filler neck

cap4(Y page 143)= Engine oil filler neck cap (Y page 171)? Brake fluid reservoir cap (Y page 170)A Washer fluid reservoir cap (Y page 171)

Coolant levelOnly add coolant with the vehicle standing ona level surface and with the engine switchedoff. The coolant temperature must havedropped below 122 ‡ (50 †).

G WarningWhen opening the coolant expansion tank,there is a risk of scalding from hot coolantspraying out. The cooling system and thecoolant expansion tank are pressurized whenthe engine is at normal operatingtemperature. Wear gloves and eye protection.

4 Only on Cargo Van/Passenger Van.

Maintenance 169

Oper

atio

n

Z

Only open the coolant expansion tank whenthe coolant temperature is below 122 ‡(50 †).

G WarningCoolant contains glycol and is therefore toxic.Do not swallow the coolant. See a doctorimmediately if you swallow coolant.Make sure that coolant does not come intocontact with skin, eyes or clothing. In case ofcontact with eyes, rinse immediately withplenty of clean water. Clean affected areas ofskin and clothing with soap and waterimmediately. Change any affected clothingimmediately.

X Slowly turn cap : counter-clockwise andallow the excess pressure to escape.

X Turn cap : further and remove it.X Add coolant until it is at the MAX mark.

Observe the correct coolant mixture ratioand the required water quality(Y page 160).

X Replace cap : and tighten it until the stop.

! Check the cooling and heating systemregularly for leaks.If a large quantity of coolant is lost, havethe cause traced and rectified at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedSprinter Dealer.

Clutch mechanism and brake system

G WarningBrake fluid is hazardous to health. Do notswallow brake fluid. See a doctor immediatelyif you swallow brake fluid.Make sure that brake fluid does not come intocontact with skin, clothing or eyes. Rinseaffected areas with plenty of clean water andconsult a doctor if necessary.Always wear gloves and eye protection whentopping up brake fluid.

Store brake fluid only in the original closedcontainer and keep it out of the reach ofchildren. Comply with safety regulationswhen handling brake fluid.

G WarningIf the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low,vapor pockets may form in the brake systemwhen the brakes are subjected to a heavy load(e.g. on long downhill stretches). This wouldimpair braking efficiency. The vehicle'sstopping distance may then be longer. Thisincreases the risk of an accident.Have the brake fluid renewed every two years.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in theengine compartment.Check the brake fluid level:Rregularly, e.g. weekly or when refuelingRonly with the vehicle standing on a level

surface and with the engine switched off

! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic andrubber. If paint, plastic or rubber has comeinto contact with brake fluid, rinse withwater immediately.

: Brake fluid reservoir cap

The brake fluid level must be between theMIN and MAX marks.

! If the brake fluid does not reach theMIN mark, the vehicle's hydraulic systemcould be faulty. Do not add brake fluidunder any circumstances. This will notrectify the malfunction.Do not drive any further.

170 MaintenanceOp

erat

ion

Have the system checked immediately at aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. at anauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

i There is usually a notice in the enginecompartment to remind you when the nextbrake fluid change is due.

Windshield washer system/headlamp cleaning system

Add windshield washer concentrate to thewasher fluid all year round.

G WarningWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable.Fire, naked flames and smoking are thereforeprohibited when you are handling windshieldwasher concentrate.

! Only use washer fluid concentrate whichis suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitablewasher fluid concentrate could damage theplastic lenses of the headlamps.

Adapt the mixing ratio to the ambienttemperature. If the temperature is abovefreezing, use Summerwash to preventsmearing. If there is a risk of frost, useWinterwash to prevent the water fromfreezing on the windshield.The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity ofapproximately 6.3 US qt (6.0 l).

X Mix the washer fluid to the appropriatemixing ratio in a container beforehand.

X Remove washer fluid reservoir cap :.

X Add washer fluid.X Replace cap :.

Engine oil levelYou will find information about engine oilconsumption in the "Driving tips" section(Y page 141).Check the engine oil level on a regular basis,e.g. weekly or each time you refuel.

Checking the engine oil level in thedisplayDepending on the vehicle's equipment, invehicles with a diesel engine, the engine oillevel is shown in the display.Only check the engine oil level when theengine is at operating temperature.X Park the vehicle on a level surface.X Switch off the engine.X Wait for five minutes.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.The display is activated.

i If at extremely low temperatures noengine oil level is displayed after fiveminutes, repeat the engine oil level checkafter a further five minutes.If an oil level reading is still not displayed,check the engine oil level with the dipstick.Have the oil level display checked at aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. at anauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

Vehicles without steering wheel buttonsX Press the 4 menu button on the

instrument cluster repeatedly until thedisplay shows the 1 symbol.The --:-- display flashes while the oil levelis being measured.

Maintenance 171

Oper

atio

n

Z

The following messages may be displayed:

1

OK X Do not add oil.

– 1.0 qts X Add the amount of oilshown (Y page 173).

X Check the engine oillevel again after a fewminutes.

– 1.5 qts– 2.0 qts

HI X Have excess oilremoved. The oil level istoo high.

Measurement units in the display:Rqts USA onlyRltr Canada only

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsX Press the Ë button on the instrument

cluster (Y page 70).The following message is displayed for theduration of the measurement process:4Engine oil level Measuring in progress

The following messages may be displayed:

1

Engine oil level OK

X Do not add oil.

Engine oil Add 1.0 quart

X Add the amount of oilshown (Y page 173).

X Check the engine oillevel again after a fewminutes.

Engine oil Add 1.5 quartsEngine oil Add 2.0 quarts

Engine oil level Reduce oil level

X Have excess oilremoved. The oil level istoo high.

Eng. oil lev. Turn ignition on for level

X Turn the key to position2 in the ignition lock.

Observe wait. period

X Repeat themeasurement afterabout five minutes if theengine is at normaloperating temperature.

X Repeat themeasurement afterabout 30 minutes if theengine is not at normaloperating temperature.

Engine oil level Not when eng. running

X Switch off the engineand wait forapproximately fiveminutes, if the engine isat normal operatingtemperature, beforeperforming themeasurement.

Measurement units in the display:Rquart(s) USA onlyRliter(s) Canada only

Checking the engine oil level using thedipstickVehicles with a red oil dipstick: only check theoil level when the engine is at normaloperating temperature.X Park the vehicle on a level surface.X Switch off the engine.X Wait for five minutes.

172 MaintenanceOp

erat

ion

Vehicles with a yellow oil dipstick: only checkthe oil level when the engine is cold.X Park the vehicle on a level surface.

X Pull out oil dipstick :.X Wipe oil dipstick : using a lint-free cloth.X Reinsert oil dipstick : into the dipstick

tube to the stop and remove it again.X Check the oil level on oil dipstick :.

The oil level must be between MIN mark= and MAX mark ;.The difference in quantity betweenmarks ; and = is approximately2 US quarts (2 l).

X Add engine oil if necessary.

Adding engine oilYou will find information about approvedengine oils in the "Service products" section(Y page 156).X Unscrew cap ? of the filler neck and

remove it.

! The alternator is located below the engineoil filler neck. If engine oil spills onto thealternator, there is a danger of alternatordamage. Be very careful when addingengine oil.

X Add the amount of oil required.

! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level isabove the MAX mark on the dipstick, toomuch oil has been added. This can lead to

engine damage or catalytic converterdamage. Have excess oil siphoned off.

%Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmfulto the environment.X Place cap ? on the filler neck and tighten.

Air filter for the rear-compartment airconditioning

An increased amount of sand or dust maycollect in the air filter when you drive on dustyor sandy roads.

Air filter in the roof in the rear compartment

! If the air filter is visibly dirty, it must becleaned or replaced. The dirt can otherwisedamage the air-conditioning system. Suchdamage is not covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

For this reason, check the air filter regularlyfor visible dirt.X To remove the air filter: carefully prize

cover : out of recesses ; and remove.X Remove the filter mat.X To clean the filter mat: wash the filter mat

with clear water.X Leave the filter mat to dry.

i The filter mat must not be cleaned or driedin a machine.

Maintenance 173

Oper

atio

n

Z

X To install the air filter: insert the filtermat.

X Put cover : on.

Vehicle assembliesCheck the assemblies regularly for leaks. Iffluid is being lost (e.g. there are oil stainswhere the vehicle is parked), have the causefound and rectified immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedSprinter Dealer.%Environmental noteWhen used improperly, service products areharmful to the environment.Do not allow service products to enter thesewage system, surface waters, ground wateror soil.

Replacing the wiper blades

G WarningIf the windshield wipers are set to intermittentwipe or the rain/light sensor is active, thewindshield wipers could start moving at anytime and injure you or others.Always remove the key from the ignition lockbefore replacing the wiper blades.

G WarningWiper blades are wear parts. Change thewiper blades every six months, ideally in thespring and fall. Otherwise, the windshield andrear window will not be wiped properly. Thismay prevent you from observing the trafficconditions, thereby causing an accident.

! Do not open the hood when a wiper armis folded away from the windshield.Otherwise, you could damage the hood.Do not fold the wiper arms back onto thewindshield without wiper blades fitted asthis could scratch the windshield.

! Only touch the windshield wiper where itconnects to the wiper arm. You couldotherwise damage the wiper blade inserts.

RemovingX Apply the parking brake.X On vehicles with automatic transmission,

move the selector lever to position P.X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition

lock.

Front wiper arm with windshield wiperX Fold wiper arm = away from the

windshield.X Set windshield wiper : at right angles to

the wiper arm.X Press two retaining clips ; together in the

direction of the arrow and swing windshieldwiper : away from wiper arm =.

X Pull windshield wiper : up and out of theretainer on wiper arm =.

InstallingX Slide windshield wiper : into the retainer

on wiper arm =.X Press windshield wiper : onto wiper arm= until you hear retaining clips ; engage.

X Fold wiper arm = onto the windshieldagain.

174 MaintenanceOp

erat

ion

Batteries

G WarningRisk of explosion.Explosive oxyhydrogen isproduced when batteriesare being charged. Onlycharge batteries in well-ventilated areas.Risk of explosion. Avoidcreating sparks. Avoidnaked flames and do notsmoke in the vicinity of thebattery.Battery acid is caustic.Wear acid-proof protectivegloves. If skin or clothesare splashed with acid,neutralize the splashesimmediately with soapywater or an acidneutralizer, and then cleanthe affected areas withwater.Wear eye protection. Whenmixing water and acid, theliquid can splash into youreyes. Rinse acid splashesto the eyes immediatelywith clean water andcontact a doctorimmediately.Keep children at a safedistance. Children are notable to assess the dangersposed by batteries andacid.When handling batteries,observe the safetyprecautions and specialprotective measurescontained in theseOperating Instructions.

%Environmental noteBatteries contain pollutants. It isagainst the law to dispose of themwith the household garbage. Theymust be collected separately andrecycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally responsiblemanner. Take discharged batteriesto a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. an authorized Sprinter Dealer,or to a special collection point forold batteries.

In order for the batteries to achieve theirmaximum possible service life, they mustalways be sufficiently charged.Have the battery charge checked morefrequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it parked up for alengthy period.If you intend to leave your vehicle parked upfor a long period, seek advice from anauthorized Sprinter Dealer or switch off theelectrical system using the battery isolatingswitch (Y page 87).Your vehicle may be equipped with twobatteries, depending on the equipmentversion:Ra starter battery in the battery case in the

driver's footwellRan additional battery in the engine

compartmentHave the batteries removed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop which has the necessaryspecialist knowledge and tools to carry outthe work required. We recommend that youuse an authorized Sprinter Dealer for thispurpose.

Maintenance 175

Oper

atio

n

Z

Disconnecting the battery

G WarningThere is a risk of a short circuit if the positiveterminal of the connected battery comes intocontact with any part of the vehicle. This couldcause the flammable gas mix to ignite. Youand others could be seriously injured.RDo not place any metal objects or tools on

the batteries.RWhen disconnecting the batteries, always

disconnect the negative terminal clampbefore the positive terminal clamp.RWhen connecting the batteries, always

connect the positive terminal clamp beforethe negative terminal clamp.RDo not disconnect or connect the batteries

when the engine is running.

! Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition lock before you loosen ordisconnect the terminal clamps. You mayotherwise destroy electronic componentssuch as the alternator.Always disconnect the starter battery in thebattery case in the driver's footwell first.

! Always disconnect the battery inthe order described below. Never swap theterminal clamps. You may otherwisedamage the vehicle electronics.

X Switch off all electrical consumers.

Disconnecting the starter batteryThe starter battery is located in the batterycase in the driver's footwell.

Removing/installing the floor covering inthe driver's footwell

X To remove: remove screws = and take offtrim ;.

X Remove floor covering :.X To install: replace floor covering : in the

driver's footwell.

G WarningFree movement of the pedals must not beimpaired. This would otherwise jeopardize theoperating and road safety of the vehicle.Make sure that the floor covering is pushedunder the carrier of the accelerator pedal andcannot slide between the carrier and theaccelerator pedal when you install it.This would otherwise prevent you fromdepressing the accelerator pedal completely,thereby restricting your vehicle'sacceleration, e.g. during overtaking.

X Slide floor covering : underneath thecarrier for the accelerator pedal and alignit at the base of the driver's seat and at thedoor sill.Make sure that the floor covering does notobstruct the accelerator pedal.

X Put trim ; in place and screw the screws= back in.

176 MaintenanceOp

erat

ion

Removing the battery cover in the driver'sfootwell

X Remove screws ; and slide cover : inthe direction of the arrow.The screws must protrude beyond therecesses.

X Remove cover : upwards.

Starter battery in the driver's footwellX First loosen and remove the negative

terminal clamp so that it is no longer incontact with the terminal.

X Remove the cover from the positiveterminal.

X Loosen the positive terminal clamp and foldit up to the side together with the pre-fusebox.

Disconnecting the additional battery

Additional battery in the engine compartmentX Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Open the hood (Y page 168).X First loosen and remove the negative

terminal clamp so that it is no longer incontact with the terminal.

X Remove the cover from the positiveterminal.

X Loosen and remove the positive terminalclamp.

Removing the battery

Starter battery

X Disconnect the battery (Y page 176).X Pull breather hose with connector

bracket ; from connection : on thedegassing cover.

Maintenance 177

Oper

atio

n

Z

X Loosen the bolts holding retainer =, whichprevents the battery from moving around.

X Pull retainer = upwards and slide thebattery out of its anchorage in the directionof travel.

X Fold the bar upwards and remove thebattery from the battery case.

Additional battery in the enginecompartmentX Disconnect the battery (Y page 177).X Loosen the bolts holding the retainer that

prevents the battery from moving around.X Remove the battery holder and take out the

battery.

Charging the battery

G WarningOnly charge the battery in a well-ventilatedarea. As the battery is being charged, gasescan escape and generate minor explosions,which can injure you and others or may cause

damage to the paintwork or acid corrosion onthe vehicle.There is a risk of acid burns during thecharging process due to the gases whichescape from the battery. Do not, therefore,lean over the battery while it is beingrecharged.

X Recharge the removed battery. Observethe notes in the operating instructions foryour battery charger.

X Follow the above steps in the reverse orderto install the battery again.

! Only charge the installed battery with abattery charger that has been tested andapproved by the distributor named on theinside front cover. This device allows thebattery to be charged when it is installed inthe vehicle. The vehicle's electronicssystem may otherwise be damaged.

i It is also possible to charge the starterbattery using the jump-starting connectionpoint in the engine compartment(Y page 247).

Reconnecting the battery! Always connect the battery in the order

described below. Never mix up the terminalclamp disconnection/connection orderand never mix up the terminal clamps. Youmay otherwise damage the vehicleelectronics.

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Connect the positive terminal clamp.X Attach the cover to the positive terminal.X Connect the negative terminal clamp.

i After the battery has been reconnected,you must reset the side windows(Y page 61).

178 MaintenanceOp

erat

ion

Battery care! Please always observe the following

notes:Rdirty battery clamps and battery surfaces

cause leak currents, which lead to thebatteries discharging. Always keep thebattery terminals and battery surfacesclean and dry. Grease the batteryterminals, particularly the terminalundersides, with a light coating of acid-resistant grease.Rcleaning agents containing fuel corrode

the battery housing. Only clean thebattery housing with commerciallyavailable cleaning agents.Ronly clean the batteries when the caps

are screwed on. Dirt may otherwise enterthe battery cells and damage the battery.Rthe breathers in the caps and the cell

ventilation tubes must be open.Otherwise, gas cannot escape. Unscrewblocked breathers and clean them with asuitable tool such as a piece of wire. Ifyou do not unscrew the caps for cleaning,there is a risk of short circuit.Rregularly check the battery terminals and

the fastening of the negative cable to thechassis to ensure that they are firmlyseated.Rif batteries are not being used, you

should charge them once a month.

Maintenance 179

Oper

atio

n

Z

180

Vehicle equipment ............................ 182Where will I find...? ........................... 182Troubleshooting ................................ 187Engine ................................................ 221Wheels and tires ............................... 221Electrical system .............................. 233Batteries for the remote control ..... 245Automatic transmission ................... 246Jump starting, tow-starting andtowing away ...................................... 247

181

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Vehicle equipment

i Diese Betriebsanleitung beschreibt alleModelle, Serien- und SonderausstattungenIhres Fahrzeugs, die zum Zeitpunkt desRedaktionsschlusses dieserBetriebsanleitung erhältlich waren.Länderspezifische Abweichungen sindmöglich. Beachten Sie, dass Ihr Fahrzeugnicht mit allen beschriebenen Funktionenausgestattet sein könnte. Dies betrifft auchsicherheitsrelevante Systeme undFunktionen.

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit and emergencyequipment

The jack and the vehicle tool kit are locatedin the co-driver's footwell.

G WarningTo reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuriesand to avoid damage to the vehicle, observethe following:Rthe jack is designed only to raise the vehicle

for a short time, e.g. while a wheel is beingchanged.It is not designed to enable work to becarried out underneath the vehicle.Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, level

surface.Rnever change a wheel on uphill or downhill

gradients.Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.Rmake sure that no persons are present in

the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is

raised.

Rmake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in(30 mm).Rif you intend to work under the vehicle,

place the vehicle on stands.

X To unlock: turn quick-release fastener :counter-clockwise or clockwise 2.

X Remove the cover.X To lock: press quick-release lock : down

until it engages.

X If necessary, use tool5= for the DEF tankfuel filler cap to remove the fixture.

X Remove vehicle tool kit B.X Pull up quick-release lever ? and unhook

the retaining strap of jack A.X Lift jack A upwards out of the holder.

i When stowing away the jack, place it inthe holder as shown in the illustration.Make sure that the retaining strap of thejack is hooked in and tensioned.

5 Chassis only.

182 Where will I find...?Pr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Warning lampThe warning lamp is behind the cover in thestorage compartment of the driver's door.

1 Locked2 Unlocked

X Unlock quick-release fasteners 2 and foldout the cover.

X Take warning lamp = out of the retainer.

Warning triangle

Warning triangles at the back of the driver's seatbase: Warning trianglesX Pull warning triangles : up and out of the

holder.

Wheel chock

Cargo Van/Passenger Van

Wheel chock in the load/passenger compartmentX Pull restraining cable : down slightly and

then remove it from bracket ;.X Remove the chock.i When stowing it away, make sure that the

chock is secured in the retainer by therestraining cable.

Where will I find...? 183

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Chassis Cab

Wheel chock on the left-hand side of the vehicleX Pull the retainer spring downwards and

remove the chock.i When stowing it away, make sure that the

chock is secured in the retainer by theretainer springs.

First-aid kitThe first-aid kit is located in the stowagecompartment in the co-driver's door.

1 Locked2 Unlocked

= First-aid kitX Unlock quick-release fasteners 2 and fold

out the cover.

i Check the expiration date of the first-aidkit annually, and replace the contents whennecessary.

Fire extinguisher

Fire extinguisher at the front of the base of the co-driver's seatX Pull shackles ; upwards.X Take fire extinguisher : out of its holder.

i Please read the instructions on the fireextinguisher carefully and familiarizeyourself with its operation.

Tire sealantThe Premium tire sealant is located in thestowage compartment in the right-hand doorsill.

184 Where will I find...?Pr

actic

al a

dvic

e

: Catch spring; Electric air pump= Premium tire sealant

Spare wheelIf you are replacing the tires on the vehicle,you may use the spare wheel as a road wheelprovided that:Rthe tire is no more than six years old.Rthe wheel and tire are of the prescribed

design.The spare wheel is located in a spare wheelbracket under the rear of the vehicle.

! Check the spare wheel regularly to seethat it is secure and has the prescribed tirepressure.

Cargo Van/Passenger Van

X Open the tailgate.X Apply a screwdriver to recesses ; and

then pry off covers :.X Using the lug wrench from the vehicle tool

kit (Y page 182), unscrew the now visiblebolts by approximately 20 turns counter-clockwise.

X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket A andunhook left-hand safety catch =.

X Assemble the pump lever for the jack andslide it into sleeve ? on spare wheelbracket A.

X Raise spare wheel bracket A with thepump lever and unhook right-hand safetycatch =.

X Slowly lower spare wheel bracket A downto the ground.

X Lift spare wheel bracket A slightly and pullthe pump lever out of sleeve ?.

Where will I find...? 185

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

X Use the pump lever to lever the spare wheelbeyond the rear of the spare wheel bracket.

X Carefully remove the spare wheel from thebracket.

G WarningWhen the spare wheel is removed, the centerof gravity changes due to the heavy weight ofthe wheel. The spare wheel could slip off ortip and cause injury to yourself or others. Pullthe spare wheel out carefully. Take care notto trap your fingers when lifting out the sparewheel.

Cab chassis

X Loosen fender nuts = manually and thenremove them.

X Loosen nuts ; as far as the thread end.X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket ? and

unhook left-hand safety catch :.X Assemble the pump lever for the jack and

slide it into sleeve on the right-hand side ofspare wheel bracket ?.

X Raise spare wheel bracket ? with thepump lever and unhook right-hand safetycatch :.

X Slowly lower spare wheel bracket ? downto the ground.

X Lift spare wheel bracket ? slightly and pullthe pump lever out of sleeve.

X Use the pump lever to lever the spare wheelbeyond the rear of the spare wheel bracket.

X Carefully remove the spare wheel from thebracket.

G WarningWhen the spare wheel is removed, the centerof gravity changes due to the heavy weight ofthe wheel. The spare wheel could slip off ortip and cause injury to yourself or others. Pullthe spare wheel out carefully. Take care notto trap your fingers when lifting out the sparewheel.

186 Where will I find...?Pr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Troubleshooting

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

G WarningThe operating safety of your vehicle could be jeopardized if maintenance work is carried outincorrectly. As a result, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition,the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do.Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The qualifiedspecialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required. We recommend visiting an authorized Sprinter Dealer. In particular, work relevantto safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

d The yellow ASR/ESP® warninglamp flasheswhile the vehicleis in motion.

G Warning!

ESP® or ASR is intervening because at least one of the wheels hasreached its tire grip limit.Cruise control is deactivated for the duration of the intervention.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and traffic conditions.

Do not use too much throttle.X Drive slowly.

d The yellow ASR/ESP® warninglamp is lit whilethe engine isrunning.

G Warning!ASR is deactivated.X Activate ASR again. Exceptions (Y page 49).

h ! : bThe yellow ESP®, ABSand ASR/BAS warninglamps, and the redbrake system warninglamp light up while theengine is running.

G Warning!EBD has malfunctioned.The rear wheels could lock sooner than expected when you applythe brakes.X On vehicles with steering wheel buttons, also observe the

messages in the display (Y page 197).X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions.X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Troubleshooting 187

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h ! : bThe yellow ESP®, ABSand ASR/BAS warninglamps, and the redbrake system warninglamp light up while theengine is running.

G Warning!EBD has been deactivated due to undervoltage.It is possible that the battery is not being charged.The rear wheels could lock sooner than expected when you applythe brakes.X On vehicles with steering wheel buttons, also observe the

messages in the display (Y page 197).X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions.X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

b The red brakesystem indicatorlamp is lit whilethe engine isrunning. Awarning tonealso sounds.

G Warning!There is insufficient brake fluid in the supply reservoir.X On vehicles with steering wheel buttons, also observe the

messages in the display (Y page 197).X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions.X Check the brake fluid level in the supply reservoir

(Y page 170).X If the brake fluid is below the MIN mark: do not drive on!X Do not add brake fluid. This does not solve the problem.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

b When towing atrailer: The redbrake systemwarning lamp islit while theengine isrunning.A warning tonealso sounds.

G Warning!The brake force booster in the trailer is faulty.The driving and braking characteristics of your vehicle couldchange. There is a risk of the trailer overbraking and of you losingcontrol over the truck/trailer combination.X On vehicles with steering wheel buttons, also observe the

messages in the display (Y page 197).X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions.X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

188 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

: The yellow ASR/BAS indicatorlamp is lit whilethe engine isrunning.

G Warning!ASR has been deactivated due to a malfunction.The engine power output may be reduced.X Drive on with care.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

: The yellow ASR/BAS indicatorlamp is lit whilethe engine isrunning.

G Warning!BAS has been deactivated due to a malfunction.The brake system continues to function normally, but withoutelectronic support.X Drive on with care.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

: The yellow ASR/BAS indicatorlamp is lit whilethe engine isrunning.

G Warning!ASR and BAS have been deactivated due to undervoltage.It is possible that the battery is not being charged.The brake system is still available with the normal braking effect.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

! The yellow ABSindicator lamp islit while theengine isrunning.

G Warning!

ABS has been deactivated due to a malfunction. ESP®, ASR andBAS, as well as cruise control, have also been deactivated as aresult.The brake system continues to function normally, but withoutelectronic support. The wheels could therefore lock, e.g. if thebrakes are applied with maximum force.X On vehicles with steering wheel buttons, also observe the

messages in the display (Y page 197).X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

! The yellow ABSindicator lamp islit while theengine isrunning.

G Warning!ABS is temporarily unavailable. Self diagnosis may not have beencompleted yet.The brake system is still available with the normal braking effect.X Drive on for a short distance at a speed of more than

13 mph(20 km/h).ABS is available again if the message goes out.

Troubleshooting 189

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! The yellow ABSindicator lamp islit while theengine isrunning.

G Warning!ABS has been deactivated due to undervoltage. It is possible thatthe battery is not being charged.The brake system continues to function normally, but withoutelectronic support. The wheels could therefore lock, e.g. if thebrakes are applied with maximum force.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

å The yellow DEFindicator lamplights up whilethe engine isrunning.

The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or the currentDiesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) supply is limiting the vehicle range.X Observe the messages in the display (Y page 199).

h The yellow ESP®

warning lamp islit while theengine isrunning.

G Warning!

ESP® has been deactivated due to a malfunction. This alsodeactivates cruise control.The vehicle's stability is no longer automatically regulated at anearly stage. Engine power output may be reduced.X On vehicles with steering wheel buttons, also observe the

messages in the display (Y page 197).X Drive on with care.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

h The yellow ESP®

warning lamp islit while theengine isrunning.

G Warning!

ESP® has been deactivated due to undervoltage. This alsodeactivates cruise control.It is possible that the battery is not being charged.The vehicle's stability is no longer automatically regulated at anearly stage. Engine power output may be reduced.X Drive on with care.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

190 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+ The red SRSindicator lampdoes not go outapproximatelyfour secondsafter switchingon the ignition,or lights upagain.

G Warning!The restraint systems have malfunctioned. The air bags or belttensioners could be triggered unintentionally or might not betriggered at all in the event of an accident.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# The red batterycharge indicatorlamp lights upwhile the engineis running.

G Warning!The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are a defectivealternator or a torn poly-V-belt.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions.X Check the poly-V-belt.

If it is torn: do not drive on. Consult the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop.If it is not damaged: have the vehicle checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

# The red batterycharge indicatorlamp lights upwhile the engineis running.

G Warning!The battery is faulty.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions.X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.X Contact a breakdown service, e.g. an authorized Sprinter

Dealer.

# The yellow brakepad wearindicator lamplights up afterthe engine isstarted or whilethe vehicle is inmotion.

G Warning!The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at a

qualified specialist workshop.

Troubleshooting 191

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

4 The yellowengine oil levelwarning lamplights up afterthe engine isstarted or whilethe vehicle is inmotion.

The oil level has dropped to the minimum level.X Check the engine oil level and top up at the nearest gas station

(Y page 171).X If there is visible oil loss from the engine, have the malfunction

rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

4 The yellowengine oil levelwarning lampflashes, the-2.0 qts(Canada: –2.0 ltr) engine oillevel message,for example,appears in thedisplay and thewarning buzzersounds after theengine is startedor while thevehicle is inmotion.

There is not enough or no oil in the engine.There is a danger of engine damage.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions.X Check the oil level using the oil dipstick (Y page 172).

If the engine oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectifiedimmediately at a qualified specialist workshop.If the engine oil level is too low: have the vehicle towed to aqualified specialist workshop.

4 The yellowengine oil levelwarning lamplights up, the HIengine oil levelmessage, forexample,appears in thedisplay and thewarning buzzersounds after theengine is startedor while thevehicle is inmotion.

The engine oil level is above the maximum level.X Check the oil level. If the oil level is too high, have engine oil

siphoned off at the nearest gas station (Y page 173).You could otherwise damage the engine or the catalyticconverter.If the oil level is correct, have the malfunction rectified as soonas possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

192 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

4 The yellowengine oil levelwarning lamplights uprepeatedly whilethe vehicle is inmotion.

There is a malfunction in the engine oil level display.X Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist

workshop.

% The yellowcoolant levelwarning lamplights up whilethe engine isrunning.

The coolant level is too low.Never run the engine if the coolant level is too low. The enginecould overheat and be damaged.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions.X Switch off the engine and let it cool down.X Add coolant and be sure to observe the warning notes

(Y page 169).X If you need to add coolant frequently, have the cooling system

checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

? The red coolantwarning lamplights up whilethe engine isrunning.

The coolant temperature is too high.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

? The red coolantwarning lamplights up whilethe engine isrunning.

The coolant temperature is too high.If the vehicle is stopped after being subjected to extreme loads(e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, trailer towing), the coolantwarning lamp may light up when the ignition is switched on or theengine is restarted.X Run the engine for approximately one minute at idling speed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop if the coolant warning

lamp remains lit.

7|

The yellowreserve fuelwarning lamplights up whiledriving.

The fuel level has fallen into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station (Y page 142).

Troubleshooting 193

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

7|

The yellowreserve fuelwarning lamplights up whilethe engine isrunning and thedisplay for thetank contentshows 0, eventhough there isstill fuel in thetank.

The fuel filler cap is not closed.X Close the fuel filler cap.

You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap is closed fully.X If the malfunction continues to be displayed, have it rectified

immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

% The yellowpreglowindicator lamplights up whilethe engine isrunning.

There is a malfunction in the preglow system.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

; The yellowcheck engineindicator lamplights up orflashes while theengine isrunning.

You have used up all fuel in the tank.The engine is running in emergency mode.X Refuel at the nearest gas station (Y page 142).X Bleed the fuel system .X Start the engine three to four times in succession after refueling.

Emergency running mode will be canceled. The vehicle does notneed to be checked.

; The yellowcheck engineindicator lamplights up orflashes while theengine isrunning.

The injection system is malfunctioning.The engine is running in emergency mode.Engine power output may be reduced.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified

specialist workshop.In some states it is legally prescribed that after the check engineindicator lamp lights up you must contact a qualified specialistworkshop immediately. Observe legal requirements.

194 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

; The yellowcheck engineindicator lamplights up whilethe engine isrunning.

The exhaust gas aftertreatment system is defective or anemissions-relevant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction ordefect can damage the exhaust gas aftertreatment.After the first message and under normal operating conditions,you can drive on for up to approximately 500 miles (800 km). Thena warning tone sequence sounds and the engine can only bestarted 20 times.X Observe the messages in the display:Ron vehicles without steering-wheel buttons (Y page 199)Ron vehicles with steering-wheel buttons (Y page 202) and

(Y page 204).X Have the exhaust gas aftertreatment checked as soon as

possible at a qualified specialist workshop.In some states it is legally prescribed that after the check engineindicator lamp lights up you must contact a qualified specialistworkshop immediately. Observe legal requirements.

È The yellow airfilter indicatorlamp lights upwhile the engineis running.

The service limit for the air filter has been reached. The air filteris dirty.X Have the air filter element replaced as soon as possible at a

qualified specialist workshop.

h The yellow tirepressuremonitor warninglamp comes on.

G Warning!The tire pressure monitor indicates a rapid or severe loss ofpressure in at least one tire.X Stop the vehicle without making any extreme steering

maneuvers or braking suddenly. Pay attention to the trafficconditions while doing so.

X Check the tires and correct the tire pressure. If a tire continuesto lose pressure, it must be replaced. Replace damaged tiresimmediately.The warning lamp goes out after you have been driving for a fewminutes with the malfunction rectified.

X On vehicles with steering wheel buttons, also observe themessages in the display (Y page 197).

Troubleshooting 195

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h US vehiclesonly:The yellow tirepressuremonitor warninglamp flashes for60 seconds andthen remains lit.

The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a

qualified specialist workshop.

: The yellow waterseparatorindicator lamplights up whenthe ignition isstarted.

The water that has collected in the water separator has reachedthe maximum level.X Drain the water separator (Y page 221).

¦ The yellowwasher fluidlevel indicatorlamp for thewindshieldwasher/headlampcleaning systemlights up afterthe engine isstarted or whilethe vehicle is inmotion.

The water level is too low.X Top up washer fluid (Y page 171).

7 The red seat beltwarning lamplights up forapproximatelysix secondswhen the key isturned toposition 2 in theignition lock.A warning tonealso sounds.

The warning lamp is to remind you to fasten your seat belt.X Fasten seat belt (Y page 34).

196 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b The yellow bulbindicator lamplights up whenthe key is turnedto position 2 inthe ignition lock.

A bulb in the exterior lighting (with the exception of the frontposition lamps and trailer lighting) is defective6.X Change defective bulbs as soon as possible (Y page 233).

1 The yellow doorindicator lamplights up whileyou are driving.

The vehicle is moving without all doors or the hood being closed.X Close the doors or hood.

Notes on display messages

G WarningNo messages can be displayed if theinstrument cluster and/or the display fails.You will then not be able to see informationabout the vehicle status, such as speed andoutside temperature, warning/indicatorlamps and display messages or the failure ofsystems. Handling characteristics may beaffected. Adapt your speed and driving styleaccordingly.Immediately consult a qualified specialistworkshop. The qualified specialist workshopmust have the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired. We recommend an authorizedSprinter Dealer for this purpose. In particular,all work relevant to safety or on safety-relatedsystems must be carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WarningThe operating safety of your vehicle could bejeopardized if maintenance work is carriedout incorrectly. As a result, you could losecontrol of the vehicle and cause an accident.In addition, the safety systems may no longer

be able to protect you or others as they aredesigned to do.Always have maintenance work carried out ata qualified specialist workshop. The qualifiedspecialist workshop must have the necessaryspecialist knowledge and tools to carry outthe work required. We recommend visiting anauthorized Sprinter Dealer. In particular, workrelevant to safety or on safety-relatedsystems must be carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i If you turn the key to position 2 in theignition lock, all warning/indicator lamps(except the turn signal indicator lamps) andthe display are activated. Please make surethat they are working properly beforecommencing a journey.

Vehicles without steering wheelbuttonsWarnings, malfunctions or additionalinformation may also be shown in the display.The following tables show all the displaymessages. For certain display messages, awarning tone or a continuous tone will alsosound.

6 The lamp failure indicator may, depending on equipment, be omitted for all lamps with the exception of turnsignals.

Troubleshooting 197

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsThe on-board computer shows warnings,malfunctions or additional information in thedisplay. For certain display messages, awarning tone or a continuous tone will alsosound. Display messages of a high priority areshown in red.Please respond in accordance with thedisplay messages and follow the additionalnotes in this Operator's Manual.You can hide low-priority display messagesusing the V, U, & or * buttonon the steering wheel or the reset button onthe instrument cluster.You cannot hide display messages of thehighest priority. These messages willcontinue to be shown in the display until theircause has been eliminated.The on-board computer stores certain displaymessages in the message memory (Y page 78).The following tables show all the displaymessages. They are divided intoalphabetically sorted text messages(Y page 201) and symbol messages(Y page 204).

198 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Display messages

Display messages on vehicles without steering wheel buttons

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

NO TPMS The NO message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS messageis also displayed after 30 seconds.The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a

qualified specialist workshop.

NO TPMS The NO message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS messageis also displayed after 30 seconds.The tire pressure monitor is not receiving signals from one or morewheels because:Ra wheel has been replaced with the spare wheel without wheel

electronics.Rthe maximum temperature on one of the wheel electronics units

has been exceeded.Rthe wheel electronics are malfunctioning.X Have wheels with suitable wheel electronics units installed at a

qualified specialist workshop.

— — TPMS The —— message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS messageis also displayed after 30 seconds.The pressure in one or more tires is too low or there is a significantdifference between tire pressures on individual wheels.X Check the tire pressure at the next opportunity and correct it if

necessary (Y page 281).

¯dEF Chk

In addition, the yellow ; engine diagnosis indicator lamp andthe yellow å DEF indicator lamp light up and a warning tonesounds.The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is notcompliant with ISO 22241.After the message appears for the first time, and under normaldriving conditions, you can continue driving for approximately50 miles (80 km). After this, a warning tone sequence sounds. Theengine can then only be started another sixteen times.X Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialist

workshop as soon as possible.

Troubleshooting 199

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

¯dEF Chk

In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp lights up and awarning tone sounds.The DEF supply has dropped below 1.5 US gal (5.5 l).After the message appears for the first time and under normaldriving conditions, the remaining DEF supply will last forapproximately 1000 miles (1600 km).After that, the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reserve mark is reached. A warningtone sequence sounds. The engine can then only be startedanother sixteen times.X add DEF supply (Y page 143).

After topping up, the system check takes approximately20 seconds. The å DEF indicator lamp then goes out.

¯StArtS RE xx

In addition, the yellow ; engine diagnosis indicator lamp andthe yellow å DEF indicator lamp light up and a warning tonesounds. A warning tone sequence sounds.After the message appears for the first time, the engine can onlybe started another sixteen times.The number of remaining engine starts xx (16 to 0) is shown in themessage every time the engine is started. Once the number 0 isshown, the engine can no longer be started.

The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is notcompliant with ISO 22241.X Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialist

workshop as soon as possible.

200 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The exhaust gas aftertreatment system is defective or anemissions-relevant malfunction has occurred. The defect ormalfunction can result in damage to the exhaust gasaftertreatment system.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

¯StArtS RE xx

In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp lights up and awarning tone sequence sounds.The DEF supply has dropped below the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reservemark.After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEFsupply will last for approximately 1200 miles (1900 km). Theengine can then only be started another sixteen times.The number of remaining engine starts xx (16 to 0) is shown in themessage every time the engine is started. Once the number 0 isshown, the yellow ; engine diagnosis indicator lamp lights upand the engine can no longer be started.X Add at least 2.0 US gal (7.6 l) of DEF (Y page 143).

After topping up, the system check takes approximately20 seconds. The å DEF indicator lamp then goes out.

Text messages on vehicles with steering wheel buttons

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ABSVisit workshop

G Warning!

ABS has been deactivated due to a malfunction. ESP®, ASR andBAS, as well as cruise control, have also been deactivated as aresult.The brake system is still available with complete brake boostingeffect but without ABS.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ABSUnavailable

G Warning!ABS is temporarily unavailable. Self diagnosis may not have beencompleted yet.The brake system is still available with the normal braking effect.X Drive a short distance at a speed above 13 mph (20 km/h).

ABS is available again if the display message goes out.

Troubleshooting 201

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ABSUnavailable

G Warning!ABS has been deactivated due to undervoltage. The battery mightnot be charging.The brake system is still available with the normal braking effect.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Check Diesel Exhaust Fluid see Operator's Manual

The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) supply has dropped below1.5 US gal (5.5 l).After the message appears for the first time and under normaldriving conditions, the remaining DEF supply will last forapproximately 1000 miles (1600 km).After that, the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reserve mark is reached. A warningtone sequence sounds. The engine can then only be startedanother sixteen times.X add DEF supply (Y page 143).

After topping up, the system check takes approximately20 seconds. The display message then disappears.

Check Diesel Exhaust Fluid see Operator's Manual

If the yellow ; engine diagnosis indicator lamp lights up inaddition, the DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or notcompliant with ISO 22241.After the message appears for the first time, and under normaldriving conditions, you can continue driving for approximately50 miles(80 km). After this, a warning tone sequence sounds. Theengine can then only be started another sixteen times.Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialistworkshop as soon as possible.

ESPVisit workshop

G Warning!

ESP® has been deactivated due to a malfunction. This alsodeactivates cruise control.The vehicle's stability is no longer automatically regulated at anearly stage. Engine power output may be reduced.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

202 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ESPUnavailable

ESP® has been deactivated due to undervoltage. This alsodeactivates cruise control.The battery might not be charging.The vehicle's stability is no longer automatically regulated at anearly stage. Engine power output may be reduced.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Tire pres.Adj. pres.

The pressure in one or more tires is too low or there is a significantdifference between tire pressures on individual wheels.X Check the tire pressure at the next opportunity and correct it if

necessary (Y page 281).

Tire pres.monitor inoperative

The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a

qualified specialist workshop.

Tire press.monitor currently unavail.

The tire pressure monitor function is temporarily unavailable dueto radio interference or undervoltage.X As soon as the causes have been remedied, the tire pressure

monitor activates itself automatically.

Tire press.monitor inoperative No wheel sensors

The tire pressure monitor is not receiving signals from one or morewheels because:Ra wheel has been replaced with the spare wheel without wheel

electronics.Rthe maximum temperature on one of the wheel electronics units

has been exceeded.Rthe wheel electronics are malfunctioning.X Have wheels with suitable wheel electronics units installed at a

qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise controlVisit workshop

Cruise control has been deactivated due to a malfunction.X Have cruise control checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

SRSRestraint system Visit workshop

G Warning!The restraint systems have malfunctioned. The air bags or belttensioners could be triggered unintentionally or might not betriggered at all in the event of an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Troubleshooting 203

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Symbol messages on vehicles with steering wheel buttons

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

åxx starts remaining

The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) supply has dropped below the0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reserve mark.After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEFsupply will last for approximately 1200 miles (1900 km). Theengine can then only be started another twenty times.The number of remaining engine starts xx (20 to 0) is shown in themessage every time the engine is started. Once the number 0 isshown, the yellow ; engine diagnosis indicator lamp lights upand the engine can no longer be started.X Add at least 2.0 US gal (7.6 l) of DEF (Y page 143).

After topping up, the system check takes approximately20 seconds. The display message then disappears.

åxx starts remaining

In addition, the yellow ; engine diagnosis indicator lamp lightsup.After the message appears for the first time, the engine can onlybe started another twenty times.The number of remaining engine starts xx (20 to 0) is shown in themessage every time the engine is started. Once the number 0 isshown, the engine can no longer be started.

The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is notcompliant with ISO 22241.X Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialist

workshop as soon as possible.

The exhaust gas aftertreatment system is defective or anemissions-relevant malfunction has occurred. The defect ormalfunction can result in damage to the exhaust gasaftertreatment system.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

:Visit workshop

G Warning!ASR has been deactivated due to a malfunction.The engine power output may then be lower.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

204 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

:Visit workshop

G Warning!BAS has been deactivated due to a malfunction.The brake system continues to function normally, but withoutelectronic support.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

:Unavailable

ASR and BAS have been deactivated due to undervoltage.The battery might not be charging.The brake system is still available with the normal braking effect.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

#Battery/Alternator Visit workshop

The battery is not being charged. This could be caused by adefective alternator or a torn poly-V-belt.X Pull over immediately, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Check the poly-V-belt.

If it is torn: do not drive any further. Consult the nearestqualified specialist workshop.If it is undamaged: have the vehicle checked as soon aspossible at a qualified specialist workshop.

#Brake wear Visit workshop

G Warning!The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at a

qualified specialist workshop.

bBrake fluid Visit workshop

G Warning!There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.X Pull over immediately, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Check the brake fluid level in the supply reservoir

(Y page 170).X If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark: do not drive any

further.X Do not add brake fluid. This will not rectify the problem.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Troubleshooting 205

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bBrake force distribution

G Warning!EBD has been deactivated due to undervoltage.The battery might not be charging.The rear wheels could lock sooner than expected when you applythe brakes.X Pull over immediately, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Do not continue driving.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bBrake force distribution Visit workshop

G Warning!EBD has malfunctioned.The rear wheels could lock sooner than expected when you applythe brakes.X Pull over immediately, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Do not continue driving.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

cParking brake Release brake

A warning tone also sounds.You are driving with the parking brake applied.X Release the parking brake (Y page 112).

7Seatbelt sys. Visit workshop

G Warning!The belt system has malfunctioned.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

?Coolant Stop, turn engine off

The coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over immediately, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

?Coolant Stop, turn engine off

The coolant temperature is too high.If the vehicle is stopped after being subjected to extreme loads(e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, trailer towing, etc.), thisdisplay message may be shown when the ignition is switched onor the engine is restarted.X Run the engine for approximately one minute at idling speed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop if the display message

continues to be shown.

206 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

*Check coolant level

The coolant level is too low.Never run the engine if the coolant level is too low. The enginecould overheat and be damaged.X Add coolant, observing the warning notes while doing so

(Y page 169).X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist

workshop if the coolant needs topping up more often than usual.

1Hood open

You are already driving at walking pace, even though the hood isnot closed.X Close the hood.

4Engine oil Add 1.0 quart(Canada: 1.0 liter)

The oil level is too low.X Check the oil level the next time you refuel (Y page 171), and

top up the oil.

4Engine oil level Not when eng. running

You want to check the oil level even though the engine is running.X Switch off the engine.X Check the oil level (Y page 171).

4Engine oil level Reduce oil level

You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damagingthe engine or catalytic converter.X Siphon off excess oil until the oil is at the specified level.

Observe the legal requirements.

4Engine oil level Stop, turn engine off

There is not enough oil, or no oil in the engine. There is a dangerof engine damage.X Pull over immediately, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 172).

If the oil level is OK: have the malfunction repairedimmediately at a qualified specialist workshop.If the oil level is too low: have the vehicle towed to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

4Oil sensor Visit workshop

The measuring system is malfunctioning.X Have the measuring system checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

9Please enter PIN:

You have not yet entered your PIN in the mobile phone.X Enter the PIN for the SIM card.

Troubleshooting 207

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

OCheck tire(s)

The pressure of one or more tires has dropped significantly. If thetire pressure monitor has detected the affected wheel, the wheelposition is also displayed.X Pull over immediately, paying attention to road and traffic

conditions.X Check the tires.X Repair or change the wheel if necessary (Y page 222).X Check the tire pressure and correct it if necessary

(Y page 280).The display message disappears automatically after driving fora few minutes with the corrected tire pressure.

OWarning Tire defect

One or more tires is losing air rapidly. If the tire pressure monitorhas detected the affected wheel, the wheel position is alsodisplayed.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers, paying attention to the traffic conditions as you doso.

X Repair or change the wheel (Y page 222).

+Check Immobilizer Visit workshop

The key is no longer working.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

7Reserve fuel Drive to a gas station

The fuel level has fallen into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station (Y page 142).

1Doors open

You are already driving at walking pace, even though not all thedoors are closed.X Close the doors.

:Water in fuel Visit workshop

The water that has collected in the water separator has reachedthe maximum level.X Drain the water separator (Y page 221).

¦Check wash. fluid level

The washer fluid level has dropped to approximately 1/3 of thereservoir capacity.X Add washer fluid (Y page 171).

208 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bLow beam left

The left-hand low beam is faulty7.X Halogen headlamps: replace the bulbs as soon as possible

(Y page 233).X Bi-Xenon headlamps: consult a qualified specialist workshop

as soon as possible.

bLow beam right

The right-hand low beam is faulty7.X Halogen headlamps: replace the bulbs as soon as possible.

(Y page 233)X Bi-Xenon headlamps: consult a qualified specialist workshop

as soon as possible.

bCornering lt. left

The left-hand cornering light is faulty7.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

bCornering lt. right

The right-hand cornering light is faulty7.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

bLights on automatic. Remove key

The automatic headlamp feature is active: the light switch is in theà position and you have forgotten to remove the key.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

bTurn signal left

The left-hand turn signal is faulty.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 233).

bTurn signal right

The right-hand turn signal is faulty.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 233).

bBrake lamp left

The left-hand brake lamp is faulty7.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 233).

bBrake lamp right

The right brake lamp is faulty7.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 233).

bThird brake lamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty7. This display message willonly appear if all LEDs have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

7 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than theturn signals.

Troubleshooting 209

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bHigh beam left

The left-hand high-beam is faulty7.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 233).

bHigh beam right

The right-hand high beam is faulty7.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 233).

bLicense plate lamp

A license plate lamp is faulty7.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 233).

bSwitch off lights

You have forgotten to switch off the lights when leaving thevehicle.X Turn the light switch to $.

bFoglamp front left

The left-hand front fog lamp is faulty7.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 233).

bFoglamp front right

The right-hand fog lamp is faulty7.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 233).

bRear foglamp

The rear fog lamp is faulty7.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 233).

bParking lamp front left

The front left parking lamp/standing lamp is faulty7.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

bParking lamp front right

The front right parking lamp/standing lamp is faulty7.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 233).

bReverse lamp

A backup lamp is faulty7.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 233).

bTail lamp left

The left-hand tail lamp is faulty7.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 233).

bTail lamp right

The right-hand tail lamp is faulty7.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 233).

7 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than theturn signals.

210 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bMarker lamp

A perimeter lamp is faulty7.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 233).

bAdditional ind. lamps

An additional turn signal is faulty7.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Indicator and warning lamps in switches and buttons

G WarningThe operating safety of your vehicle could be jeopardized if maintenance work is carried outincorrectly. As a result, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition,the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do.Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The qualifiedspecialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required. We recommend visiting an authorized Sprinter Dealer. In particular, work relevantto safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

One or more indicatorlamps in the cbutton for the seatheating are flashing.

Insufficient voltage is available because too many consumers areswitched on.The seat heating has switched off automatically.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. reading lamps, interior

lighting.The seat heating will automatically switch back on as soon asthere is sufficient voltage.

The indicator lamp inthe switch for thewindshield heatingz and/or theswitch for the rearwindow defroster| are flashing.

Insufficient voltage is available because too many consumers areswitched on.The windshield heating and/or rear window defroster haveswitched off automatically.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. reading lamps, interior

lighting.If sufficient voltage is available again within 30 seconds, thewindshield heating and/or rear window defroster automaticallyswitch on again. Otherwise, they remain switched off.

7 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than theturn signals.

Troubleshooting 211

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Warning tones

G WarningThe operating safety of your vehicle could be jeopardized if maintenance work is carried outincorrectly. As a result, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition,the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do.Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The qualifiedspecialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required. We recommend visiting an authorized Sprinter Dealer. In particular, work relevantto safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The anti-theft alarmsystem is suddenlytriggered.

You opened the vehicle using the key without first deactivating theanti-theft alarm system.X Press the % or & button on the remote control.orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.

The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.

A warning tone sounds. A message is shown in the display.X Observe the information for the messages (Y page 197).

A warning tone sounds. You are driving with the parking brake applied.X Release the parking brake (Y page 112).

A warning tone sounds. You have opened the driver's door and forgotten to switch off thelights.X Turn the light switch to $.

A warning tone sounds. G Warning!You have not fastened your seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 32).

Engine

G WarningThe operating safety of your vehicle could be jeopardized if maintenance work is carried outincorrectly. As a result, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition,the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do.Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The qualifiedspecialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required. We recommend visiting an authorized Sprinter Dealer. In particular, work relevantto safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

212 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine does notstart.The starter motor canbe heard.

There is air in the fuel system.X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before

attempting to start the engine again.X Start the engine again.

Please bear in mind that lengthy and frequent starting attemptswill drain the battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart.The starter motor canbe heard. The reservefuel warning lamp is litand the fuel gauge is at0.

The fuel tank has been run dry.X Refuel the vehicle.X Bleed the fuel system .

The engine does notstart.The starter motorcannot be heard.The ; yellow enginediagnostic lamp andthe yellow DEFindicator lamp å8

lights up.

The exhaust gas aftertreatment is faulty, an emission-relevantmalfunction has occurred or the DEF reserve has been used up.The engine management prevents the engine from starting.This malfunction or malfunction can damage the exhaust gasaftertreatment.X Observe the messages in the display:Ron vehicles without steering-wheel buttons (Y page 199)Ron vehicles with steering-wheel buttons (Y page 202) and

(Y page 204).

The engine does notstart.The starter motorcannot be heard.

The battery isolating switch is switched off.X Switch on the power supply (Y page 88).

The engine does notstart.The starter motorcannot be heard.

The on-board voltage is too low (the battery is too weak ordischarged).X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 247).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

8 Only vehicles without steering-wheel buttons.

Troubleshooting 213

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine does notstart.The starter motorcannot be heard.

The battery is discharged or faulty.X Check the battery for damage.X Charge the battery (Y page 178).

The engine does notstart.The starter motorcannot be heard.

The starter is faulty.X Have the starter checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Automatic transmission

G WarningThe operating safety of your vehicle could be jeopardized if maintenance work is carried outincorrectly. As a result, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition,the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do.Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The qualifiedspecialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required. We recommend visiting an authorized Sprinter Dealer. In particular, work relevantto safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The transmission nolonger changes gearcorrectly.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified

specialist workshop.

The accelerationcharacteristics havedeterioratednoticeably.The transmission doesnot shift.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear or reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Depress the brake pedal.X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.X Depress the brake pedal.X Move the selector lever to position D or R.X In position D, the transmission shifts into second gear; in

position R, the transmission shits into reverse gear.X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified

specialist workshop.

214 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Driving systems

G WarningThe operating safety of your vehicle could be jeopardized if maintenance work is carried outincorrectly. As a result, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition,the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do.Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The qualifiedspecialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required. We recommend visiting an authorized Sprinter Dealer. In particular, work relevantto safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.A warning tone alsosounds forapproximately twoseconds.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately 20seconds.The indicator lamp onthe f switch lightsup and the redsegments in thePARKTRONIC warningdisplay go out.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched itself off.When you press the f switch, the red segments in thePARKTRONIC warning displays light up again and the warning tonesounds for approximately two seconds.X Have PARKTRONIC checked as soon as possible at a qualified

specialized workshop.

The PARKTRONICwarning displaysimplausible distances.For example, all thesegments may be liteven though there is noobstacle present.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or iced up.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 163).X Turn the key to position 2 again in the ignition lock.

The PARKTRONICwarning displaysimplausible distances.For example, all thesegments may be liteven though there is noobstacle present.

An external radio or ultrasonic source may be causinginterference.X Check PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Troubleshooting 215

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PARKTRONICwarning displaysimplausible distances.For example, all thesegments may be liteven though there is noobstacle present.

The license plate or other parts attached near the sensors maynot be secured correctly.X Check the license plate and attachment parts near the sensors

for correct seating.

The speed cannot beset when cruise controlis activated9.

The display is showing a message of high priority and cannottherefore show a change in speed.X Proceed as instructed by the message in the display.X Deactivate cruise control

White stripes appear onthe rear view camera'smonitor display or thepicture flickers.

The rear view camera is exposed to very bright white light orfluorescent light.X Check whether the rear view camera works at another location.

The rear view camera isfunctioning incorrectlyor not at all.

RThe surrounding area is very dark.RThe outside temperature has changed rapidly or is very high.RThe camera lens is dirty or obstructed.X Check the rear view camera and clean the camera lens if

necessary (Y page 163).

Auxiliary heating

G WarningThe operating safety of the vehicle can be compromised if maintenance work is carried outincorrectly. In particular, work that is carried out incorrectly on the heater jeopardizes itsoperating safety. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. Thesafety systems may also not be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do.Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The qualifiedspecialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required. We recommend that you use an authorized Sprinter Dealer for this purpose. Inparticular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

9 Only on vehicles with steering wheel buttons.

216 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The auxiliary heatingdoes not switch on.

The outside temperature is above 39 ‡ (4 †). The auxiliary heatingswitches off automatically.

The auxiliary heatingdoes not switch on.

Lack of fuelThe tank is less than one quarter full. The auxiliary heatingswitches off automatically.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.X Then, start the auxiliary heating several times until the fuel lines

are full.

The auxiliary heatingdoes not switch on.

The undervoltage protection circuit integrated in the control unitswitches off the auxiliary heating because the on-board voltage isless than 10 V.X Have the alternator and battery checked.

The auxiliary heatingdoes not switch on.

The fuse is blown.X Replace the fuse (Y page 239).X Have the cause of the blown fuse determined at a qualified

specialist workshop.

The auxiliary heatingdoes not switch on.

The heater is faulty.X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

The auxiliary heating isoverheated.

The coolant level is too low.X Check the coolant level and top up if necessary (Y page 169).

Central locking system

G WarningThe operating safety of your vehicle could be jeopardized if maintenance work is carried outincorrectly. As a result, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition,the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do.Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The qualifiedspecialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required. We recommend visiting an authorized Sprinter Dealer. In particular, work relevantto safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Troubleshooting 217

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

It is no longer possibleto lock the vehicleusing the remotecontrol.The turn signals do notflash when the vehicleis locked.

The doors are not closed properly.X Close the doors properly and lock the vehicle again.

It is no longer possibleto lock the vehicleusing the remotecontrol.The turn signals do notflash when the vehicleis locked.

The central locking system has malfunctioned.X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 54).X Have the central locking system checked as soon as possible

at a qualified specialist workshop.

It is no longer possibleto lock or unlock thevehicle using theremote control.

The remote control batteries are weak or discharged.X Point the remote control at the driver's door handle at close

range and try again.If this does not work:X Lock or unlock the vehicle with the folding key (Y page 54).X Check the batteries of the remote control (Y page 53).

It is no longer possibleto lock or unlock thevehicle using theremote control.

The remote control is faulty.X Lock or unlock the vehicle with the folding key (Y page 54).X Have the central locking system checked as soon as possible

at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at an authorized Sprinter Dealer.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the mechanical locks replaced.Your qualified specialist workshop will be happy to provide youwith a replacement.

218 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The key cannot beturned in the ignitionlock.

The vehicle voltage is too low.X Switch off all non-essential consumers, e.g. the seat heating,

interior lighting, and try to turn the key again.If this does not work:X Check and, if necessary, replace the starter battery.orX Jump-start the vehicle.orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The key cannot beturned in the ignitionlock.

The steering lock has jammed mechanically.X Remove the key and insert it again into the ignition lock. Turn

the steering wheel from side to side while doing so.

Headlamps and turn signals

G WarningThe operating safety of your vehicle could be jeopardized if maintenance work is carried outincorrectly. As a result, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition,the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do.Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The qualifiedspecialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required. We recommend visiting an authorized Sprinter Dealer. In particular, work relevantto safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The headlamps arefogged up on the inside.

Air humidity is very high.X Drive with the headlamps switched on.

The headlamps are clear after a short distance.

The headlamps arefogged up on the inside.

The headlamp housing is not sealed and moisture has been ableto enter.X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Windshield wipers

G WarningThe operating safety of your vehicle could be jeopardized if maintenance work is carried outincorrectly. As a result, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition,the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do.

Troubleshooting 219

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The qualifiedspecialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required. We recommend visiting an authorized Sprinter Dealer. In particular, work relevantto safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

The wiper movement is obstructed, e.g. by leaves or snow. Thewiper motor has been deactivated.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. For safety reasons, remove

the key from the ignition lock.X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch on the windshield wipers again.

The windshield wipershave stopped workingcompletely.

There is a malfunction in the windshield wiper drive.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

Fuel and fuel tank

G WarningThe operating safety of your vehicle could be jeopardized if maintenance work is carried outincorrectly. As a result, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition,the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do.Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The qualifiedspecialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required. We recommend visiting an authorized Sprinter Dealer. In particular, work relevantto safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The fuel tank has runcompletely dry.

There is air in the fuel system.X Bleed the fuel system .

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G Warning!The fuel line or the fuel tank is damaged.Leaking fuel creates a risk of fire or explosion.X Switch off the ignition immediately.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

220 TroubleshootingPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Engine

Draining the fuel filterIf the : indicator lamp lights up, you mustdrain the fuel filter.

! When the : indicator lamp lights up,drain the fuel filter with water separatorimmediately. Otherwise, the engine may bedamaged.

%Environmental noteWhen handling, storing and disposing ofdiesel and diesel mixtures, please observethe relevant regulations.To this end, have the fuel filter with waterseparator drained at a qualified specialistworkshop which has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired, e.g. an authorized Sprinter Dealer.The fuel filter with water separator is in theengine compartment.

X Apply the parking brake and move theautomatic transmission selector lever to P.

X Switch off the diesel engine and open thehood (Y page 168).

X Place a suitable receptacle under drainhose :.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Open drain plug ; immediately until liquidflows out of drain hose :. Make sure that

the liquid flows into the receptacle underdrain hose :.

X Screw in drain plug ; as soon asapproximately 0.2 US qt (0.2 l) of liquidhave been collected.

i The electric fuel pump stops the flow ofliquid automatically after 30 seconds.

X After draining, turn the key back toposition 0 in the ignition lock.

X Dispose of the liquid in an environmentallyresponsible manner.

%Environmental noteHave the drained liquid disposed of at aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Sprinter Dealer.X Drain the fuel filter again if the :

indicator lamp remains lit.

! If the : indicator lamp remains lit evenafter draining for the second time, have thecause checked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. at an authorizedSprinter Dealer.

Bleeding the fuel system

Wheels and tires

General notesThe vehicle is equipped either with a sparewheel or with Premium tire sealant. The sparewheel is under the rear of the vehicle(Y page 185). The Premium tire sealant islocated in the stowage compartment in theright-hand door sill (Y page 184).

G WarningDefective or worn tires, and underinflated oroverinflated tires, can cause significantchanges in the vehicle's handling and brakingcharacteristics. There is an increased risk ofan accident.

Wheels and tires 221

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Replace the tires, including the spare wheel,at least every six years. They should bereplaced regardless of the degree of treadwear. Check the tire pressure on the sparewheel at regular intervals.

If you replace a tire, we also recommend thatyou replace the tire valve.

G Warning!Only for vehicles without a tire pressuremonitor:For safety reasons, we recommend that youonly use tire valves manufactured bySchrader. These have been tested for use onyour vehicle.Use only tire valves of type:RTR 600 for the vehicle types 2500RTR 418 for the vehicle types 3500Using other tire inflation valves or valvesmade by other manufacturers can result intire pressure loss and thereby impair theoperating safety of the vehicle.

You will find safety-relevant information ontires and wheels in the "Tires and wheels"section (Y page 252).

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle as far away as possible

from traffic and on a level, firm and non-slipsurface.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Apply the parking brake.X Move the selector lever of the automatic

transmission to position P.X Any passengers should leave the vehicle,

ensuring that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Place the warning triangle or hazardwarning lights at a suitable distance.Observe legal requirements.

Using tire sealantYou can use the Premium tire sealant to sealsmall punctures, particularly those in the tiretread. Tire sealant can be used at outsidetemperatures down to –22 ‡ (–30 †).

G WarningSmoking, fire and naked flames are prohibitedwhen handling tire sealant. Avoid creatingsparks. The tire sealant could otherwise igniteand cause a fire.

G WarningYour safety is at particular risk and the tiresealant is unable to repair a tire in thefollowing situations:Rif there are cuts or punctures in the tire

larger than 0.23 inches (6 mm)Rif the rim is damagedRif you have driven with very low tire

pressures or with flat tiresDo not drive any further. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop which has the necessaryspecialist knowledge and tools to carry outthe work required.For this reason, we recommend an authorizedSprinter Dealer. In particular, work relevant tosafety or on safety-related systems must becarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Prepare the vehicle as described(Y page 222).

X Before using Premium tire sealant, youshould stop the vehicle so that the damageon the tire is at the bottom.

X It is beneficial to the sealing process if youremove the foreign body that has piercedthe tire, e.g. a screw or a nail.

X Remove the Premium tire sealant, theaccompanying "max. 50 mph" ("max.80 km/h") sticker and the tire inflationcompressor from the stowage

222 Wheels and tiresPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

compartment in the right-hand doorway(Y page 184).

X Affix the sticker within the driver's field ofvision.

G WarningIt is essential to comply with themanufacturer's safety notice on the sticker onthe electric air pump and the tire sealantbottle. You could otherwise fail to recognizedangers and injure yourself and others.

G WarningTire sealant must not come into contact withyour skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale thefumes.RIf tire sealant comes into contact with your

eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughlywith clean water.RImmediately change out of clothing that

has been in contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, consult a

doctor immediately.Keep tire sealant away from children.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately

rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water.RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor

immediately.

i The tire sealant is water-soluble. If tiresealant escapes, you can wash it away withwater.

Tire inflation compressor: Switch; Angled connecting piece= Tire inflation compressor hose? FlapA Pressure gauge with pressure release

screwB Connector with cableX Open flap ? of the tire inflation

compressor.X Pull connector B and hose = with

pressure gauge A from the housing.

Tire sealant bottle for single tiresC ValveD Tire sealant bottle with hook, hose and

valve core extractor

Wheels and tires 223

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Tire sealant bottle for twin tiresC ValveD Tire sealant bottle with hook, hose and

angled connecting pieceX Shake tire sealant bottle D.X Unscrew and remove the cap from valveC of tire sealant bottle D.

X Push angled connecting piece ; locatedon hose = of the tire inflation compressoras far as it will go onto valve C of tiresealant bottle D and fix in place.

The following steps differ depending on thevehicle tires.RSingle tire (Y page 224)RTwin tires, inner wheels (Y page 225)RTwin tires, outer wheels (Y page 226)

Single tire

E HookF ButtonG Lever

H Valve core extractorI Tire valveX Pull knob F out of valve core extractorH as far as it will go.

X Remove the cap from valve I on thedefective tire.

X Hook tire sealant bottle D into the uppervent hole in the wheel using hook E.

X Keep pressing lever G, place valve coreextractor H firmly onto tire valve I andthen release lever G.

X Press knob F into the valve core of valveI, turning it gently as you do so, until theshaft of valve core extractor H engages.

X Turn knob F counter-clockwise until thevalve core is unscrewed.

X Pull knob F out of valve core extractorH as far as it will go.This pulls the valve core into the valve coreextractor and seals it against the valve coreextractor stop.

X Make sure that the pressure release screwon pressure gauge A is closed.

X Connect connector B to the 12 V socket(12 V, 25 A, 300 W) on the center console(Y page 133).

! Only use the 12 V socket on the centerconsole to connect the electric air pump.You could otherwise damage the vehicle'selectrics.

X Start the engine.X Press I on tire inflation compressor

switch :.The tire inflation compressor is activated.The tire sealant is then pumped into the tireand the tire pressure is increased. Let thetire inflation compressor run for at least 10minutes until tire sealant bottle D iscompletely empty and the tire pressure isat least 43.5 psi (3.0 bar).

224 Wheels and tiresPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

! Do not run the electric air pump for longerthan 20 minutes without a break; otherwiseit may overheat.The air pump can be used again once it hascooled down.

X Inflate the tire using the tire inflationcompressor until the recommended tirepressure (Y page 281) is reached.

X Then, press 0 on tire inflation compressorswitch :.The tire inflation compressor isdeactivated.

X Slide knob F quickly to the stop in valvecore extractor H.

X Turn knob F clockwise until the valve coreis firmly screwed into tire valve I.

i Do not pull the valve core extractor fromthe tire valve while the valve core isunscrewed from the tire valve. Tire sealantcould otherwise escape and make youdirty.The tire sealant is water-soluble. If tiresealant escapes, you can wash it away withwater.

X Press lever G and pull valve core extractorH from tire valve I.

X Screw the valve cap onto tire valve I.

After filling with tire sealant, (Y page 228).

Twin tires, inner wheels

E Valve extensionF Valve core extractor

X Unscrew the valve cap from valveextension E on the defective wheel.

X Screw valve core extractor F clockwise asfar as it will go onto valve extension E.

X Screw valve core extractor Fapproximately a further half turn to releasethe valve extension.

X Unscrew the valve extension and the valvecore extractor counter-clockwise from thetire valve.

X Unscrew the valve extension from the valvecore extractor.

F Valve core extractorG HookH ButtonI Angled connecting pieceJ Tire valveX Pull knob H out of valve core extractorF as far as it will go.

X Screw valve core extractor F clockwiseonto tire valve J.

X Press knob H into the valve core of valveJ, turning it gently as you do so, until theshaft of valve core extractor F engages.

X Turn knob H counter-clockwise until thevalve core is unscrewed.

X Pull knob H out of valve core extractorF as far as it will go.This pulls the valve core into the valve coreextractor and seals it against the valve coreextractor stop.

Wheels and tires 225

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

X Hook tire sealant bottle D into the uppervent hole in the wheel using hook G.

X Push angled connecting piece I locatedon the hose of tire sealant filler bottle Das far as it will go on to valve core extractorF and fix it in place.

X Make sure that the pressure release screwon pressure gauge A is closed.

X Connect connector B to the 12 V socket(12 V, 25 A, 300 W) on the center console(Y page 133).

! Only use the 12 V socket on the centerconsole to connect the electric air pump.You could otherwise damage the vehicle'selectrics.

X Start the engine.X Press I on tire inflation compressor

switch :.The tire inflation compressor is activated.The tire sealant is then pumped into the tireand the tire pressure is increased. Let thetire inflation compressor run for at least 10minutes until tire sealant bottle D iscompletely empty and the tire pressure isat least 43.5 psi (3.0 bar).

! Do not run the electric air pump for longerthan 20 minutes without a break; otherwiseit may overheat.The air pump can be used again once it hascooled down.

X Inflate the tire using the tire inflationcompressor until the recommended tirepressure (Y page 281) is reached.

X Then, press 0 on tire inflation compressorswitch :.The tire inflation compressor isdeactivated.

X Slide knob H quickly to the stop in valvecore extractor F.

X Turn knob H clockwise until the valve coreis firmly screwed into tire valve J.

i Do not pull the valve core extractor fromthe tire valve while the valve core isunscrewed from the tire valve. Tire sealantcould otherwise escape and make youdirty.The tire sealant is water-soluble. If tiresealant escapes, you can wash it away withwater.

X Pull knob H out of valve core extractorF as far as it will go.

X Unscrew valve core extractor F counter-clockwise from tire valve J.

X Screw valve extension E onto tire valveJ and tighten it.

X Screw the valve cap onto valve extensionE.

After filling with tire sealant, (Y page 228).

Twin tires, outer wheelThe tire valve is located on the inside of theouter wheel and should be positionedhorizontally on the left side of the wheel forthe repair process.

Valve tool with handle and turning piece

226 Wheels and tiresPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

E HandleF Turning pieceX Remove the cap from valve G on the

defective tire.X Guide the valve tool through the gap in the

wheel and push it onto tire valve G.X Hold handle E of the valve tool with one

hand and unscrew the valve core with theother hand using turning piece F of thevalve tool.

X Remove the valve tool through the gapcarefully, so that the valve core remainsengaged in the valve tool.

i If the valve insert is damaged or lost whenit is unscrewed, you can use the valve insertof the tire sealant bottle after you haveused the tire sealant (Y page 228).

G Tire valveH Angled connecting piece

H Angled connecting pieceI HookX Hook tire sealant bottle D into the upper

vent hole in the wheel using hook I.X Push angled connecting piece H located

on the hose of tire sealant filler bottle Das far as it will go onto valve G and fix it inplace.

X Make sure that the pressure release screwon pressure gauge A is closed.

X Connect connector B to the 12 V socket(12 V, 25 A, 300 W) on the center console(Y page 133).

! Only use the 12 V socket on the centerconsole to connect the electric air pump.You could otherwise damage the vehicle'selectrics.

X Start the engine.X Press I on the : switch on the tire inflation

compressor.The tire inflation compressor is activated.The tire sealant is then pumped into the tireand the tire pressure is increased. Run thetire inflation compressor until tire sealantbottle D is completely empty.

X Press 0 on tire inflation compressorswitch : after about 15 seconds.

X Loosen angled connecting piece H fromtire valve G and remove it.

X Screw in the valve core again using thevalve tool and remove the valve toolthrough the opening.

Wheels and tires 227

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

i If the valve insert is damaged or lost whenit is unscrewed, you can use the valve insertof the tire sealant bottle after you haveused the tire sealant.

X Unscrew the valve insert from the valve ofthe tire sealant bottle using the valveextractor.

! Do not run the electric air pump for longerthan 20 minutes without a break; otherwiseit may overheat.The air pump can be used again once it hascooled down.

X Push angled connecting piece ; locatedon tire inflation compressor hose = as faras it will go onto valve G and fix it in place.

X Push I on tire inflation compressorswitch : and inflate the tire to therecommended tire pressure (Y page 281).

X Then, press 0 on tire inflation compressorswitch :.The tire inflation compressor isdeactivated.

i The tire sealant is water-soluble. If tiresealant escapes, you can wash it away withwater.

X Screw the valve cap onto tire valve G.

After filling with tire sealant, (Y page 228).

After filling with tire sealantX Turn the pressure release screw on

pressure gauge A counter-clockwise andbleed the system.

X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock.

X Pull the tire inflation compressor connectorout of the 12 V socket.

X Stow the tire inflation compressor, tiresealant bottle D with the valve coreextractor and/or valve tool, the warning

triangle and hazard warning lights insidethe vehicle.

X Remove angled connecting piece ; fromvalve C of tire sealant filler bottle D andscrew the valve cap onto the valve.

G WarningYou must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).The "max. 50 mph" (80 km/h) sticker must beaffixed within the driver's field of vision.The vehicle's handling characteristics may beaffected.

X Pull away immediately.This enables the tire sealant to distributeinside the tire and create a more effectiveseal.

X Stop after driving for about three minutesand check the tire pressure using the tireinflation compressor, for example.

i You must connect the angled connectingpiece on hose = of the tire inflationcompressor directly to the tire valve on thetire.

X Correct the tire pressure accordingly if itdoes not correspond to the recommendedtire pressure (Y page 281).

X To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: open thepressure release screw on pressuregauge A.

X Drive to the nearest workshop and have thetire repaired or replaced.

X Clean the valve core extractor with cleanwater.

X Have tire sealant bottle D replaced assoon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized SprinterDealer.

228 Wheels and tiresPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

G WarningIf the minimum tire pressure of 43.5 psi(3 bar) still cannot be achieved, the tire is toobadly damaged.Do not drive any further. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop which has the necessaryspecialist knowledge and tools to carry outthe work required.For this reason, we recommend an authorizedSprinter Dealer. In particular, work relevant tosafety or on safety-related systems must becarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

%Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant disposed of at aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

! Have the tire sealant bottle replacedevery eight years at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized SprinterDealer.

Changing a wheel in the event of a flattire

G WarningTo avoid the risk of serious or even fatal injuryand to avoid damage to the vehicle, observethe following:Rthe vehicle's jack is intended only to raise

the vehicle for a short time when changinga wheel.Rposition the jack on the appropriate jacking

point only. Make sure that the jack iscorrectly positioned under the jacking pointbefore raising the vehicle.Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat

surface.Rbefore raising the vehicle, you should also

secure it against rolling away, e.g. byplacing chocks under the wheels. Neverrelease the parking brake while the vehicleis raised.

Rmake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). The vehicle couldotherwise slip off the jack or tip over.Rnever place your hands or feet under the

raised vehicle.Rnever start the engine, and prevent other

jolts or vibrations while the vehicle israised. The vehicle could otherwise slip offthe jack.

Preparing to change a wheelX Prepare the vehicle as described

(Y page 222).X Secure the vehicle against rolling away

using chocks or similar items.Use the chock (Y page 183) to do so.

G WarningThe vehicle could slip off the jack on uphill anddownhill gradients.To avoid the risk of causing serious or evenfatal injury or damage to the vehicle, do notchange wheels on uphill and downhillgradients.

On a level road:X Place chocks in front of and behind the

wheel which is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

X Take the vehicle tool kit and the jack fromthe footwell on the co-driver's side(Y page 182).

X Remove the spare wheel from the sparewheel bracket (Y page 185).

X On wheels with wheel bolts, remove thehub cap.

X Assemble the lug wrench extension usingthe middle rod and the rod with the largestdiameter from the three-piece jack pumplever.

X Starting with the middle rod, slide the lugwrench extension as far as it will go ontothe lug wrench.

Wheels and tires 229

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

! Only use the jack pump lever middle rodand the rod with the largest diameter as alug wrench extension. Only slide the middlerod as far as it will go onto the lug wrench.The rods may otherwise bend and bedistorted to such an extent that they canno longer be used as a pump lever for thejack.

X Loosen the wheel nuts or wheel bolts onthe wheel to be changed by about one turnusing extended lug wrench :. Do notunscrew the wheel bolts or wheel nutscompletely.

Hydraulic jackX Insert the third rod of the jack pump lever

into the lug wrench extension.The jack pump lever is assembled.

X Close pressure release screw ;.X To do this, use the flattened section on

pump lever : to turn pressure releasescrew ; clockwise to the stop.

i Never turn pressure release screw ;more than 1 or 2 full turns. Hydraulic fluidcould otherwise escape.

X Insert pump lever : into the recess on thejack and secure by turning it clockwise.

X Make sure that the jack is positioneddirectly under the jacking points describedbelow.

X Raise the vehicle by pumping the lever untilthe wheel is raised clear of the ground.Make sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).

Jacking point at the front axleThe vehicle jacking point is located under thelongitudinal member in front of the front axle.

Jacking point at the rear axleThe jacking point is located under thelongitudinal member in front of the rear axle.

Jacking point (example: vehicle type 2500)

230 Wheels and tiresPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Jacking point (example: vehicle type 3500 )

! Do not place the jack on the leaf spring orthe differential case.

On cab chassis vehicles, the jacking point islocated next to the front leaf spring support.

Jacking point (example: platform vehicle)

! Only position the jack on the jackingpoints intended for this purpose. You couldotherwise damage the vehicle.

Removing a wheelX Unscrew the wheel bolts or nuts.

! Do not place the wheel bolts or the wheelnuts in sand or dirt. The threads of thewheel bolts and wheel nuts could otherwisebe damaged when being installed.

X On front wheels with wheel nuts, removethe wheel nut cover.

X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WarningTo avoid the risk of serious or even fatal injuryand to avoid damage to the vehicle, observethe following:Rreplace the wheel bolts and wheel nuts if

they are damaged or have become rusty.Rnever oil or grease wheel bolts or wheel

nuts.Rif a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must

not drive the vehicle.Consult a qualified specialist workshopwhich has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired.For this reason, we recommend anauthorized Sprinter Dealer. In particular, allwork relevant to safety or on safety-relatedsystems must be carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.RFor safety reasons, we recommend that you

only use wheel bolts and wheel nuts whichhave been approved for Sprinter vehicles.Other wheel bolts or wheel nuts could workloose.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Push the wheel onto the wheel hub or theadapter for the spare wheel and press it on.

! If your vehicle is equipped with the tirepressure monitor, each wheel has anelectronic component.Tire-mounting tools should not be appliedin the area of the valve. Otherwise, theelectronic components could be damaged.Only have the tires changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedSprinter Dealer.

G WarningDo not tighten the wheel bolts and wheel nutscompletely while the vehicle is still jacked up.The vehicle could otherwise tip.

Wheels and tires 231

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Wheels with centering by wheel bolts:

: Wheel bolt for alloy wheel; Wheel bolt for steel wheel

! For a steel wheel, only use the short wheelbolts to install the steel spare wheel. Usingother wheel bolts to install the steel sparewheel could damage the brake system.

X Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten themlightly.

i On vehicles with alloy wheels, you will findshort wheel bolts suitable for the steelspare wheel in the vehicle tool kit.

For wheels with wheel nuts:X On the front wheels, push the wheel nut

cover onto the wheel bolts.X Screw in three wheel nuts over the fixing

discs of the wheel nut cover.X Turn the wheel so that the wheel bolts are

in the middle of the holes.X Screw on the rest of the wheel nuts.X Slightly tighten all the wheel nuts.

Lowering the vehicleX Open the pressure release screw on the

jack with pump lever slowly by one turn(Y page 230).

X Carefully lower the vehicle.X Put the jack aside.

X Pull the rod with the smallest diameter offthe pump lever.The shortened pump lever serves as a lugwrench extension.

X Starting with the middle rod, slide the lugwrench extension as far as it will go ontothe lug wrench.

! Only use the jack pump lever middle rodand the rod with the largest diameter as alug wrench extension. Only slide the middlerod as far as it will go onto the lug wrench.The rods may otherwise bend and bedistorted to such an extent that they canno longer be used as a pump lever for thejack.

Tightening torque pattern:—B Wheel bolts or wheel nutsX Tighten all the wheel bolts or wheel nuts

evenly in the sequence indicated using theextended lug wrench.

! The tightening torque is:Rfor wheel bolts: 177 lb-ft (240 Nm) (steel

wheel)/133 lb-ft (180 Nm) (alloy wheel)Rfor wheel nuts: 133 lb-ft (180 Nm)

You can now install the hub caps on steelwheels with wheel bolts. The installingprocedure depends on whether the hub capcovers the whole wheel or just the center.

! With a hub cap that covers the wholewheel, make sure the opening for the tirevalve is positioned over the valve.

232 Wheels and tiresPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

X Push the edge of the hub cap with bothhands against the wheel until it clicks intoplace.

! With a hub cap for the middle of the wheel,make sure that the clamping lugs of thecover are positioned over the wheel bolts.

X Hit the middle of the hub cap to engage iton the wheel.

X Push the piston on the hydraulic jack inagain and close the pressure releasescrew.

X Secure the faulty wheel in the spare wheelbracket (Y page 185).

X Stow the jack and the vehicle tool kit.X Check the tire pressure and correct if

necessary (Y page 280).X Retighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts to

the specified tightening torque after thevehicle has been driven for 30 miles(50 km).

Retightening wheel nuts/wheel bolts

G WarningAfter changing a wheel, for safety reasons youmust:Rhave the tightening torque checked. For

wheel bolts, the tightening torque is177 lb-ft (240 Nm) (steel wheel)/133 lb-ft(180 Nm) (alloy wheel). For wheel nuts, thetightening torque is 133 lb-ft (180 Nm). Thewheels could otherwise work loose.Rcheck the tire pressure and correct it if

necessary.Rhave the wheel bolts/wheel nuts

retightened after driving a distance of 30miles (50 km). The tightening torque forwheel bolts is 177 lb-ft (240 Nm)(steelwheel)/133 lb-ft (180 Nm) (alloy wheel).The tightening torque for wheel nuts is133 lb-ft (180 Nm).Rif using new or painted rims, have the wheel

bolts and wheel nuts retightened at the

specified tightening torque after the vehiclehas been driven for approximately 600 to3000 miles (1000 to 5000 km).Rhave the direction of rotation corrected, if

reversed, as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedSprinter Dealer. The vehicle handlingcharacteristics could otherwise beaffected.

Otherwise, the operating reliability and roadsafety of the vehicle could be jeopardized.This could cause you to lose control of yourvehicle, resulting in an accident and injuringyourself or others.

Electrical system

Notes on changing bulbsThe bulbs and lamps are an essentialcomponent of vehicle safety. Therefore, makesure that each bulb is always working.

G WarningBulbs and lamps can become very hot. Forthis reason, allow them to cool down beforechanging them. Otherwise, you could burnyourself when you touch them.Keep bulbs out of the reach of children.Otherwise, they could, for example, damagethe bulbs and injure themselves.Never use a bulb which has been dropped.Such a bulb may explode and injure you.Halogen bulbs are pressurized and couldexplode when you change them, especially ifthey are very hot. You should therefore weareye protection and gloves when you arechanging them.

G WarningXenon bulbs are under high voltage. You couldget an electric shock and be seriously or evenfatally injured if you touch the electriccontacts on Xenon bulbs. Therefore, do notremove the cover on Xenon bulbs.

Electrical system 233

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Do not change Xenon bulbs yourself, but havethem replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop which has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired.We recommend an authorized Sprinter Dealerfor this purpose. In particular, work relevantto safety or on safety-related systems mustbe carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

RTo prevent short circuits, switch off thelighting system before changing a bulb.ROnly touch new bulbs with a clean, lint-free

cloth or similar. Do not work with wet orgreasy fingers.ROnly install 12 V bulbs of the same type and

of the correct wattage.RHave the headlamp setting checked

regularly.RIf the new bulb still does not light up consult

a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Sprinter Dealer.RHave the following LEDs and bulbs replaced

at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Sprinter Dealer:- the additional turn signals in the exterior

mirrors- the high-mounted brake lamp- the Bi-Xenon bulbs- the fog lamps

! Make sure the bulbs are always securelyinstalled.

Changing bulbs

Front bulbs

Lights Bulb type: Additional turn signal

lamps in the exteriormirrors

PY 16 W

; Turn signal lamps PY 21 W

= Halogen headlamps:low-beam headlamps

H7 55 W

Bi-Xenon headlamps:low-beam/high-beamheadlamps

D1S–35 W

? Halogen headlamps:high-beam headlamps

H7 55 W

Cornering lamps H7 55 W

A Fog lamps H11 55 W

B Parking lamps/standing lamps

WY 5 W

234 Electrical systemPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

High-beam headlamps/cornering lamps,low-beam headlamps, fog lamps

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood (Y page 168).X Press catches : down.X Lift housing cover ; in the direction of the

arrow and remove it.

= Low-beam headlamps? Halogen low-beam headlamp/Xenon

cornering lamp headlampX Disconnect the connector from the bulb.X Detach the retainer spring and remove the

bulb.X Insert the new bulb so the base fits into the

recess of the socket.X Attach the retainer spring and connect the

plug to the bulb.X Insert housing cover ; into the lower

mounting points.

X Fold housing cover ; against theheadlamp casing.

X Push catches : up until you feel themengage.

Turn signal lamps

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood (Y page 168).X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and

remove it.X Turn the bulb counter-clockwise by

pressing lightly and pull it out of bulbholder :.

X Press a new bulb into bulb holder : andscrew in clockwise.

X Insert bulb holder : into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

Parking lamps and standing lamps

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood (Y page 168).X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove

it.

Electrical system 235

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

X Pull out the bulb holder with the bulb.X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.X Press a new bulb into the bulb holder.X Insert the bulb holder into the reflector.X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise to the

stop.

Rear bulbs

Cargo van/passenger van

Lights Bulb type: High-mounted brake

lampLED

; Brake lamps P 21 W

= Turn signal lamps PY 21 W

? Tail lamps/standinglamps

R 5 W

A License plate lamp W 5 W

B Rear fog lamps (driver'sside)

P 21 W

C Backup lamps P 21 W

Example platform

Lights Bulb typeD Perimeter lamp/

standing lampR 5 W

E Turn signal lamps PY 21 W

F Brake lamps P 21 W

G Backup lamps P 21 W

H Rear fog lamps (driver'sside)

P 21 W

I Tail lamps R 5 W

J License plate lamp R 5 W

Changing the rear bulbs (cargo van/passenger van)Rear light cluster

236 Electrical systemPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

X Switch off the lights.X Undo screws : and remove the rear lamp

lens in the direction of the arrow.X Pull the connector off the bulb holder.

; Retaining lugs= Brake lamps? Standing lamp/tail lampA Backup lampsB Turn signal lampsC Rear fog lampsX Release retaining lugs ; and take the bulb

holder out of the rear lamp cluster.X Turn the bulb counter-clockwise by

pressing lightly and pull it out of the bulbholder.

X Press a new bulb into the bulb holder andscrew in clockwise.

X Press the connector into the bulb holder.X Insert the lamp lens.

To do this, clip the bulb holder into the threeholes provided at the side and tightenscrews :.

License plate lamp

X Switch off the lights.X Insert a screwdriver or similar implement

into recess ; and carefully pry off lamplens :.

X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.X Insert a new bulb.X Align lamp lens : and clip it in so that it

engages.

Changing the rear bulbs (platform)

: Screws; Lamp lens= Perimeter lamp/standing lamp? Turn signal lampsA Brake lampsB Tail lampC Rear fog lampD License plate lampE Backup lampsX Switch off the lights.X Undo screws : and remove lamp lens ;.

Electrical system 237

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

X Turn the bulb counter-clockwise bypressing lightly and pull it out of the bulbholder.

X Push a new bulb into the bulb holder andscrew in clockwise.

X Position lamp lens ; and tightenscrews : again.

Changing additional bulbs

Outline lamp W 5 W (cab platform only)

X Switch off the lights.X Undo screws : and remove the lamp unit.X Turn bulb holder ; and remove it.X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Press a new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Screw bulb holder ; into the lamp unit.X Carefully position the lamp housing and

tighten screws : again.

Entry lamp W 5 W

X Switch off the lights.X Press in the latching spring of lamp

housing : with a suitable implement, e.g.a screwdriver.

X Pry off lamp housing :.X Disconnect cable connector =.X Pull out bulb holder ;.X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Press a new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Screw bulb holder ; into lamp unit :.X Connect cable connector =.

The connector locking spring must engage.X Align and engage lamp housing :.

Front interior light K 18 W

X Switch off the lights.X Press in the latching spring of lamp

housing : with a suitable implement, e.g.a screwdriver.

X Pry off lamp housing :.X Pull bulb ; out of the bulb holder.

238 Electrical systemPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

X Insert new bulb ;.X Align and engage lamp housing : on the

right-hand side.

! Have the bulbs for the overhead controlpanel interior lights changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop which has thenecessary specialist knowledge and toolsto carry out the work required. Werecommend an authorized Sprinter Dealerfor this purpose.You could otherwise damage the overheadcontrol panel.

Rear interior lights K 15 W

Interior light with switch

Interior light without switchX Switch off the lights.X Press in the latching spring of lamp

housing : with a suitable implement, e.g.a screwdriver.

X Pry off lamp housing :.X For interior lights without a switch, fold

back protective cover =.

X Pull bulb ; out of the bulb holder.X Insert new bulb ;.X For interior lights without a switch, fold

back protective cover =.X Align lamp housing : on the left-hand side

and engage.

Rear interior lights W 5 W

X Switch off the lights.X Undo screws : and remove the lamp lens.X Push bulb ; into the bulb holder and

remove by turning counter-clockwise.X Push new bulb ; into the bulb holder and

screw in by turning clockwise.X Position the lamp lens and tighten

screws : again.

Fusesi Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses

of the same rating (which can berecognized by the color and amperage) andwhich have the amperage specified in thefuse allocation chart. An authorizedSprinter Dealer will be happy to advise you.

G Warning!Only use fuses approved for Sprinter with thefuse rating specified for the respective

Electrical system 239

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

systems. Do not repair or bypass defectivefuses. A fire may otherwise result throughoverload. Have the problem assessed andresolved only at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Sprinter Dealer.

The fuses and relays for the standardequipment are located in the main fuse boxin the footwell on the left-hand side of thevehicle.Additional fuses and relays for the items ofoptional equipment are located in the fusebox under the driver's seat.

i The fuse allocation chart for the fuseboxes is in the vehicle document wallet inthe glove box and shows all numberedfuses.

X Switch off the ignition and the electricalconsumers before changing a fuse.

Main fuse box

The fuse box is located in the footwell on the left-hand side of the vehicle.1 Unlocked2 LockedX To open: unlock 1 the quick-release

fastener and remove the cover.X To close: install the bottom edge of the

cover and fold upwards.The cover must engage.

X Lock 2 the quick-release fastener.

240 Electrical systemPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Arrangement

FusesFuse-relay box (SRB)

No. Consumer Fuse rating

1 Horn 15 A

2 Electronic steering lock(electronic ignition/startswitch)

25 A

3 Electronic ignition/startswitch

10 A

4 Light switch/switch uniton center console

5 A

5 Windshield wipers 30 A

6 Fuel pump 15 A

7 MRM (jacket tubemodule)

5 A

8 Terminal 87 (2) 20 A

9 Terminal 87 (3) 25 A

10 Terminal 87 (4) 10 A

11 Terminal 15 R vehicle 15 A

No. Consumer Fuse rating

12 Air bag control unit 10 A

13 Cigarette lighter/glovebox lamp/radio

15 A

14 Diagnostics socket/lightswitch/instrumentcluster

5 A

15 Front-compartmentheating

5 A

16 Terminal 87 (1) 10 A

17 Air bag control unit 10 A

18 Terminal 15 vehicle,brake light switch

7.5 A

19 Interior lighting 7.5 A

20 Front-passenger powerwindow switch/terminal30/2 signal acquisitionand actuation module

25 A

21 Engine control unit 5 A

Electrical system 241

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

No. Consumer Fuse rating

22 Brake system (ABS) 5 A

23 Starter motor 20 A

24 Engine components 10 A

25 12 V socket in the centerconsole

25 A

Fuse block F55/1

No. Consumer Fuse rating

1 Left door control unit 25 A

2 Diagnostics socket 10 A

3 Brake system (valves) 25 A

4 Brake system (deliverypump)

40 A

5 Terminal 87 (5) engine 7.5/10 A

6 Terminal 87 (6) engine 7.5/10 A

7 Headlamp cleaningsystem

30 A

8 Anti-theft alarm system(ATA)

15 A

9 Additional turn signalmodule

10 A

Fuse block F55/2

No. Consumer Fuse rating

10 Radio 15 A

11 Mobile phone 7.5 A

12 Blower, front/auxiliaryheating blower setting 1

30 A

13 Auxiliary heating digitaltimer, radio receiver/basic wiring DIN-slot

7.5 A

No. Consumer Fuse rating

14 Seat heating 30 A

15 Unassigned —

16 Heating, rear-compartment heating/front-compartment airconditioning/CD player

10 A

17 Motion detector/convenience lighting

10 A

18 Rear-compartment air-conditioning system

7.5 A

Prefuse box in the battery compartment in thedriver's footwell F59

No. Consumer Fuse rating

1 Preglow relay/secondary air pump

80/40 A

2 Air-conditioning systemcooling fan, cab

60/40 A

3 Signal acquisition andactuation module(SAM)/fuse-relay box(SRB)

80 A

4 Auxiliary battery/retarder

150 A

242 Electrical systemPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

No. Consumer Fuse rating

5 Terminal 30 fuse box,signal acquisition andactuation module(SAM)/fuse-relay box(SRB)

150 A

6 Connection point on thebase of the seat

Bridge

7 PTC heater booster 150 A

Fuse box under the driver's seat

The fuse box is located on the outside of the baseof the driver's seat.: Catch springX To open: move the seat to the highest

position (Y page 63).X Press both latching springs : down and

remove the cover.X To close: install the bottom edge of the

cover and fold upwards.The cover must engage.

Electrical system 243

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Arrangement

FusesFuse block F55/3

No. Consumer Fuse rating

1 Mirror setting/rearwindow defroster

5 A

2 Rear window wiper 30 A

3 Rear view camera/mobile phone/DIN-slotbasic wiring (roof)

5 A

4 Working speed governor(ADR)/power take-off/trailer control unit AAG

7.5 A

5 Electronic transmissioncontrol, ETC control unit

10 A

6 Unassigned —

7 Electronic selector levermodule

10 A

No. Consumer Fuse rating

8 Terminal 15 bodymanufacturer/loadingtailgate/tipper

10 A

9 Roof ventilator/siren 15 A

Fuse block F55/4

No. Consumer Fuse rating

10 Terminal 30, body/equipmentmanufacturer

25 A

11 Terminal 15, body/equipmentmanufacturer

15 A

12 D+, body/equipmentmanufacturer

10 A

13 Rear-compartment airconditioning

30 A

14 Trailer power socket 20 A

244 Electrical systemPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

No. Consumer Fuse rating

15 Trailer recognition unit 25 A

16 Tire pressure monitor/PARKTRONIC

7.5 A

17 PSM control unit 25 A

18 PSM control unit 25 A

Fuse block F55/5

No. Consumer Fuse rating

19 Overhead control panel 5 A

20 Perimeter lamp 7.5 A

21 Rear window defroster 1 30 A

22 Rear window defroster 2 15 A

23 12 V socket rear left,cargo compartment/passengercompartment/non-MBbody electrics

15 A

24 12 V socket under thebase of driver's seat

15 A

25 12 V socket rear right,cargo compartment/passenger compartment

15 A

26 Auxiliary heating 25 A

27 Heater booster system 25 A

Fuse block F55/6

No. Consumer Fuse rating

28 Exhaust gasaftertreatment – SCR10

control unit

10 A

29 Unassigned —

No. Consumer Fuse rating

30 Brake booster 30 A

31 Rear-compartmentheating blower/slidingdoor closing assistance,left

30/15 A

32 Exhaust gasaftertreatment – SCR10

relay power supply

10 A

33 Sliding door closingassistance, right

15 A

34 Exhaust gasaftertreatment – SCR10

heater 1 tank

15 A

35 Exhaust gasaftertreatment – SCR10

heater 2 hose

15 A

36 Exhaust gasaftertreatment – SCR10

heater 3 delivery pump

10 A

Batteries for the remote control

Notes on changing the batteries

G Warning!Batteries are toxic and contain causticsubstances. For this reason, keep batteriesout of the reach of children.If a battery has been swallowed, visit a doctorimmediately.

%Environmental noteBatteries contain toxic substances.It is illegal to dispose of them withhousehold waste. Batteries must becollected separately and be

10 Selective Catalytic Reduction.

Batteries for the remote control 245

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

recycled in an environmentallyresponsible manner.Dispose of old batteries in anenvironmentally responsiblemanner. Take discharged batteriesto a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. an authorized Sprinter Dealer,or to a special collection point forold batteries.

Key with remote controlYou need two CR 2025 3 V cell batteries.When changing the batteries, do not pressany of the buttons on the remote control.

: Battery cover; Key release buttonX Press key release button ;.

The key folds out.X Remove battery cover : in the direction of

the arrow.

X Remove old batteries from the battery tray.

i When inserting the batteries, make surethat they are clean and lint-free.

X Insert the new batteries with the positiveterminal facing upwards. Use a lint-freecloth to do so.

X Position battery cover : and press downuntil it engages noticeably.

X Check the function of all the remote controlbuttons on the vehicle.

Automatic transmission

In the event of a malfunction, it is possible tomanually release the selector lever from thelock in parking position P, e.g. to have thevehicle towed away.

X Remove cover :.

X Slide implement ; as far as it will go intothe opening.

X Push the implement in and simultaneouslymove the selector lever out of position P.

246 Automatic transmissionPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

X Remove implement ;.X Refit cover :.

Jump starting, tow-starting andtowing away

Jump-starting

General notesIf the vehicle battery is flat, the engine can bestarted from another vehicle using jumpercables. For this purpose, the vehicle has ajump-starting connection point in the enginecompartment.The additional battery in the enginecompartment is not suitable for jump-startingoperations. If your vehicle requires jump-starting, or if you use it to jump-start anothervehicle, use the jump-starting connectionpoint in the engine compartment.

G WarningExplosive oxyhydrogen is produced whenbatteries are being charged. When working onbatteries, always make sure that the workarea is well ventilated.Keep flames and naked lights away from thebattery, and do not smoke.Prevent the creation of sparks (e.g. whendisconnecting the batteries). Sparks canignite the oxyhydrogen gas and cause thebatteries to explode. You and others could beseriously injured.

G WarningDue to the gases which escape from batteries,there is a risk of acid burns when jump-starting a vehicle. Do not lean over the batterywhile the engine is being jump-started.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy startingattempts.Do not use a rapid-charging device to startthe engine.

When jump-starting, observe the followingpoints:Rjump-starting must only be performed

when the engine and catalytic converterare cold.Rdo not start the engine if the battery is

frozen. Let the battery thaw first.Rwhen jump-starting, use only batteries with

the same nominal voltage and a similarcapacity.Ronly use jump leads protected against

polarity reversal, with adequate cross-section and with insulated battery terminalclamps.

X Make sure that the two vehicles do nottouch.

X Apply the parking brake.X Move the selector lever of the automatic

transmission to position P.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Switch on the battery isolating switch

(Y page 87).X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Open the hood (Y page 168).

Connecting the jumper cable

Connection planX Remove the cover from positive

terminal ; of the donor battery.X First connect one of the positive terminal

clamps of the jumper cable to positiveterminal ; of the donor battery.

Jump starting, tow-starting and towing away 247

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

Jump-starting connection point left of the air filterX Then, use other positive terminal

clamp : of the jumper cable to turn thered protective cap of the jump-startingconnection point clockwise and slide itback and connect positive terminalclamp : to positive terminal A of thejump-starting connection point.

i Do not connect the jumper cable to theadditional battery in the enginecompartment. The additional battery is notsuitable for jump-starting operations.

X Run the donor vehicle's engine at idlingspeed.

X First, connect the negative terminal clampsof the jumper cable to negative terminal= of the donor battery and then to earthcontact ? of your own vehicle.

X Start the engine.i You can now switch electrical consumers

back on but do not switch on the lights.X First, disconnect the negative terminal

clamps of the jumper cable from earthcontact ? and then from negative terminal= of the donor battery.

X First disconnect the positive terminalclamps of the jumper cable from positiveterminal A of the jump-startingconnection point and then from positiveterminal ; of the donor battery.The red protective cap springs back to itsinitial position when positive terminalclamp : is removed from the jump-starting connection point.

X Place the cover on positive terminal ; ofthe donor battery.

i You can now switch the lights on.X Have the battery checked at a qualified

specialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedSprinter Dealer.

Tow-startingYou cannot tow-start your vehicle as it has anautomatic transmission.

Towing

General notes

G WarningTow the vehicle using a rigid towing bar if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical

system is malfunctioning.There is no power assistance for the steeringand braking when the engine is not running.You must then use significantly greater forceto steer the vehicle and brake.Do not tow the vehicle if the key cannotbe turned in the ignition lock. The steering isthen locked and it will not be possible to steerthe vehicle.When towing another vehicle, its weightshould not be greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle.

Comply with national regulations whentowing.It is preferable to have the vehicletransported on a transporter or trailer insteadof towing it. When towing the vehicle, use arigid towing bar.

! Only secure the tow cable or tow bar tothe towing eyes. You could otherwisedamage the vehicle.

i Before towing, deactivate the automaticlocking while driving function (Y page 55).

248 Jump starting, tow-starting and towing awayPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

You could otherwise become locked outwhen pushing or towing the vehicle.

! Do not exceed the towing speed of31 mph (50 km/h). You could otherwisedamage the transmission.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X For a towing distance of up to 30 miles (50 km), move the selector lever toposition N.

G WarningA propeller shaft could fall off as it is beingremoved and injure you. Secure the propellershaft before removal to prevent it from fallingdown, e.g. with the aid of another person orby tying the propeller shaft up.

X For a towing distance greater than30 miles(50 km), remove the propellershafts to the driven axles.

! Always use new bolts when installing thepropeller shafts.

Front towing eye

The fixture for the front towing eye is located in thebumper.X To install the towing eye: press on

cover : in the direction of the arrow andremove cover :.You will see the fixture for the towing eye.

X Take the towing eye and lug wrench fromthe vehicle tool kit (Y page 182).

X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to thestop.

X Insert the lug wrench handle into thetowing eye and tighten.

X To remove the towing eye: take the lugwrench from the vehicle tool kit.

X Insert the lug wrench handle into thetowing eye and turn the wrench counter-clockwise.

X Unscrew the towing eye.X Insert cover : with the lug at the bottom

and press it in at the top until it engages.X Place the towing eye and lug wrench back

in the vehicle tool kit.

Rear towing eyeIf your vehicle is equipped with a rear towingeye, this is installed to the rear of the chassison the right-hand side when viewed in thedirection of travel.

i If your vehicle has a trailer coupling, usethis for towing.

Recovering a vehicle that is stuckIf the drive wheels are dug in to loose ormuddy ground, tow the vehicle with extremecare, particularly if it is laden.Pull the vehicle smoothly and straight ahead.There is otherwise a risk of damage to thechassis.Do not tow the vehicle out with a trailerattached.Tow the vehicle out backwards in the tracksalready made, if possible.

Towing the vehicle in the event ofparticular malfunctions

With transmission damageG WarningA propeller shaft could fall off as it is beingremoved and injure you. Secure the propellershaft before removal to prevent it from falling

Jump starting, tow-starting and towing away 249

Prac

tical

adv

ice

Z

down, e.g. with the aid of another person orby tying the propeller shaft up.

X Always remove the propeller shafts leadingto the driven axles.

! Always use new bolts when installing thepropeller shafts.

With front axle damageX Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition

lock.X Raise the front axle.

G WarningA propeller shaft could fall off as it is beingremoved and injure you. Secure the propellershaft before removal to prevent it from fallingdown, e.g. with the aid of another person orby tying the propeller shaft up.

! The ignition must be switched off if thevehicle is being towed with the front or rearaxle raised. Otherwise, ESP® may interveneand damage the brake system.

With rear axle damageX Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition

lock.X Raise the rear axle.

Malfunction in the electrical systemIf the battery is defective, the automatictransmission will be locked in position P. Toshift the automatic transmission toposition N, you must provide power to thevehicle's electrical system in the same wayas jump-starting (Y page 247).Have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.

Transporting the vehicleThe towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a special transporter or trailer fortransportation.

! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheelsor rims, not by vehicle parts such as axle or

steering components. There is otherwise arisk of damage to the vehicle.

X Move the selector lever of the automatictransmission to position N.

250 Jump starting, tow-starting and towing awayPr

actic

al a

dvic

e

Vehicle equipment ............................ 252Important safety notes .................... 252Operation ........................................... 253Operation in winter ........................... 254Tire pressure ..................................... 255Loading the vehicle .......................... 261Maximum tire load ............................ 265Tire labeling ....................................... 266Definition for tires and loading ........ 268Changing wheels ............................... 271

251

Whe

els

and

tires

Vehicle equipment

i Diese Betriebsanleitung beschreibt alleModelle, Serien- und SonderausstattungenIhres Fahrzeugs, die zum Zeitpunkt desRedaktionsschlusses dieserBetriebsanleitung erhältlich waren.Länderspezifische Abweichungen sindmöglich. Beachten Sie, dass Ihr Fahrzeugnicht mit allen beschriebenen Funktionenausgestattet sein könnte. Dies betrifft auchsicherheitsrelevante Systeme undFunktionen.

Important safety notes

Contact an authorized Sprinter Dealer if yourequire information on tested andrecommended tires and wheels for summerand winter driving. Advice on purchasing andcaring for tires is also available there.

G WarningReplace rims or tires with the samedesignation, manufacturer and type as shownon the original part. For further information,contact an authorized Sprinter Dealer. Ifincorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted,the wheel brakes or suspension componentscan be damaged. Also, the operatingclearance of the wheels and the tires may nolonger be correct.

G Warning!Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tiretread is worn to minimum tread depth, or ifthe tires have sustained damage, replacethem.When replacing rims, only use genuineSprinter wheel bolts specified for theparticular rim type. Failure to do so can resultin the bolts loosening and possibly anaccident.Retreaded tires are not tested orrecommended by the dealer named on theinside cover page, since previous damage

cannot always be recognized on retreads. Theoperating safety of the vehicle cannot beassured when such tires are used.

G Warning!Only for vehicles without a tire pressuremonitor:For safety reasons, we recommend that youonly use tire valves manufactured bySchrader. These have been tested for use onyour vehicle.Use only tire valves of type:RTR 600 for the vehicle types 2500RTR 418 for the vehicle types 3500Using other tire inflation valves or valvesmade by other manufacturers can result intire pressure loss and thereby impair theoperating safety of the vehicle.

! Do not screw additional weights (checkvalves, etc.) onto the tire valves. Theelectronic components could thus bedamaged.

G WarningIf you feel a sudden significant vibration orride disturbance, or you suspect that possibledamage to your vehicle has occurred, youshould turn on the hazard warning lamps,carefully slow down, and drive with caution toan area which is a safe distance from the road.Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbodyfor possible damage. If the vehicle appearsunsafe, have the vehicle towed to the nearestauthorized Sprinter Dealer for repairs.

G WarningDo not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affectsthe ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Youmight lose control of the vehicle. Continueddriving with a flat tire or driving at high speedwith a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

252 Important safety notesW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Operation

Notes on drivingRIf the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tire

pressures, and correct them, if necessary.RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that

the tires do not get deformed by the curbor other obstacles. If it is necessary to driveover curbs, speed humps or similarelevations, try to do so slowly and at anobtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires,particularly the sidewalls, can getdamaged.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheelsand tires

G WarningRegularly check the tires for damage.Damaged tires can cause tire inflationpressure loss. As a result, you could losecontrol of your vehicle.Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tiretread is worn to minimum tread depth, or ifthe tires have sustained damage, replacethem.

RRegularly check the wheels and tires ofyour vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts,punctures, tears, bulges on tires anddeformation or severe corrosion onwheels), at least once a month, as well asafter driving off-road or on rough roads.Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tirepressure.RRegularly check the tire tread depth and

the condition of the tread across the wholewidth of the tire (Y page 253). If necessary,turn the front wheels to full lock in order toinspect the inner side of the tire surface.RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect

the valve against dirt and moisture. Do notinstall anything onto the valve (such as tirepressure monitoring systems) other than

the standard valve cap or other valve capsapproved for your vehicle.RRegularly check the pressure of all the tires

including the spare wheel, particularly priorto long trips, and correct the pressure(Y page 255).

Tire tread

G WarningAlthough the applicable federal motor vehiclesafety laws consider a tire to be worn whenthe tread wear indicators (TWI) becomevisible at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), werecommend that you do not allow your tiresto wear down to that level. As tread depthapproaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesionproperties on a wet road are sharply reduced.Depending upon the weather and/or roadsurface (conditions), the tire traction varieswidely.

Replace tires before they become excessivelyworn, as the tire traction on wet road surfacesdecreases significantly when the tread depthis less than ⅛ in (3 mm).Tread wear indicators (TWIs) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned over the tiretread. They are visible once the tread depthis approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm). If this is thecase, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.The recommended tread depth for summertires is at least ⅛ in (3 mm). Therecommended tread depth for winter tires isat least 1/6 in (4 mm).

Operation 253

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Bar marking : for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.

Notes on selecting, mounting andreplacing tiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same

type and make.ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto

the wheels.RAfter mounting new tires, run them in at

moderate speeds for the first 60 miles(100 km) as they only reach their fullperformance after this distance.RDo not use tires that are excessively worn

as the tire traction on wet road surfacesdecreases significantly when the treaddepth is less than ⅛ in (3 mm).RReplace the tires after six years at the

latest, regardless of wear. This also appliesto the spare wheel.

The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:Rdriving styleRtire pressureRmileagePermissible wheel/tire combinations andinstructions for tires can be found under"Tires and wheels" in the "Technical data"section (Y page 280).

Operation in winter

Please bear the following in mindHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. at an authorizedSprinter Dealer, at the onset of winter.Observe the notes under "Winter driving" inthe "Operation" section (Y page 271).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), summertires lose a lot of their elasticity, and thus alsolose grip and braking effect – equip yourvehicle with M+S tires. Summer tires maydevelop cracks leading to permanent damageif they are used at very low temperatures. Wecannot accept responsibility for this type ofdamage.

M+S tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), usewinter tires or all-season tires — both aremarked M+S.In wintry road conditions, only winter tireswith the snowflake symbol i in additionto the M+S marking offer the best possiblegrip. Only these tires allow driving safetysystems such as ABS and ESP® to continueto work optimally in winter, as these tireshave been designed specifically for driving onsnow.For safe driving, use M+S tires of the samemake and tread pattern on all wheels.

G WarningM+S tires with a tread depth of less than 1/6

inch (4 mm) must be replaced. They are nolonger suitable for winter operation.

Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.

254 Operation in winterW

heel

s an

d tir

es

When you have mounted M+S tires:X Check the tire pressure (Y page 255).X Restart the tire pressure monitor

(Y page 258).

G WarningIf you use your spare wheel when M+S tiresare fitted on the other wheels, be aware thatthe difference in tire characteristics may verywell impair turning stability and that overalldriving stability may be reduced. Adapt yourdriving style accordingly.Have the spare wheel replaced by a regularroad wheel with an M+S tire at the nearestauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

Snow chainsSnow chains increase traction on roads inwintry conditions.We recommend, for safety reasons, that youonly use class U snow chains or traction aidsthat conform to the SAE type U specificationand are approved for Sprinters. You canobtain information about snow chains fromany authorized Sprinter Dealer.ROnly use snow chains when the road is

covered by a layer of snow. Do not exceedthe maximum permissible speed of 30 mph(50 km/h). Remove the snow chains assoon as possible once the road is no longercovered with snow.RThe use of snow chains may be restricted

by local regulations. Observe the relevantregulations when mounting snow chains.

! Check the snow chains for damage beforemounting them. Damaged or worn snowchains may break, causing damage towheels, wheel arches or wheel suspension.For this reason, you must use only snowchains that are free of defects. Observe themanufacturer's mounting instructions.

If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:RYou may not mount snow chains on all

wheel/tire combinations. When mountingthe snow chains, note the permissible tireand snow chain dimensions.RMount snow chains only in pairs and only

to the rear wheels. Observe themanufacturer's mounting instructions.RCheck the chain tension after driving

approximately 0.5 miles (1.0 km).

i You can deactivate ASR when pullingaway with snow chains mounted.(Y page 49). This allows the wheels to spinin a controlled manner, generating moretractive force (friction effect).

Tire pressure

Notes about tire pressure

G WarningFollow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

Tire pressure 255

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

A table of recommended tire pressures canbe found on the Tire & Loading Informationplacard11 or the tire pressure plate on theB-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 256).Use a tire pressure gauge intended for thispurpose. The outer appearance of a tire doesnot permit any reliable conclusion about thetire pressure. On vehicles equipped with theelectronic tire pressure monitor, the tirepressure can be checked using the on-boardcomputer.

G Warning!If the tire pressure drops repeatedly:Rcheck the tires for foreign objectsRcheck whether the wheel is losing air or the

valve is leakingRmake sure that only a valve cap approved

by the dealer listed on the inside of thecover page is on the tire valve

Underinflated tires have a negative effect onvehicle safety, which could lead you to causean accident.

Correct the tire pressure only when the tiresare cold. Tires are cold when the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least three hours or hasbeen driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tiretemperature changes depending on theambient temperature, driving speed and tireload. If the tire temperature changes by18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes byapproximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Takethis into consideration if you are checking tirepressure when the tires are warm, andcorrect the tire pressure only if it is too lowfor current operating conditions. If you checkthe tire pressure when the tires are warm, itresults in a higher value than when the tiresare cold. This is normal. Do not under anycircumstances release the air in order toadjust the pressure to the prescribed valuefor cold tires. Tire pressure would then be toolow.

Take note of the recommended tire pressuredata for cold tires on the Tire & LoadingInformation placard11 or the tire pressureplate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of thevehicle.

i The data shown on the following tire datalabels are examples. Tire pressure data arevehicle-specific and may deviate from thedata illustrated here. The tire pressure dataapplicable to your vehicle can be found onthe Tire & Loading Information placard ortire pressure plate of your vehicle.

Tire & Loading Information placard11

Tire pressure plate

You will find recommended tire pressurespecifications : for cold tires and for a fullyloaded vehicle on the Tire & LoadingInformation placard or on the tire pressureplate. The tire pressure specifications applyto the factory-mounted tires.

11 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4536 kg).

256 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Tire pressure too low or too high

Underinflated tires

G WarningFollow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.

Underinflated tires can:Rwear excessively and/or unevenlyRadversely affect fuel economyRfail from being overheatedRadversely affect handling

Overinflated tires

G WarningFollow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.

Overinflated tires can:Radversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRbe more likely to become damagedRadversely affect ride comfortRincrease stopping distance

Maximum tire pressures

G WarningNever exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure. Follow recommended tire inflationpressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely

affect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.

: Maximum permitted tire pressure(example)

i The actual values for tires are specific toeach vehicle and may deviate from thevalues in the illustration.

When adjusting the tire pressures alwaysobserve the recommended tire pressure foryour vehicle (Y page 255).

Checking the tire pressure

G WarningFollow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.

Tire pressure 257

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

Check the tire pressure at least once a month.Only check and correct tire pressures whenthe tires are cold.

Checking the tire pressure manuallyIn order to determine and adjust the tirepressures, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire you wish

to check.X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto

the valve.X Read the tire pressure and compare it with

the recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard12 or on the tirepressure plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside of the vehicle.

X If necessary, increase the tire pressure tothe recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release airby pressing down the metal pin in the valveusing the tip of a pen, for example. Then,check the tire pressure again using the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat the steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

Important safety notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, thevehicle's wheels have sensors installed thatmonitor the tire pressures in all four tires. Thetire pressure monitor warns you when the

pressure drops in one or more of the tires. Thetire pressure monitor only functions if thecorrect wheel electronics units are installedin all wheels.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow hwarning lamp in the instrument cluster forindicating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA)or pressure loss (Canada). Depending on howthe warning lamp flashes or lights up, anunderinflated tire or a malfunction in the tirepressure monitor is displayed:Rif the h warning lamp is lit continuously,

the tire pressure on one or more tires issignificantly too low. The tire pressuremonitor is not malfunctioning.RUSA only: if the h warning lamp flashes

for 60 seconds and then remains litconstantly, the tire pressure monitor ismalfunctioning.

G WarningEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on theinside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicatedon the Tire and Loading Information placardor the tire inflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflation pressurefor those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly underinflated tire causes the tireto overheat and can lead to tire failure.

12 Only for vehicles with a gross vehicle weight rating of less than 10,000 lbs(4536 kg).

258 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe tire pressure monitoring system is notoperating properly. The TPMS malfunctionindicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequence willcontinue upon subsequent vehicle start-upsas long as the malfunction exists. When themalfunction indicator is lit, the system maynot be able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofincompatible replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

i USA only:If the tire pressure monitor ismalfunctioning, it may take more than10 minutes for the h tire pressurewarning lamp to inform you of themalfunction by flashing for 60 seconds andthen remaining lit.When the malfunction has been rectified,the tire pressure warning lamp goes outafter driving for a few minutes.

Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe on-board computer. After a few minutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the on-board computer

i The tire pressure values indicated by theon-board computer may differ from thosemeasured at a gas station with a pressuregauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured atsea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressurevalues indicated by a pressure gauge arehigher than those shown by the on-boardcomputer. In this case, do not reduce thetire pressures.

i If radio transmitting equipment (e.g.wireless headphones, two-way radios) isoperated inside the vehicle or in the vicinityof the vehicle, this can interfere with theoperation of the tire pressure monitor.

i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. This device must withstand anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.Unauthorized modifications to the devicecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.

i Canada only:This device complies with the RSS-210Rules from Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Unauthorized modifications to the devicecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.

Tire pressure 259

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Calling up tire pressure using the on-board computer

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.X Press the V or U button repeatedly

until the standard display (Y page 77) isshown.

X Press the & or * button repeatedlyuntil the current tire pressure for theindividual tires is displayed.

If the vehicle has been parked for more than20 minutes or you have not then driven fasterthan 18 mph (30 km/h), you will see thefollowing message:tire press. displayed after driving for several minutesi The tire pressure values indicated by the

on-board computer may differ from thosemeasured at a gas station using a pressuregauge. The on-board computer willgenerally give you a more exact value.

Tire pressure loss warning system

Vehicles without steering wheel buttonsThe h tire pressure warning lamp in theinstrument cluster comes on if the pressureof one or more tires drops significantly.

i USA only:If the h tire pressure warning lampflashes for just 60 seconds and then is litpermanently, the tire pressure monitor ismalfunctioning (Y page 196).

If a malfunction of the tire pressure monitoris recognized, the h tire pressurewarning lamp shows this at the latest afterten minutes.

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsA message is displayed and the h tirepressure warning lamp in the instrumentcluster comes on if the pressure of one ormore tires drops significantly.The tire pressure is shown in two redrectangles. The pressure of the tireconcerned is shown in one of the rectangles(Y page 199). A warning tone also sounds.

i USA only:If the h tire pressure warning lampflashes for just 60 seconds and then is litpermanently, the tire pressure monitor ismalfunctioning (Y page 196).If a malfunction of the tire pressure monitoris recognized, the h tire pressurewarning lamp shows this at the latest afterten minutes.

Reactivating the tire pressure monitorIn most cases, the tire pressure monitordetects the new reference valuesautomatically, e.g. after you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged wheels or tiresRinstalled new wheels or tiresIf you wish to define new reference valuesmanually:X Refer to the table on the tire data labels

(Y page 256) to make sure that thepressure of all four tires is set correctly.Observe the notes on tire pressures in the"Tires and wheels" section (Y page 280).

260 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Vehicles without steering wheel buttonsX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.X Press the 4 menu button on the

instrument cluster repeatedly until thefollowing message is displayed:+CAL- TPMS

X Press the f button on the instrumentcluster.The following message is displayed:OK TPMSThe tire pressure monitor activationprocess has begun. The tire pressuresmeasured for the individual wheels arestored as the new reference values,provided that the tire pressure monitorconsiders them to be plausible.

If you wish to cancel the activation process:X Press the g button or the 4 menu button

on the instrument cluster.The activation process is canceledautomatically if 30 seconds elapse with noinput.

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.X Press the V or U button on the

steering wheel repeatedly until thestandard display (Y page 77) appears.

X Press the & or * button on thesteering wheel repeatedly until the currentpressure of the individual tires is displayed,or the display shows the followingmessage:tire press. displayed after driving for several minutes

X Press the 9 reset button on theinstrument cluster.The following message is displayed:Monitor current tire pressure?

X Press the W button on the steeringwheel.The following message is displayed:

tire press. monitor reactivatedThe tire pressure monitor activationprocess has begun. The tire pressuresmeasured for the individual wheels arestored as the new reference values,provided that the tire pressure monitorconsiders them to be plausible.

If you wish to cancel the activation process:X Press the X button on the steering

wheel.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G Warning!Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on theB-pillar on the driver's side or on the vehicleidentification plate on the driver seat frame.Overloading the tires can overheat them,possibly causing a blowout. Overloading thetires can also result in handling or steeringproblems, or brake failure.

The Tire and Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar

The following instruction labels on yourvehicle show the maximum possible load.(1) Only for vehicles with a gross vehicle

weight rating of less than10,000 lbs(4536 kg):

Loading the vehicle 261

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Tire and Loading Informationplacard : is on the B-pillar on thedriver's side. The Tire and LoadingInformation placard shows thepermissible number of occupants and themaximum permissible vehicle load. Italso contains details of the tire sizes andcorresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is locatedon the driver's seat frame. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicleoccupants, the fuel and the cargo. Youcan also find information about themaximum gross axle weight rating of thefront and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or themaximum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

Tire and Loading Information placardOnly for vehicles with a gross vehicle weightrating of less than 10,000 lbs(4536 kg).

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight ratingi The details on the Tire and Loading

Information placard illustration are only anexample. The maximum permissible grossvehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific andmay differ from that which is illustrated.You can find the valid maximumpermissible gross vehicle weight rating foryour vehicle on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard.

: Maximum number of seats; Maximum permissible gross vehicle

weight ratingX The Tire and Loading Information placard

gives you details on maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating ;: "The grossweight of occupants and luggage mustnever exceed XXX kilograms or XXXpounds."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,cargo, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

Number of seatsi The details on the Tire and Loading

Information placard illustration are only anexample. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the detailsshown. The number of seats in your vehiclecan be found on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard.

262 Loading the vehicleW

heel

s an

d tir

es

: Maximum number of seats; Maximum permissible gross vehicle

weight ratingMaximum number of seats : determines themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

Determining the maximum load

Individual stepsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The

combined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will betraveling in your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five150 lb passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage load

capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. For reasons of safety, that weightmust not exceed the available cargo andluggage cargo capacity calculated in step4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If you intend to towa trailer behind your vehicle, the load on thetrailer is transferred to your vehicle.Consult this Operator's Manual todetermine how this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity of yourvehicle (Y page 265).

Loading the vehicle 263

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Example: Steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples of how to calculate total load and cargo capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea cargo limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure youalways use the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard (Y page 262).

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 2 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of the occupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occupants

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)Occupant 2:180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3:160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4:140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5:120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1:200 lbs (91 kg)Occupant 2:190 lbs (86 kg)Occupant 3:150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)

Gross weight of all occupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

264 Loading the vehicleW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 3 Permissible cargo and trailer load/noseweight (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

1500 lbs(680 kg) -750 lbs (340 kg)= 750 lbs(340 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg) -540 lbs (245 kg)= 960 lbs(435 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg) -150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs(612 kg)

The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 152).

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargocarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details aboutthis can be found on the vehicle identificationplate on the driver seat frame of your vehicle(Y page 277).Gross vehicle weight: the gross weight ofthe vehicle, all passengers, cargo and trailerload/noseweight (if applicable) must notexceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.Gross axle weight rating: the maximumpermissible load that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (grossvehicle weight and maximum gross axleweight rating), have your loaded vehicle(including driver, occupants, cargo, and fulltrailer load if applicable) weighed on asuitable vehicle weighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,the trailer load/noseweight is included in theload along with occupants and luggage. The

trailer load/noseweight is usuallyapproximately 10% of the gross weight of thetrailer and its cargo.

Maximum tire load

G Warning!Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on theB-pillar on the driver's side or on the vehicleidentification plate on the driver seat frame.Overloading the tires can overheat them,possibly causing a blowout. Overloading thetires can also result in handling or steeringproblems, or brake failure.

Maximum tire load 265

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

i The actual values for tires are specific toeach vehicle and may deviate from thevalues in the illustration.

Maximum tire load : is the maximumpermitted weight for which the tire isapproved.Further information on tire loads(Y page 266).

Tire labeling

Overview of tire labelingThe following markings are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation)and the manufacturer's name:

: DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 268)

; Maximum tire load (Y page 265)= Maximum tire pressure (Y page 257)? ManufacturerA Tire material (Y page 268)B Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed index (Y page 266)C Tire name

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed index

: Design standard; Tire width= Nominal aspect ration in %? Tire codeA Rim diameterB Load bearing indexC Speed index

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.Instructions for tires can be found under"Tires and wheels" in the "Technical data"section (Y page 280).

General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter : that precedes the sizedescription.If "LT" precedes the size description (asshown above): these are light truck tiresaccording to U.S. manufacturing standards.If "C" precedes the size description: these arecommercial motor vehicle tires according toEuropean manufacturing standards.Tire width: tire width ; shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Nominal aspect ratio: aspect ratio = is thesize ratio between the tire height and the tirewidth and is shown in percent. The aspectratio is calculated by dividing the tire width bythe tire height.

266 Tire labelingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Tire code: tire code ? specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires. "D" representsdiagonal tires, "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Rim diameter: rim diameter A is thediameter of the bead seat, not the diameterof the rim flange. The rim diameter isspecified in inches (in).Load bearing index: load bearing index Bis a numerical code which specifies themaximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.

G WarningThe tire load rating must always be at leasthalf of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise,sudden tire failure may be the result whichcould cause an accident and/or serious injuryto you or others.Always replace rims and tires with rims andtires having the same specifications(designation, manufacturer and type) asshown on the original part.

G WarningDo not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

Example:The load bearing index 120 is equivalent to amaximum load of 3042 lbs (1380 kg) that thetire can carry. If two load-bearing capacityindices are specified (as shown above), thefirst number states the load-bearing capacityfor single tires, the second number the load-bearing capacity for twin tires. For furtherinformation on the maximum tire load inkilograms and pounds, see (Y page 265).Speed index: speed index C specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

G WarningEven when permitted by law, never operate avehicle at speeds greater than the maximumspeed rating of the tires.Exceeding the maximum speed for which tiresare rated can lead to sudden tire failure,causing loss of vehicle control and possiblyresulting in an accident and/or seriouspersonal injury and possible death, for youand for others.

Regardless of the speed index always observethe speed limits. Drive carefully and adaptyour driving style to the traffic conditions.

Index Speed rating

F up to 50 mph (80 km/h)

G up to 56 mph (90 km/h)

J up to 62 mph (100 km/h)

K up to 68 mph (110 km/h)

L up to 74 mph (120 km/h)

M up to 80 mph (130 km/h)

N up to 87 mph (140 km/h)

P up to 93 mph (150 km/h)

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R above 106 mph (170 km/h)

i Not all tires that have the M+Sidentification offer the drivingcharacteristics of winter tires. Winter tireshave, in addition to the M+S identification,the i snow flake symbol on the tiresidewall. Tires with this identification fulfillthe requirements of the RubberManufacturers Association (RMA) and theRubber Association of Canada (RAC)regarding the tire traction on snow andhave been especially developed for drivingon snow.

More information on reading the tire data canbe obtained at any qualified specialist

Tire labeling 267

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

workshop, e.g. at an authorized SprinterDealer.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every newtire manufacturer or retreader has to imprinta TIN in or on the sidewall of each tireproduced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tire manufacturers to informpurchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for thepurchaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufactureridentification code ;, tire size =, tire typecode ? and date of manufacture A.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol : marks that the tire complies withthe requirements of the U.S. Department ofTransportation.Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.Further information about retreaded tires(Y page 252).Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code ? can beused by the manufacturer as a code todescribe specific characteristics of the tire.

Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

Tire characteristics

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

This information describes the tire cord andthe number of layers in sidewall : and undertire tread ;.

Definition for tires and loading

Tire structure and characteristicsDescribes the number of layers or the numberof rubber-coated belts in the tire tread andthe tire wall. These consist of steel, nylon,polyester, and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa)correspond to one bar.

268 Definition for tires and loadingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

DOT (Department of Transportation)Tires with the DOT label fulfill therequirements of the U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Average weight of vehicle occupantsThe number of occupants for which thevehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lb).

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards

A uniform standard to grade the quality oftires with regard to tread quality, traction andtemperature characteristics. The qualitygrading assessment is made by themanufacturer following specifications fromthe U.S. government. The quality grade of atire is imprinted on the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressure FThe tire pressure recommended for yourvehicle for normal driving situations. Therecommendation can be found on the Tire &Loading Information placard13 or on the tirepressure plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside of the vehicle. The recommended tirepressure provides the best balance betweenhandling characteristics, ride comfort andwear.

Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment

The combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installedon the vehicle or not.

Wheel rimThe part of the wheel on which the tire ismounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. TheGross Axle Weight Rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the driver seatframe (Y page 277).

Speed indexThe speed index is part of the tireidentification. It specifies the speed range forwhich the tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants,luggage and the drawbar noseweight ifapplicable. The gross vehicle weight may notexceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) specified on the vehicle identificationplate on the driver seat frame (Y page 277).

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories,occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbarnoseweight if applicable). The Gross VehicleWeight Rating is specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the driver seat frame(Y page 277).

13 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs(4536 kg).

Definition for tires and loading 269

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Maximum weight of the laden vehicleThe maximum weight is the sum of theunladen weight of the vehicle, the weight ofthe accessories, the maximum load and theweight of the optional equipment installed atthe factory.

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa isequivalent to 1 psi. Another tire pressure unitis bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) is equivalent to1 bar.

Unladen weightThe weight of a vehicle with standardequipment including the maximum fillingcapacity of fuel, oil, and coolant. It alsoincludes the air-conditioning system andoptional equipment if these are installed onthe vehicle, but does not include passengersor luggage.

Maximum tire loadThe maximum tire load in kilograms orpounds is the maximum weight for which atire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing the maximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (Pounds per square inch)Standard unit of measurement for tirepressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and width inpercent.

Tire pressurePressure inside the tire applying an outwardforce to every square inch of the tire'ssurface. Tire pressure is specified in poundsper square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or inbar. Tire pressure should only be correctedwhen the tires are cold. For this, the vehiclemust have been stationary for at least threehours or not have traveled more than 1.6 km(1 mile) in this time.

Tire treadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

Tire beadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thetire bead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardpart and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).These optional extras, such as a roof rack or

270 Definition for tires and loadingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

a high-capacity battery, are not included inthe unladen weight and the weight of theaccessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)A unique identification number which can beused by a tire manufacturer to identify tires,for example for a product recall, and thusidentify the purchasers. The TIN is composedof the manufacturer identification code, tiresize, tire model code and manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains the maximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

Wear indicatorNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that aredistributed over the tire tread. If the tire treadis level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Distribution of the vehicle occupantsThe distribution of vehicle occupants overdesignated seat positions in a vehicle.

Maximum permissible payloadweight

Nominal load and cargo/luggage load plus68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by thenumber of seats in the vehicle.

Changing wheels

Flat tireThe "Flat tire" section in the "Practical advice"chapter (Y page 221) contains informationand notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Italso provides instructions on changing awheel or mounting the spare wheel.

Replacing wheels

G WarningRotate front and rear wheels only if the tiresare of the same dimension.If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-sizetires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear),tire rotation is not possible.

G WarningAfter changing a wheel, for safety reasons youmust:Rhave the tightening torque checked. For

wheel bolts, the tightening torque is177 lb-ft (240 Nm) (steel wheel)/133 lb-ft(180 Nm) (alloy wheel). For wheel nuts, thetightening torque is 133 lb-ft (180 Nm). Thewheels could otherwise work loose.Rcheck the tire pressure and correct it if

necessary.Rhave the wheel bolts/wheel nuts

retightened after driving a distance of 30miles (50 km). The tightening torque forwheel bolts is 177 lb-ft (240 Nm)(steelwheel)/133 lb-ft (180 Nm) (alloy wheel).The tightening torque for wheel nuts is133 lb-ft (180 Nm).Rif using new or painted rims, have the wheel

bolts and wheel nuts retightened at thespecified tightening torque after the vehiclehas been driven for approximately 600 to3000 miles (1000 to 5000 km).Rhave the direction of rotation corrected, if

reversed, as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedSprinter Dealer. The vehicle handling

Changing wheels 271

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

characteristics could otherwise beaffected.

Otherwise, the operating reliability and roadsafety of the vehicle could be jeopardized.This could cause you to lose control of yourvehicle, resulting in an accident and injuringyourself or others.

The vehicle tires are an essential componentin the overall performance and stability of thevehicle. The service life of tires is dependentupon and proportional to tire type, speedrating, environmental conditions, tire load,tire pressure, road quality and individualdriving style.For this reason, we recommend regularlychecking wear and correct tire pressure aswell as – according to the appropriate tireconfiguration of the vehicle – regularlyrotating the tires.The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to theintervals in the tire manufacturer's warrantybook in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should berotated every 3000 to 6000 miles(5000 to 10000 km), or earlier if tire wearrequires. Do not change the direction ofrotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressures.

! If your vehicle is equipped with the tirepressure monitor, each wheel has anelectronic component.Tire-mounting tools should not be appliedin the area of the valve. Otherwise, theelectronic components could be damaged.

Only have the tires changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedSprinter Dealer.

Diagram for rotating single tires and twin tires

Single tiresIf the tires have identical dimensions, youmay rotate the tires at the front and rear axlesin pairs so that the tires' original direction ofrotation remains the same. On unidirectionaltires, an arrow on the sidewall shows theprescribed direction of rotation of the tire.

Twin rear tiresIf the tires have identical dimensions, youmay rotate the tires at the front axle and theinner wheels at the rear axle in pairs so thatthe tires' original direction of rotationremains the same. With nondirectional tires,you may rotate the outside wheels at the rearaxle sideways.Information on changing wheels(Y page 229).

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain thesebenefits if the correct direction of rotation isobserved.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

272 Changing wheelsW

heel

s an

d tir

es

You may mount a spare wheel against thedirection of rotation. Observe the timerestriction on use as well as the speedlimitation specified on the spare wheel.

Storing wheelsStore wheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from contact with oil, grease and fuel.

Cleaning wheels

G WarningDo not use power washers with circular jetnozzles (concentrated-power jets) to cleanyour vehicle, especially for cleaning tires. Youcould otherwise damage the tires and causean accident.

Changing wheels 273

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

274

Vehicle equipment ............................ 276Genuine Sprinter parts ..................... 276Vehicle electronics ........................... 276Vehicle identification plates ............ 277Operating data .................................. 280Capacities .......................................... 287

275

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Vehicle equipment

i Diese Betriebsanleitung beschreibt alleModelle, Serien- und SonderausstattungenIhres Fahrzeugs, die zum Zeitpunkt desRedaktionsschlusses dieserBetriebsanleitung erhältlich waren.Länderspezifische Abweichungen sindmöglich. Beachten Sie, dass Ihr Fahrzeugnicht mit allen beschriebenen Funktionenausgestattet sein könnte. Dies betrifft auchsicherheitsrelevante Systeme undFunktionen.

Genuine Sprinter parts

We test genuine parts, conversion parts andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for the type of vehicle for:RreliabilityRsafetyRsuitabilityDespite ongoing market research, we areunable to assess other parts. We thereforeaccept no responsibility for the use of suchparts in Sprinters, even if they have beenindependently or officially approved.In Germany and some other countries, certainparts are only officially approved forinstallation or modification if they complywith legal requirements. All genuine Sprinterparts satisfy these requirements.Make sure that any replacement parts aresuitable for your vehicle. In many countries,parts which result in a modification to thevehicle could invalidate the vehicle's generaloperating permit.This is the case if:Rthey cause a change to the vehicle type

from that for which the vehicle's generaloperating permit was granted.Rother road users could be endangered.Remission or noise levels are adversely

affected.

The use of non-approved parts could affectyour vehicle's operating safety. We thereforerecommend that you use genuine Sprinterparts, conversion parts and accessories thathave been approved for the type of vehicle.%Environmental noteWe supply reconditioned assemblies andparts which are of the same quality as newparts. The same New Vehicle LimitedWarranty applies as for new parts.Genuine Sprinter parts, approved conversionparts and accessories are available from anauthorized Sprinter Dealer. Here you willreceive advice about permissible technicalmodifications, and the parts will beprofessionally installed.Always provide the vehicle's identificationnumber and the engine number whenordering genuine parts. The numbers can befound on the vehicle identification plate ofyour vehicle (Y page 277).

Vehicle electronics

Tampering with the engineelectronics

G Warning!For safety reasons and to preserve theGeneral Operating Permit, have proceduresinvolving engine electronics and associatedparts performed only at a qualified specialistworkshop that has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired. Your driving safety may otherwisebe impaired.For this reason, we recommend an authorizedSprinter Dealer. In particular, all work relevantto safety or on safety-related systems mustbe carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! Always have the engine electronicssystem and its components such as controlunits, sensors and connector leadsserviced at a qualified specialist workshop,

276 Vehicle electronicsTe

chni

cal d

ata

for example an authorized Sprinter Dealer.Otherwise, the vehicle parts may wear outmore quickly. This can invalidate thegeneral operating permit and the insurancecover, and lead to the loss of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

Retrofitting electrical or electronicequipment

Electrical and electronic equipment canjeopardize the operational safety of thevehicle. If equipment of this kind is retrofitted,it must be type-approved and bear the emark. The e mark may be obtained from theequipment manufacturer or an authorizedtesting center.

! Damage or consequential damage arisingfrom installing equipment that is notapproved for Sprinters is not covered bythe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If you wish to install telephones or two-wayradios in the vehicle, you must obtain formalapproval.For operation of mobile phones and two-wayradios, We recommend connection to anapproved exterior antenna. This is the onlyway to ensure optimum reception qualityinside the vehicle and to minimize mutualinterference between the vehicle electronics,mobile phones and two-way radios.

G WarningExcessive electromagnetic radiation mayconstitute a health hazard to yourself andothers. Use of an exterior antenna givesconsideration to scientific discussionsurrounding the possible health risk posed byelectromagnetic fields.The exterior antenna should only be installedat a qualified specialist workshop which hasthe necessary specialist knowledge and toolsto carry out the work required. Werecommend that you use an authorizedSprinter Dealer for this purpose. In particular,work relevant to safety or on safety-related

systems must be carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

The transmission output of the mobile phoneor two-way radio must not exceed themaximum transmission outputs listed.

Frequency range Maximum transmission output (PEAK)

Short wave(f < 50 MHz)

100 W

4 m waveband 30 W

2 m waveband 50 W

Trunked radio/Tetra 35 W

70 cm waveband 35 W

GSM 900/AMPS 10 W

GSM 1800 10 W

UMTS 10 W

! If electrical or electronic equipmentwhich does not fulfill these conditions isused in the vehicle, the vehicle's generaloperating permit may be invalidated.

Vehicle identification plates

Vehicle identification platesThe vehicle identification plate with thevehicle identification number (VIN), the paintcode, and the specifications for thepermissible weights is located on the base ofthe driver's seat.

Vehicle identification plates 277

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

Base of the driver's seat: Vehicle identification plate with vehicle

identification number for vehicles orchassis

The VIN is also stamped into the rear wall ofthe engine compartment (Y page 279).

Example of a vehicle identification plate (USvehicles); VIN= Paint code

Example of a chassis identification plate (USvehicles); VIN= Paint code

Example of a vehicle identification plate (vehiclesfor Canada); VIN= Paint code

Example of a chassis identification plate (vehiclesfor Canada); VIN= Paint code

278 Vehicle identification platesTe

chni

cal d

ata

Engine compartment? VIN (stamped on the rear wall of the

engine compartment)A Engine number (stamped on the

crankcase)B Emission Control Information and engine

oil14 label

Example: Emission Control Information label

i The data shown in the pictures is for thepurposes of illustration. Such data isvehicle-specific and can differ from thatshown. Always observe the specificationson your vehicle's identification plate.

Tire platesThe Tire and Loading Information label15 orthe Tire Pressure label is on the B-pillar on thedriver's side. You will find the required tirepressure values for the vehicle's original tireson the relevant tire labels.

The Tire and Loading Information label alsospecifies the number of seats and thepermissible load.

: Tire and Loading Information label or TirePressure label

Tire and Loading Information label

Tire Pressure label; Number of seats= Permissible load? Recommended pressure for cold tires

14 Note also the engine oil information for diesel engines under "Service products" in the "Operation" section.15 Vehicles with a permissible gross weight of up to 10,000 lbs(4536 kg) only.

Vehicle identification plates 279

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

i The data shown in the pictures is for thepurposes of illustration. Such data isvehicle-specific and can differ from thatshown. Always observe the specificationson your vehicle's tire label.

The tire pressure information applies to allload levels up to the permissible gross weightand is only valid for original tires in their coldstate.

Operating data

General notesThe "Technical data" section containsimportant technical data for your vehicle.You can find vehicle-specific and equipment-dependent technical data in your vehicleregistration papers, such as:Rengine power output dataRspeedsRvehicle dimensionsRvehicle weights

Tires and wheels! Only use tire and rim sizes approved for

your type of vehicle. These have beenspecially adapted for use with the controlsystems, such as ABS or ESP®.

Take note of the operating safety informationon tires and wheels in the "Tires and wheels"section (Y page 252).

i In particular, please also observe thepermissible tire specifications in yourcountry.These specifications may stipulate acertain tire type for your vehicle and/orprohibit the use of certain tire typespermitted in other countries.Observe the required tire load-bearingcapacity and the speed index for yourvehicle.

Information about wheels and tires can beobtained from any authorized SprinterDealer. You will find details about the originaltires on the tire data label on the B-pillar onthe driver's side of your vehicle(Y page 279).

280 Operating dataTe

chni

cal d

ata

Overview

Vehicle type 2500 3500

Rim size (pressed-steel rim) 6.5 J x 16 5.5 J x 16

Rim size (alloy rim) 6.5 J x 16 —

Offset 2.13 in (54 mm) —

Half distance from center tocenter

— 4.82 in (122.5 mm)

Wheel attachment Wheel bolts Wheel nuts

Tightening torques (pressed-steel rim)

177 lb-ft (240 Nm) 133 lb-ft (180 Nm)

Tightening torques (alloy rim) 133 lb-ft (180 Nm) —

Summer tires — —

All-weather tires16 LT 245/75 R16 120/116N LT 215/85 R16 115/112N

LT 215/85 R16 115/112Q

Winter tires16 LT 245/75 R16 120/116NM+S i

LT 215/85 R16 115/112NM+S i

Tire pressureTake note of the information on tire pressurein the "Wheels and tires" section(Y page 255).

G WarningUnderinflated tires:Rjeopardize driving safetyRdamage or destroy the tiresRlead to overheating of tires, even to the

point of catching fireYou could thereby lose control of the vehicleand injure yourself and others.For this reason, check the tire pressureregularly before starting a journey and correctit if necessary.

Correct the tire pressure before loading. If thevehicle is loaded, check the tire pressure, andcorrect it if necessary.

While driving, dependent on driving speedsand load, the tire temperature and with it, thetire pressure rise.You should thus only correct tire pressureswhen the tires are cold. If the tires are warm,you may only correct tire pressures when:Rtaking the respective tire temperatures into

consideration with the vehicle laden, thevalues apparent from the tire pressuretable are not exceeded.Rtaking the respective tire temperatures into

consideration with the vehicle unladen, thevalues apparent from the tire pressuretable are not met.

The tires are considered cold if the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least 3 hours or beendriven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) with anoutside temperature of about 68 ‡ (20 †).

i The tire pressure changes byapproximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi) per

16 Radial tires.

Operating data 281

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

18 ‡ (10 †) in air temperature. This mustbe observed when checking tire pressureinside a building – especially in winter.Example:Room temperature = approximately 68 ‡(20 †)Outside temperature = approximately 32 ‡(0 †)Tire pressure to be set: prescribed tirepressure +20 kPa (+0.2 bar/+3 psi).

! The difference in pressures in the tires ofan axle must not be greater than10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi).A tire pressure less than 300 kPa (3.0 bar/43.6 psi) is not permissible.

The tire pressure values in the following tableapply to all load conditions up to themaximum permissible gross vehicle weightand only to the specified original tires in coldcondition. The values are determined by thepermissible axle loads found on the vehicleidentification plate on the driver seat frame(Y page 277).

i Additionally, you will find the stipulatedtire pressure values on the tire data labelon the B-pillar on the driver's side of yourvehicle (Y page 279).

282 Operating dataTe

chni

cal d

ata

Tire pressure table

Tires Permissible axle loads (see vehicle identification plate)

Front axle Rear axle

3970 lbs (1801 kg)

4080 lbs (1851 kg)

4410 lbs (2000 kg)

5360 lbs (2431 kg)

7060 lbs (3202 kg)

7720 lbs (3502 kg)

LT 215/85 R 16115/112 N

— 380 kPa(3.8 bar/55 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

— 380 kPa(3.8 bar/55 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

LT 215/85 R 16115/112 Q

— 380 kPa(3.8 bar/55 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

— 380 kPa(3.8 bar/55 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

LT 245/75 R 16120/116 N

320 kPa(3.2 bar/47 psi)

— — 480 kPa(4.8 bar/70 psi)

— —

Lashing points and carrier systems

Lashing points! Observe the information on the maximum

loading capacity of the lashing points.If you use multiple lashing points to securea load, you should observe the maximumloading capacity of the weakest lashingpoint.When you brake hard, for example, forcesapply that can be far higher than the weightforce of the transported load. Always usemultiple lashing points to distribute theseforces, and distribute the load equallyamong them.

You will find further information about lashingpoints and cargo tie-down rings in the"Operation" section (Y page 146).

Cargo tie-down ringsThe maximum tensile load of the cargo tie-down rings is:

Cargo tie-down rings

Permissible nominal tensile load

Passenger Van 786.5 lbf(3500 N)

Cargo Van 1124.0 lbf(5000 N)

Operating data 283

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

Load railsThe maximum tensile loads of the lashingpoints in the cargo compartment are:

Lashing point Permissible nominal tensile load

Load rails on cargofloor

1124.0 lbf(5000 N)

Lower load rail onsidewall

562.0 lbf(2500 N)

Upper load rail onsidewall

337.0 lbf(1500 N)

The values specified apply only to loadsplaced on the floor of the cargo compartmentif:Rthe load is secured to 2 lashing points on

the rail andRthe distance to the next load securing point

on the same rail is approx. 3 ft (1 m).

Roof carrier

G WarningIf you have installed a roof carrier, thevehicle’s handling, steering and brakingcharacteristics may change due to the highercenter of gravity. This is the case particularlyif the roof carrier is laden. Adapt your drivingstyle according to the vehicle load.Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions. An incorrectly secured roofcarrier and/or load could come loose, fall offand thereby endanger you or others.Observe the maximum roof load andmaximum roof carrier load. Loads transportedon the roof must always be secured withparticular care.Do not allow the load, including passengers,to exceed the permissible gross vehicleweight or the gross axle weight rating for yourvehicle.

Maximum roof load and minimum number ofpairs of roof carrier supports on vehicles with:

Maximum roof load

Minimum number of pairs of supports

Standardroof

660 lbs(300 kg)

6

High roof 330 lbs(150 kg)

3

The data is valid for a load distributed evenlyover the entire roof area.

! The weight of any load carried on the roof,including the roof carrier, must not exceedthe maximum permissible roof load.The roof carrier supports must be mountedat equal distances.We recommend that you have a stabilizerbar installed to the front axle.

Reduce the load on shorter roof carriersproportionately. The maximum load per pairof roof carrier supports is 110 lbs(50 kg).

! For safety reasons, we recommend thatyou only use roof carrier systems whichhave been tested and approved forSprinters. This will help to avoid damage.

Loading directions and other informationconcerning load distribution and loadsecuring can be found in the "Operation"section (Y page 144).

Trailer tow hitchi We recommend that trailer tow hitches be

retrofitted at an authorized Sprinter Dealer

i Only use a trailer tow hitch which hasbeen tested and specially approved by thedistributor named on the inside of the frontcover for your vehicle.

The permitted weight and load values, whichmust not be exceeded, can be found in your

284 Operating dataTe

chni

cal d

ata

vehicle's registration papers and on the typeplate of the trailer coupling, the trailer and thevehicle identification plate (Y page 277). Inthe event that the data stated differs, thelower value applies.Make sure that you adhere to the weightrestrictions by having the weight checked ata public weighbridge.

! The permissible gross combinationweight is less than the sum of thepermissible gross vehicle weight plus thepermissible trailer load. Exceeding thepermissible gross combination weight canlead to damage to the drivetrain, to thetransmission or to the trailer tow hitch.For this reason, applicable values for thepermissible gross vehicle weight or thepermissible trailer load are reducedaccordingly if either the vehicle or thetrailer is fully loaded. In this case, the traileror the vehicle may only be partially loaded.

Operating data 285

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

Maximum permitted weights and loads

Type ofvehicle

GrossvehicleweightGVWR

Grossfront axleloadGAWR(FA)

Gross rearaxle loadGAWR(RA)

Grosscombinationweight17

GCWR

Trailerload18

GTW

Maximumpermissible noseweightTWR

2500 8550 lbs(3878 kg)

3970 lbs(1801 kg)

5360 lbs(2431 kg)

13,550 lbs(6146 kg)

5000 lbs(2268 kg)

500 lbs(227 kg)

3500 9900 lbs(4490 kg)Canada

only

4080 lbs(1851 kg)

7060 lbs(3202 kg)

14,900 lbs(6759 kg)

5000 lbs(2268 kg)

500 lbs(227 kg)

4410 lbs(2000 kg)

15,250 lbs(6917 kg)

7500 lbs(3402 kg)

750 lbs(340 kg)

9990 lbsUSA only(4531 kg)

4080 lbs(1851 kg)

7060 lbs(3202 kg)

14,900 lbs(6759 kg)

5000 lbs(2268 kg)

500 lbs(227 kg)

4410 lbs(2000 kg)

15,250 lbs(6917 kg)

7500 lbs(3402 kg)

750 lbs(340 kg)

11,030 lbs(5003 kg)

4080 lbs(1851 kg)

7720 lbs(3502 kg)

15,250 lbs(6917 kg)

5000 lbs(2268 kg)

500 lbs(227 kg)

4410 lbs(2000 kg)

7500 lbs(3402 kg)

750 lbs(340 kg)

17 Maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle and trailer including a driver weight of 68 kg.18 Maximum permissible gross weight of the trailer.

286 Operating dataTe

chni

cal d

ata

Capacities

Engine with oilfilter

Fuel tank DEF tank Coolingsystem

Windshield/headlampcleaningsystem

Engine oil ULTRA-LOWSULFUR DIESEL

Diesel ExhaustFluid (DEF)19

Coolant20 Washer fluidwith windshieldwasherconcentrate

13.21 US qt(12.5 l)

25.0 US gal(100 l)21

3.2 US gal(12.0 l)/4.9 US gal(18.5 l)/5.8 US gal(22.0 l)22

10.75 US qt(10.0 l)

Approx. 6.3 US qt(6.0 l)

19 DEF according to ISO 22241. Observe MB Specifications for Service Products, Sheet No. 352.0.20 When the coolant is being renewed, the coolant must contain 50 % by volume of anticorrosion/antifreeze

agent. This is equivalent to antifreeze protection down to –34.6 ‡ (–37 †). Do not exceed a ratio of55 % by volume (antifreeze protection down to approximately –49.0 ‡ (–45 †). Heat dissipation is otherwiseinsufficient. Observe the MB Specifications for Service Products, Sheet No. 310.1.

21 Including a reserve of 5.3 US gal (20 l).22 Chassis Cab only.

Capacities 287

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

288

ImpressumInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles can be found on the followingwebsite:www.mercedes-benz.com

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries orsuggestions you may have regarding thismanual to the technical documentation teamat the address mentioned on the inside of thefront cover.© Mercedes-Benz USA LLC© Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc.Mercedes-Benz USA LLC and Mercedes-BenzCanada Inc. are Daimler companies.Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwisereproduced, in whole or in part, withoutwritten permission.Printed in U.S.APress date: August 1, 2010

As at 30.04.2010

Order no. 6462 7471 13 Part no. 906 584 48 71 Edition B MY 2011 MB

É90658448718ËÍ9065844871